Introduction To Mechanical Engineering PDF
Introduction To Mechanical Engineering PDF
J. Paulo Davim Editor
Introduction
to
Mechanical
Engineering
Materials Forming, Machining and Tribology
Series editor
J. Paulo Davim, Aveiro, Portugal
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
More information about this series at http://www.springer.com/series/11181
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
J. Paulo Davim
Editor
Introduction to Mechanical
Engineering
123
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
Editor
J. Paulo Davim
Department of Mechanical Engineering
University of Aveiro
Aveiro
Portugal
This Springer imprint is published by the registered company Springer International Publishing AG
part of Springer Nature
The registered company address is: Gewerbestrasse 11, 6330 Cham, Switzerland
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
Preface
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
vi Preface
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
Contents
vii
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
viii Contents
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
About the Editor
ix
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
Part I
Materials, Design and Manufacturing
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
Chapter 1
Mechanical Properties of Engineering
Materials: Relevance in Design
and Manufacturing
Viktor P. Astakhov
1 Conceptual Introduction
The term “knowledge-based economy” results from a fuller recognition of the role
of knowledge and technology in economic growth. Knowledge in technology has
always been central to economic development. But only over recent years has its
relative importance been recognized, just as that importance is growing. This is
because, in today’s rapidly changing product marketplace, the critical requirements
for product quality, productivity, and reliability have been becoming the most
powerful driving force behind any new product design and development.
Products achieve success through a combination of sound technical design and
effective manufacturing process to achieve the requirements set by the design. The
V. P. Astakhov (&)
General Motors Business Unit of PSMi, 1792 Elk Ln, Okemos, MI 48864, USA
e-mail: [email protected]
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
4 V. P. Astakhov
amalgam creates product quality, which is the way material and processes are used
to provide functionality, usability, and satisfaction in ownership. This chapter aims
to explain (not just formally lists as it commonly done in the reference literature) the
basic mechanical properties of part materials in terms of their relevance in the
design and manufacturing. Although the material of this chapter is kept at the
introductory level following the known Einstein’s famous saying: “Make it as
simple as possible, but not simpler,” the chapter presents unique synergetic
approach unifying the design and manufacturing stage in terms of material prop-
erties. Moreover, the standard designation and proper definition of the terms related
to mechanical properties of engineering materials provided in the chapter aim to
provide an essential help to beginners in mechanical engineering.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 5
(a) (b)
Specimen
shear than in tension or compression, resulting in different values for strength and
stiffness. Usually performed on fasteners, such as bolts, machine screws, and rivets,
shear testing applies a lateral shear force to the specimen until failure results. Apart
from tension tests, there are a number of various standards on shear testing. One of
the most common shear tests is the double shear test of metallic materials. This test
can be carried out on the tensile machine using a standard fixture shown in Fig. 1b.
Tensile tests are performed for several reasons [1]. The results of tensile tests are
used in selecting materials for engineering applications. Basic tensile properties are
normally included in material specifications to be used in the design and manu-
facturing of products. Tensile properties are often used to predict the behavior of a
material under forms of loading other than uniaxial tension (discussed later in this
chapter).
The strength of a material often is the primary concern. The strength of interest
may be measured in terms of either the stress necessary to cause appreciable plastic
deformation or the maximum stress that the material can withstand before
fracturing.
These measures of strength are used, with appropriate caution (in the form of
safety factors discussed later in this chapter), in engineering design. Also of interest
is the material’s ductility, which is a measure of how much it can be deformed
before it fractures. Rarely is ductility incorporated directly in design; rather, it is a
key property in materials manufacturing including forming and cutting as discussed
later in this chapter.
In the tension test, a specimen of standard dimension (one of the standard
specimens is shown in Fig. 2) is subjected to a continually increasing uniaxial
tensile force while simultaneous observations of the elongation of the specimen.
The results of the tension test are stress–strain diagrams. A stress–strain diagram
is a diagram in which corresponding values of stress and strain are plotted against
each other. Values of stress are usually plotted as ordinates (vertically) and values
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
6 V. P. Astakhov
Fig. 2 Geometry of one of the standard specimens: d0 is the diameter of specimen; d1 is the
diameter of grip (>1.2d0); L0 is the gage length (L0 = 5d0); Lc is parallel length (Lc = L0 + d0) Lt is
the total length; h is the height of grip
F
s¼ ð1Þ
A0
Fig. 3 Standard tension test: a deformation in testing and b typical stress–strain diagram
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 7
where F is the tensile force and A0 is the initial cross-sectional area of the gage
section. Obviously, if the specimen is round then A0 ¼ pd02 =4.
Engineering strain, or nominal strain, e, is defined as
DL
e¼ ð2Þ
L0
where L0 is the initial gage length and DL is the change in gage length (L − L0).
Multiple detailed descriptions of a typical stress–strain diagram is presented in
the literature, e.g., in [2]. The most important aspect relevant in mechanical engi-
neering is segments shown by numbered points in Fig. 3b. When a solid material is
subjected to small stresses, the bonds between the atoms are stretched. When the
stress is removed, the bonds relax and the material returns to its original shape. This
reversible deformation is called elastic deformation represented by segment 1–2 in
the diagram. For most materials, segment 1–2 is linear. The slope of this linear
segment is called the elastic modulus or Young’s modulus.
s
E¼ ð3Þ
e
In the elastic range, the ratio, l, of the magnitude of the lateral contraction strain
to the axial strain is called Poisson’s ratio.
ey
l¼ ðin an x-direction testÞ ð4Þ
ex
At point 2, stresses become high enough to cause planes of atoms slide over one
another. This deformation, which is not recovered when the stress is removed, is
termed plastic deformation. Note that the term “plastic deformation” does not mean
that the deformed material is a plastic (a polymeric material).
Segment 2–3 represents the so-called the transient effects (or yielding instabil-
ity). For some materials (e.g., low carbon steels and many linear polymers), the
stress–strain curves have initial maxima followed by lower stresses as shown in
Fig. 3b. After the initial maximum, all the deformation at any instant is occurring
within a relatively small region of the specimen with no stress increase. This
segment is noticeable only for relatively ductile materials, while for relatively brittle
materials a smooth transition of segment 1–2 into segment 3–4 is the case.
Segment 3–4 is called the strain-hardening region. When a metal is stressed
beyond its elastic limit, it enters the plastic region (the region in which residual
strain remains upon unloading). When the load is increased further (a kind of
rearrangement occurs at atom level and the mobility of the dislocation decreases),
“dislocation density” increases that in turn makes the metal harder and stronger
through the resulting plastic deformation. It means it is more difficult to deform the
metal as the strain increases, and hence it is called “strain hardening.” This tends to
increase the strength of the metal and decrease its ductility. Note that the maximum
stress in the diagram is achieved at point 4.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
8 V. P. Astakhov
Segment 4–5 is the necking region. Necking is defined by standard ASTM E8/
E8M—16a as the onset of nonuniform or localized plastic deformation, resulting in
a localized reduction of cross-sectional area. In this region, relatively large amounts
of strain localize disproportionately in a small region of the material. The resulting
prominent decrease in local cross-sectional area provides the basis for the name
“neck.” Note that because engineering stress [see Eq. (3)] is calculated through the
initial diameters of the specimen, d0 (and hence A0), the stress in the diagram on
segment 4–5 decreases although in reality, when the actual diameter of the neck is
considered, it increases.
Two more segments shown in the diagram (Fig. 3b) are of interest. The first is
segment 1–9 that represents the maximum elastic strain ee; segment 1–6 that rep-
resents the maximum strain at the instant of fracture; segment 6–7 is elastic
recovery of the specimen after fracture. Note that line 5–7 is drawn parallel to line
1–2. Although this segment is of small interest in the design, it is of significant
importance in part manufacturing; segment 1–7 is known at strain at fracture, i.e.,
the plastic strain in the specimen as measured as two parts of the fractured specimen
are brought together. From the beginning of loading (point 1) to the beginning of
necking (point 4), the specimen undergoes uniform elongating whereas starting
from point 4 till point 4 it undergoes necking elongation.
The common tensile properties directly obtained from the stress–strain diagram
are:
– Modulus of Elasticity, E [see Eq. (3)]. Young’s modulus, also known as the
elastic modulus, is a measure of the stiffness of a solid material. Stiffness is
understood as resistance of a material to deformation like elongation, twisting,
bending, and deflection.
– Yield Tensile Strength, Sy. Yield strength is the stress at which a material
exhibits a deviation from the proportionality of stress to strain; i.e., the occur-
rence permanents plastic strain is the case.
– Ultimate Tensile Strength, Su. Ultimate tensile strength (a.k.a. UTS) is the
maximum stress developed by the material based on the original cross-sectional
area.
– Elongation at fracture or engineering strain, ef. It is normally reported in %,
that is ef 100%.
Some other important properties and terms used in engineering literature are:
Toughness. There are a number of different approaches to toughness charac-
terization and methods of measurements discussed in the literature [3] or set by
standards (e.g., ISO 26843:2015 “Metallic materials. Measurement of fracture
toughness at impact loading rates using precracked Charpy-type test pieces”;
ASTM E23 “Standard Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic
Materials”). In the author’s opinion, the most engineering-sound approach having
clear physical meaning is the energy need to fracture of a unit volume of a material
so it is measured in J/m3. It is characterized by the modulus of toughness which is
the total energy absorption capabilities of the material to fracture, and thus is given
by the total area under the s–e curve such that
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 9
Zef
Sy þ Su
Ut ¼ sde ef ð5Þ
2
0
Zee
S y ee
Ur ¼ sde ð6Þ
2
0
Typical values of Ur and Ut are listed in Table 1 for some common engineering
materials.
Hardness. Standard ASTM E6.14406-1 defines hardness as the resistance of a
material to deformation, particularly permanent deformation, indentation, or
scratching. In reality, it is the resistance of a material to indenter penetration so one
should not have any extended interpretation of this characteristic. It is tested for
with an indenter hardness machine usually (but not solely) by measuring the size of
the indentation after releasing the load.
The most known of the hard materials is diamond. It is so hard; it is usually used
as the penetration material (for the Vickers hardness, for example). A typically soft
material is aluminum metal or any plastic.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
10 V. P. Astakhov
Hardness correlates well with scratch-proof ability meaning that harder materials
are harder to scratch, i.e., the greater its abrasion resistance. For metallic materials,
hardness is uniquely correlated with the ultimate tensile strength of the material as
documented in [4]. Therefore, harder materials are also stronger materials and vice
versa.
Ductility. This property is defined by standard ASTM E8/E8M—16a as the
ability of a material to deform plastically before fracturing. Ductility is usually
evaluated by measuring (1) the elongation or reduction of area from a tension test,
(2) the depth of cup from a cupping test, (3) the radius or angle of bend from the
bend test, or (4) the fatigue ductility from the fatigue ductility test. Malleability is
the ability to deform plastically under repetitive compressive forces.
Unfortunately, there is no usable theory of ductile behavior. Ductility is mea-
sured by dozens of methods, all contradictory, none leading to practical forecasts of
a part’s behavior. Moreover, the limit is not sharp either. At our present degree of
understanding, ductility is a qualitative, subjective property of a material. In gen-
eral, measurements of ductility are of interest in three ways:
1. To indicate the extent to which a material can be deformed without fracture in
metalworking operations such as rolling and extrusion.
2. To indicate to the designer, in a general way, the ability of the metal to flow
plastically before fracture. A high ductility indicates that the material is “for-
giving” and likely to deform locally without fracture should the designer made a
mistake in the stress calculation or the prediction of severe loads.
3. To serve as an indicator of changes in impurity level or processing conditions.
Ductility measurements may be specified to assess material quality even though
no direct relationship exists between the ductility measurement and performance
in service.
A common definition is a material with less than 0.05 (5%) elongation (strain) at
fracture is brittle. This includes ceramics, glasses, and some metal alloys. Cast iron
would be classified as brittle. For reference, Fig. 4 shows the elongation at fracture
of some common engineering materials.
In shear tests (Fig. 1b), the shear force Fs acts tangentially to the top area A as
shown in Fig. 5a. The shear stress s measures the intensity of a reaction to exter-
nally applied loading sustained by the material as it maintains equilibrium with this
force. This stress is calculated as
Fs
s¼ ð7Þ
A
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 11
that the term “engineering” is used here to explain the occurrence of segment 3–4 in
the stress–strain diagram. In testing (schematic of which is shown in Fig. 5c), the
ultimate shear strength occurs just before two cracks begin to develop at points
A and B. After the cracks start to run toward each other along the shear plane, the
initial shearing area represented by shear plane reduces in full analogy with the
necking in tension tests.
In this plot, the engineering shear strain refers to the angular distortion that a
material suffers in shear. The shear strain is a dimensionless measure of distortion
and is defined in Fig. 5a as
c ¼ tan / ð8Þ
In Eq. (8), / is the angular change in the right angle measured in radians. Within
the elastic region, the shear displacement DL is small so / is also small. For small
enough angles, the tangent of an angle is equal to the angle itself (when measured in
radians) so that the engineering shear strain can be approximated as c / (rad).
Note that this is not nearly the case in metal forming and cutting when large
deformations take place.
In full analogy with the normal stress, Hooke’s law is valid for the considered
case provided the shear stress varies linearly with shear strain and the shear
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
12 V. P. Astakhov
Fig. 5 Standard shear test: a deformation in testing, b typical stress–strain diagram, c test
schematics
modulus, G, is the slope of the shear stress–strain (Fig. 5b), and thus it may be
determined from the slope of the stress–strain curve or by dividing stress by strain,
s
G¼ ð9Þ
c
Shear properties can also be found from a right circular cylinder loaded in torsion,
i.e., in widely performed torsion tests. In solid mechanics, torsion is the twisting of
an object due to an applied torque. Torque, like a linear force, will produce both
stress and the strain. Torsion causes a twisting stress, called shear stress (s), and a
rotation, called shear strain (c). A simple model of a torsion test shown in Fig. 6
includes a cylindrical body, which essentially is cantilever beam one end of which
is rigidly fixed and torque T is applied to the other (free) end.
In Fig. 6a, a line AB is drawn on the surface parallel to the beam longitudinal
axis. When the torque is applied to the free end of the circular beam (as shown in
this figure), line AB becomes helical assuming position AB′ in which angle of helix
is ctw. The beam twists by an angle htw. This angle is a function of the beam length,
L, and stiffness represented by shear modulus G. The twist angle starts at 0 at the
fixed end of the beam and increases linearly as a function of z-distance from this
end. The change of angle, ctw, is constant along the length.
A small differential element, dz, is sliced from the beam as shown in Fig. 6b.
Because the cross sections bounded this element are separated by an infinitesimal
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 13
Fig. 6 Model of torsion: a A circular beam loaded by torque T and b small circular element dz
distance, the difference in their rotations, denoted by the angle dhtw, is also
infinitesimal. As the cross sections undergo the relative rotation dhtw, straight line
CD deforms into the helix CD′. By observing the distortion of the sliced element, it
should be recognized that the helix angle ctw is the shear strain of the element.
Two angles ctw and dhtw must be compatible at the outside edge (arc length D–D
′). This gives the relationship
dhtw
ctw ¼ q ð11Þ
dz
The quantity dhtw/dx is the angle of twist per unit length, where htw is expressed in
radians. The corresponding shear stress (Fig. 7a) is determined from Hooke’s law
as
dhtw
s ¼ Gctw ¼ Gq ð12Þ
dz
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
14 V. P. Astakhov
A simple analysis of Eq. (12) reveals that the shear stress varies linearly with the
radial distance q from the axial of the beam. This variation is shown in Fig. 7b. As
can be seen, the maximum shear stress, denoted by smax, occurs at the surface of the
beam. Note that the above derivations assume neither a constant internal torque nor
a constant cross section along the length of the beam, i.e., valid for a general case.
Two important conclusions follow from this analysis:
– As the maximum shear stress occurs at the surface of a beam/shaft, shaft can be
made hollow with minimum compromising of the shaft torsional strength. Using
hollow shafts, one can achieve a significant weight reduction—it is widely used
in the aerospace industry.
– In the direct torsion test/application, the critical shear stress (yield or ultimate)
occurs over the entire cross-sectional area of the specimen/part that leads to
failure. In torsion, the critical stress occurs only on the surface that does not lead
to failure as the rest of the shaft takes the applied torque.
The shear modulus, G, is related to Young’s modulus, E, as
E
G¼ ð13Þ
2ð1 þ lÞ
As Poisson’s ratio, l (Eq. 4), varies between 0.3 and 0.5 for most materials, the
shear modulus is often approximated by G * E/3.
Two other torsion-related parameters are considered in the technical literature.
Torsional rigidity is the ability of an object to resist torsion or in layman’s terms
“twisting,” due to an applied torque torsional stiffness or rotational stiffness KT is
defined as the ration of the applied torque, T to the angle of twist, h i.e.,
T
KT ¼ ð14Þ
h
The engineering stress–strain curve does not give a true indication of the defor-
mation characteristics of a metal because it is based entirely on the original
dimensions of the specimen, and these dimensions change continuously during the
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 15
test. Also, ductile metal which is pulled in tension becomes unstable and necks
down during the course of the test.
The initial cross-sectional area of the specimen, A0, does not change noticeably
over the elastic region unless rubber-like materials are considered. However, the
cross-sectional area of the specimen is decreasing rapidly after the yield point (point 2
in the diagram shown in Fig. 3b). As a result, the load required continuing defor-
mation falls off as the engineering stress based on original area likewise decreases,
and this produces the fall-off in the stress–strain curve beyond the point of maximum
load (segment 2–3 in Fig. 3b). In reality, the metal continues to strain-harden all the
way up to fracture, so that the stress required to produce further deformation should
also increase. The true stress, designated as r, is based on the actual cross-sectional
area of the specimen. If it is used, then the stress–strain curve increases continuously
up to fracture as shown by the dashed curve r = f(e) in Fig. 3b. Obviously that the
true stress, r, is related to engineering stress/elongation, e, as
r ¼ s ð 1 þ eÞ ð16Þ
How close are the values of e and e? Figure 8 shows the engineering and true
strains for values up to 1. The agreement is quite good for strains of less than 0.1.
Advantages of using the true strain e compared to engineering strain e are:
1. It is the exact value, not an approximation.
2. Sequential strains can be added: If two strains e1 and e2 are executed sequen-
tially, the total strain is
L1 L2 L1 L2 L2
e1 þ e2 ¼ ln þ ln ¼ ln ¼ ln ð18Þ
L0 L1 L0 L1 L0
This is not the case with the engineering strain where the total strain is
L2 L0 L 1 L 0 L2 L 1
6¼ e1 þ e2 ¼ þ ð19Þ
L0 L0 L0
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
16 V. P. Astakhov
At the design stage, the concept designs of the machine and units are developed to
meet the intended requirements of machine performance, quality, and reliability. As
such, the power inputs and outputs, velocities, limiting weight, operating envi-
ronment, and many other operating parameters are defined. Once approved, the
units are decomposed into parts and a model for each responsible part is constructed
to determine the limiting stress considered as the design criterion. Based on the
limiting stress, size, and weight limitations as well as the physical properties
required for the part’s intended performance (e.g., thermal conductivity), the type
and grade of the part material are selected by the designer. The problem is in the
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 17
proper selection of this limiting stress. The practice of the design shows that such a
selection is not simple and straightforward.
The first encounter of mechanical engineers with the limiting stress takes place
in university/college courses on mechanics of material where stresses and stress
distribution in mainly beams loaded by various forces, moments, and torques are
calculated and the maximum stress over a certain (often referred to as the critical)
section of a beam is found. When the beam is made of a ductile material, this
maximum stress is compared to the yield tensile or shear strength (chosen as the
design criterion) making sure that this maximum is less or equal to the design
criterion. As such, plastic deformation of the beam is considered as its failure mode.
If, however, the beam material is brittle, the ultimate strength is selected as the
design criterion, and thus, fracture of the beam is considered as its failure mode.
The listed mechanical properties of few common materials are provided in the
student’s textbook that creates impression that these properties are constants for the
listed materials, and thus can readily be found when needed.
Being simple and clear for students, such an approach is an oversimplified
version of the real design practice where many other factors are to be considered in
obtaining the design criterion in each and every design situation.
Although the notion of ductility is discussed in Sect. 2 and the 5% elongation cri-
terion to distinguish the “brittle–ductile” boundary is introduced, it is not that “sharp”
at the design stage. For elongation under 1%, most people would say “brittle”; over
5%, most people would say “ductile”; at 3% like brass many people would say “a bit
brittle”. The final call should be made in the consideration of the stress–strain diagram
of a material in question. If this diagram (Figs. 3b and 5b) shows the distinguishable
shear strength and if the plastic deformation after the initial yielding is of an appre-
ciable amount (elongation/strain) which can lead to undesirable change of the part
configuration, then this material is considered as ductile.
Although the yield strength is defined by standard ASTM E8/E8 M—16a as the
stress at which a material exhibits a deviation from the proportionality of stress to
strain, i.e., the occurrence permanents plastic strain is the case, it is not that certain
in the stress–strain diagram. In Sect. 2, it is discussed that segment 2–3 represents
the so-called the transient effects (or yielding instability) (see Fig. 3b). To avoid this
region, the yield strength Sy is commonly defined by the offset method. According
to this method, the yield strength is determined at a certain offset Om (Fig. 9) of the
original gage length of the specimen. Commonly, the yield strength at 0.2% offset is
obtained by drawing through the point of the horizontal axis of abscissa e = 0.2%
(or e = 0.002), a line parallel to the initial straight line portion of the stress–strain
diagram. The 0.2% of the initial gage length has been chosen by standardization
organizations (mainly ASTM) because it is small enough to ensure the accuracy of
the yield point but it is sufficiently large to be measured with conventional methods
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
18 V. P. Astakhov
in the laboratory, just with a caliper or micrometer. For brittle materials, such as
gray cast iron, the offset is 0.05% of the initial gage length, because the plastic
deformation is small. The yield strength obtained using this method is designated as
Sy0.2 and thus actually used in the design calculations.
The complex loading includes, in the most general case, a three-dimensional state
of stress. To understand the stresses involved, let us consider an infinitesimal
element in a parallel-sided form with its faces oriented parallel to the three coor-
dinate planes as shown in (a). Each plane will have normal and tangential com-
ponents of the stress resultants. The tangential or shear stress resultant on each
plane can further be represented by two components in the coordinate directions.
Although nine components of stress are shown in Fig. 10a, only six of them are
independent, namely rx, ry, rz, sxy = syx, sxz = szx, and syz = szy. To deal with these
components, the so-called equivalent tensile stress or von Mises stress, re, is used
rffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffi
re ¼ r2x þ r2y þ r2z rx ry ry rz rz rx þ s2xy þ s2yz þ s2zx ð20Þ
Fig. 9 Determination of
yield strength by the offset
method
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 19
Fig. 10 General state of stress: a stress components representation and b yield locus set by the
von Mises criterion
The von Mises yield criterion [5] (with Hencky’s interpretation [6]) states the
yielding occurs when the equivalent stress, re, reaches the yield strength of the
material in simple tension, Sy (ry). In other words, using this criterion, one can
calculate the design criterion/limiting stress for any general type of loading/state of
stress. The corresponding equivalent or von Mises strain is calculated as
pffiffiffi h i1=2
2 2 2
ee ¼ ex ey þ ey ez þ ðez ex Þ2 þ 6 e2xy þ e2yz þ e2zx : ð22Þ
3
Factor of safety (FoS), also known as safety factor (SF), is a term describing the
structural capacity of a part or system beyond the expected loads or actual loads.
Essentially, how much stronger the part or system is than it usually needs to be for
an intended load. Safety factors are often calculated using detailed analysis because
comprehensive testing is impractical on many engineering projects, such as bridges
and buildings, but the structure’s ability to carry load must be determined to a
reasonable accuracy [7].
Many systems are purposefully built much stronger than needed for normal
usage to allow for emergency situations, unexpected loads, misuse, or degradation.
Any structure or component can be made to fail if it is subjected to loadings in
excess of its strength. Structural integrity is achieved by ensuring that there is an
adequate safety margin or reserve factor between strength and loading effects. The
margin of safety, or alternatively the safety factor, which is appropriate for a
particular application must take into account the following:
– The scatter or uncertainty in the variables which form the input data for load and
resistance effects.
– Any uncertainty in the equation used to model failure.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
20 V. P. Astakhov
Sm
½sw ¼ ð23Þ
fs
where Sm is the strength of the material (the yield strength for ductile materials,
Sy0.2, and ultimate strength, Su, for brittle materials) and fs is the factor of safety.
Particular values of the factor of safety and what is actually covered by this
factor are regulated by various standards and design recommendation in various
industries. Table 2 presents some general recommendations.
The output of the design is a drawing where all materials specification, properties
(e.g., hardness), and quality requirements to be achieved in part/unit/machine
manufacturing are recorded. In other words, the drawing is the primary document
for part/unit/machine quality. In advanced industries, the drawing may have some
reference to certain manufacturing procedures and processes to be used to assure the
required part quality. For example, a surface roughness callout can have note
indicating “ground,” brazing joint can have a note to use a certain brazing proce-
dure. The properties of the part set by the drawing are the prime information used in
designing manufacturing process for this part/assembly/structure.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 21
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
22 V. P. Astakhov
Fig. 11 General
classification of
metal-forming processes
Fig. 12 Basic bulk deformation processes: a rolling, b forging, c extrusion, and d drawing.
Relative motion in the operations is indicated by v; forces are indicated by F
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 23
Sheet metal operations are always performed as cold working processes and are
usually accomplished using a set of tools called a punch and die. The punch is the
positive portion, and the die is the negative portion of the tool set. The basic sheet
metal operations are sketched in Fig. 13a, b which are defined as follows:
– Bending: In this, the sheet material is strained by punch to give a bend shape
(angle shape) usually in a straight axis.
– Drawing: In sheet metalworking, drawing refers to the forming of a flat metal
sheet into a hollow or concave shape, such as a cup, by stretching the metal.
A blank holder is used to hold down the blank, while the punch pushes into the
sheet metal. To distinguish this operation from bar and wire drawing, the terms
cup drawing or deep drawing are often used.
The miscellaneous processes within the sheet metalworking classification
include a variety of related shaping processes that do not use punch and die tooling.
Examples of these processes are stretch forming, roll bending, spinning, and
bending of tube stock. Schematic representations of shear spinning and roll bending
are shown in Fig. 13c, d.
When one designs a forming process, the following important parameters are
considered:
– Work material characterization, and thus formability.
– Process parameters: plastic deformation characterization, strain and strain rate.
– Microstructural alternations of the work material.
– Forces and energies involved.
– Friction in metal forming.
In the section to follow, only work material characterization is considered.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
24 V. P. Astakhov
In forming, the most relevant material properties are represented by the so-called
flow curve shown in Fig. 14, which is actually the stress–strain diagram in the true
stress-true strain coordinate, i.e., obtained from the standard stress–strain diagram
discussed in Sect. 2. Note that the elastic region is not accounted for as the elastic
strain is insignificant for many metals. In forming of other materials with significant
elastic region, the curve does not start from zero but rather from the point of
maximum elastic strain before material yields.
The flow curve for many metals in the region of plastic deformation can be
expressed by the simple power curve relation
r ¼ Ken ð24Þ
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 25
Fig. 15 Log–log plot of true stress-true strain curve to determine strain-hardening exponent n and
the strength coefficient K
In forming, high temperatures and potentially high strain rates occur particularly in
complicated die designs and high-productivity hot (with preheated blanks) forming
operations. It is known that the flow stress decreases with temperature while the
strain at fracture increases. The opposite is true when the strain rate increases [10].
Figure 16 shows that the influence of temperature and strain rake is highly non-
linear. Moreover, different temperature and strain rate may occur in various regions
of the blank (workpiece, billet, etc.) that complicates the forming process design in
terms of defects (cracks, wrinkles) prevention.
Another materials’ aspect of forming operations design is the accounting for the
complex state of stress. It was discussed in Sect. 3.3 that when a complex state of
stress is the case then the equivalent (von Mises) stress is calculated and the von
Mises yield criteria are used to define the beginning of material yielding, i.e., the
appearance of irreversible plastic deformation. In mechanical engineering, this
criterion is often considered as failure criteria as a part of a mechanism or machine
normally cannot function properly if its shape changes due to plastic deformation.
In deforming manufacturing process where severe plastic deformation takes
place, the von Mises stress and yield criterion are also fully applicable, thus used in
many FEM commercial software packages for designing forming operations. The
so-called rule of isotropic hardening is discussed here as it is allocable for most of
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
26 V. P. Astakhov
materials used in forming. Therefore, the equivalent stress and strain are used as
materials’ properties in the design of forming processes
Figure 17 illustrates this rule within two common plane stress states: (a) tension–
torsion and (b) principal biaxial stress. The two shown figures connect the rule to
simple shear and uniaxial hardening curves OPQ, as yield loci expand to contain
flow stresses between P and Q. The single most attractive feature of isotropic
hardening over alternative hardening rules is its mathematical simplicity, while the
use of this rule can predict plastic strain paths acceptably.
To account for process temperatures, strain rate, and complex state of stress, in
the practice of modern CAD of forming processes, a more sophisticated [compared
to the flow approximation represented by Eq. (24)] representation of the flow curve
known as the Johnson and Cook model [11] is used. Its full form is
Fig. 17 Rule of isotropic hardening under plane stress: a tension–torsion and b principal biaxial
stress
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 27
!! m
e_ eq T T0
re ¼ A þ Beneq 1 þ C ln 0 1 ð25Þ
e_ eq TF T0
where eneq is the equivalent plastic strain [see Eq. (22)], e_ eq is the equivalent plastic
strain rate, e_ 0eq is the reference equivalent plastic strain rate (normally e_ 0eq ¼ 1s1 ),
T is the temperature, T0 is the room temperature, TF is the melting temperature, and
A, B, C, n, and m are constants, which depend on the material. These constants are
determined through material tests.
In the Johnson and Cook model, the equivalent stress and strains are used to
account for any 3D state of stress. The first term of this equation accounts for work
material strain hardening, the second term accounts for the process and local strain
rates, and the third term accounts for the process and local temperatures.
Deformation in sheet forming is limited by necking, tearing, fracture, or wrin-
kling that define forming limits (i.e., allowable strains). As a result, only a part of
the flow curve 1–2 (shown as 1–4 in Fig. 14) is actually utilized in forming. The
science and art of sheet forming is to achieve the required final shape without
producing strains that approach any of these limits. Forming limit diagram
(FLD) first introduced by Keeler and Backofen [12] and Goodwin [13] has been
developed for decades and is widely used in deep-drawing industry as a useful tool
for predicting strain limits of sheet forming operations.
A schematic of FLD is illustrated in Fig. 18a. The flow limit curve (FLC) in this
diagram can be split into two branches known as the “left branch” and “right
branch.” The “right branch” of FLC is valid for positive major and minor strains,
whereas the “left branch” of FLC is applicable for positive major and negative
minor strains. FLC is solely applicable for proportional strain path. Therefore, to
construct FLC, different ratios of major and minor strains are chosen in proportional
strain paths.
Fig. 18 Forming limit diagram: a principle of construction and b schematic representation of save
the forming regions
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
28 V. P. Astakhov
While forming, strains in the workpiece should be located below FLC every-
where in order to avoid forming defects. By offsetting FLC (generally 10%), a
safety margin is normally introduced. The risk of necking/failure is determined by
how close is the maximum strain in the process to that set by the boundary set by
FLC. Rejection of the formed part is based not only on occurrence of necking but
also involves other defects such as excessive thinning, wrinkling, or insufficient
stretch. Therefore, apart from necking, all other failure conditions are normally also
evaluated by studying the strain levels involved in the process. Such considerations
result in further modifications of FLD as shown in Fig. 18b.
As mentioned above, forming operations are successfully modeled using FEM in
manufacturing practice. It is to say that such a modeling is widely used in the
designing forming operations and forming tools. Standard ASTM E2218—14
“Standard Test Method for Determining Forming Limit Curves” are used to con-
struct FLDs, which now are included in modeling FEM packages. In the process of
design of forming operations and forming tools, strains at various regions of the part
being formed are calculated and plotted on the corresponding FLD. The design/
optimization of a given forming operations is carried out until all the strains are
found below FLC accounting for the above-mentioned safety margins.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 29
few years appears realistic. The simulation of forming tool has already reached the
stage where its result can be fed directly into the press tool digital planning and
validation process. Thus today, starting from the design model and through prac-
tically all process steps as far as the actual design of the press tool, the production of
component can be fully simulated before a first prototype is built [14].
The notion “cutting” is not defined by any standard that creates a lot of confusion.
To clarify the issue, the author would like to state the following. First, cutting is
physical separation of a material into two or more parts (a subtractive process).
Second, by definition, fracture is physical separation of a body into two or more
parts. Therefore, cutting is fracture. Third, cutting in the manufacturing sense is
physical separation of a material into two or more parts carried out by a cutting tool
(blade) in a controllable manner. Therefore, in terms of materials properties, those
related to fracture should be considered/analyzed in the design of cutting operations
including process parameters, tools.
Figure 19 shows a generalized classification of cutting processes/operations.
Besides some special cases (e.g., cutting by a knife or splitting by a hatchet), all
manufacturing cutting operations are divided into two principal groups, namely
shearing operations/processes and metal cutting operations/processes. Both pro-
cesses aim to physically separate a blank/workpiece into two or more parts so
materials should be brought to fracture in both processes. The only difference is
how this fracture is achieved; i.e., how much energy (per unit volume of the work
material) is spent and how good are the fractured surfaces.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
30 V. P. Astakhov
Fig. 19 General
classification of cutting
processes/operations
between them when the handles are brought together. Shearing machines (sheet
metal shears) are yet another example.
A shearing or scissor-like action is used to cut metal into sheets or strips.
Shearing machines and shearing machinery are multipurpose devices used in the
cutting of alloys and other sheet metals. Shearing machines are used in steel fur-
niture industries, refrigeration, doorframe manufacturers, automobile industries, and
control panel manufacturers. There are many types of shearing machines. Examples
include hydraulic, conventional, mechanical, cut-to-length line, and plastic devices.
In these operations, the sheet is cut by subjecting it to shear stress typically
between a punch and a die as shown in Fig. 22. Shearing usually starts with the
formation of the shear planes and then cracks on both the top and bottom edges of
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 31
Fig. 21 Principle of shearing operations: a force and deformation model and b typical example
the workpiece (A and B, and C and D in Fig. 22). These cracks eventually meet
each other and separation occurs. The rough fracture surfaces are due to these
cracks.
In students’ textbooks (e.g., [15]), the punching force is calculated as the product
of the shear strength, su, of the work material (see Fig. 5) obtained in the direct
shear test (see Fig. 1) and the shearing area, Ash, that is,
where Lpn is the length or perimeter of cut. If the punch is round, then Lpn = pdpn
where dpn is the punch diameter and Tw is the thickness of sheet being sheared.
Although the same formula for calculating the punching force appears in engi-
neering reference books (e.g., [8]), it is pointed out that this force needs to be
increased by 20–40%. No valid reasons for such an increase are provided. The
problem is that being seemingly simple and straightforward, Eq. (26) is incorrect as
it stems from misunderstanding of the essence of the shear stress–strain diagram
shown in Fig. 5b. The area under the shear stress–strain curve defines the energy
needed for shearing of a unit volume of the work material. Knowing this energy,
one can easily calculate the power needed in punching, and then dividing this
power over the punching speed (v in Fig. 22), one can obtain the punching force.
As the product LpnTw is significant, a great force in punching is needed. Even for
punching relatively small holes (10 mm), a 50 ton punching press is used whereas
200 ton presses are common for many applications.
Machining is one of the oldest yet still most common manufacturing operations
with a wide range of techniques such as turning, milling, drilling, grinding.
Regardless of this great variety, the essence of metal cutting can be explained using
a simple model shown in Fig. 23. The cutting tool is actually a cutting wedge
having the rake (the rake angle c) and the flank (the clearance angle a) faces that
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
32 V. P. Astakhov
meet to form the cutting edge. As pointed out by Taylor [16], while a metal cutting
tool looks like a wedge, its function is far different from that of the wedge. The
flank face is never (at least theoretically) allowed to touch the workpiece. Therefore,
the presence of the clearance angle a distinguishes a metal cutting tool from other
cutting tools with cutting edges. As such, it does not matter what work material is
actually cut—metal wood, plastic—the process is still referred to as metal cutting.
When the tool is in contact with the workpiece, the application of the force
N leads to the formation of a deformation zone ahead of the cutting edge (point A).
The tool moves forward with a cutting speed v. The workpiece first deforms
elastically and then plastically. As a result of the plastic deformation, a “bump”
forms in close contact with the rake face. Thus, the plastic deformation of the layer
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 33
to be removed and formation of the bump in front of the cutting tool is actually
beginning of the metal cutting process as the state of stress ahead of the tool
becomes complex including a combination of bending (as the bumps act as a lever
due to which the bending stress in the deformation zone is formed), compressive
(compression of the layer being removed by the rake face), and shear (due to the
friction over the tool–chip interface) stresses. When the combined stress just in
front of the cutting edge (point A) reaches a limit (for a given work material), a
small crack AB forms ahead of the cutting edge so that a chip fragment of the layer
being removed disengages from the rest of the workpiece and starts to slide over a
sliding surface formed in the direction of the maximum combined stress with
velocity vch1 and simultaneously over the tool rake face with velocity vch2. The chip
fragment continues to slide until the force acting on this fragment from the tool is
reduced, when a new portion of the work material enters into the contact with the
tool rake face. This new portion attracts part of the cutting force, and thus the stress
along the sliding surface diminishes, becoming less than the limiting stress and
arresting the sliding. A new fragment of the chip starts to form.
The uniqueness of the metal cutting process (among other cutting operations,
e.g., shearing operations and methods, e.g., cutting by a knife, scissors, splitting by
a hatchet [17]) in terms of materials properties involved is in the following:
– The cutting process is a cyclic process. Each cycle includes elastic, then plastic
deformation and finishes with fracture; i.e., the whole stress–stress diagram (as
shown in Figs. 3b and 14) up to fracture is followed.
– In machining of brittle materials, a well visible crack forms in each cycle,
whereas in machining of ductile materials, a series of micro-cracks hampered
and then healed by a great hydrostatic pressure [18] within each chip element
occurs in each cycle. As plastic deformation and fracture take place only within
a small chip fragment, the power per unit volume of the cut material is much low
in metal cutting compared to other cutting operations and methods.
– The plastic deformation imposed by the tool is concentrated in the chip and
measured by the ratio of the chip thickness, hC, to the uncut chip thickness, hD
[19]. In contrary to other cutting operations, the machine surface is not subjected
to significant plastic deformation. Only a few percent the total plastic defor-
mation that is imposed into the machined surface (coldworked layer on this
surface) by the tool–workpiece interface AC (Fig. 23) due to the spring back d
of this surface. The essence of this spring back is not unfortunately clear to
many. In the author’s opinion, it is rather simple as it follows from the stress–
strain diagram shown in Fig. 3b. The amount of spring back is actually repre-
sented by segment 6–7 so it appears to be the elastic recovery of the work
material. Reading this diagram intelligently, one can calculate the value of
spring back. Moreover, he or she can conclude that two major materials prop-
erties, namely its ultimate strength and elastic module, fully define this spring
back as it follows from Fig. 3b.
– This allows achieving the closest tolerance and low surface roughness of the
machined surface (approximately two orders high compared to other cutting
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
34 V. P. Astakhov
operations). That is why metal cutting operations are most widely used in
industry to manufacture finished parts made of variety of different work
materials.
The energy needed for fracture of the unit volume of the work material is the area
under the true stress–strain curve considered up to fracture known as the damage
curve [20] shown in Fig. 24. This curve is obtained from the flow curve shown in
Fig. 14 by gining attention to, and thus adding the work material degradation and
fracture regions. As can be seen, the real damage curve which describes behavior of
the work material in fracture has well-defined, and thus measurable, area.
The elastic–plastic undamaged path abc is the same as in the flow curve
(Fig. 14) followed by the departure of the experimental yield surface from the
virtual undamaged yield surface at point c. Point c can be considered as the
hypothetic damage initiation site where the material hardening modulus becomes
progressively sensitive to the amount of damage leading to the declination of the
material loading capacity. Due to increased damage, the material reaches its ulti-
mate stress capacity at d where the hardening modulus becomes zero. This usually
occurs in ductile metals when the material loading capacity decreases by 30–70% of
its full capacity due to the accumulated damage [21]. The observed fracture initi-
ation site is denoted by point e, and finally, the fracture is indicated by point f.
The damage curve is approximated as follows: Its segment ac is described by
Eq. (25), whereas the scalar damage parameter (D) [20] is used to describe the
material flow past damage initiation (segment cf)
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 35
where Pc is the cutting power, i.e., the power required by the cutting system for its
existence. It is calculated using the total energy supplied to this system, Ecs; Ppd is
the power spent on the plastic deformation of the layer being removed, calculated
through the energy of plastic deformation of the work material to fracture, Ef; PfR is
the power spent at the tool–chip interface; PfR is the power spent at the tool–
workpiece interface.
The analysis of the energy/power partition in metal cutting represented by
Eq. (28) revealed that the power spent on plastic deformation of the work material
in its transformation into the chip during machining Ppd constitutes up to 75% of the
total energy supplied to the cutting system [22]. The greater the ductility of the
work material, the higher is Ppd. As plastic deformation of the chip serves no useful
purpose after machining, up to 75% of the energy supplied to the cutting system is
simply wasted. Moreover, only less than 2% of this energy is actually stored in the
chip whereas remaning 98% converts into the thermal energy flowing as heat in the
chip, tool and workpiece. This causes high temperatures in the machining zone,
that, in turn, reduces tool life and restricts the allowable cutting speed, and thus
productivity of machining.
For many years of machining history, the cycle time due to actual machining
was “a drop in the bucket” compared to the total time part spent in the machine as
part loading–unloading, part proper positioning in the chuck (e.g., with an indi-
cator), tool change, part measuring, inspection within the machine, etc. Even a
100% reduction of the actual machining time or increasing tool life by 50% did not
contribute noticeably to machining productivity and efficiency.
This “gloomy picture” has been rapidly changing since the beginning of the
twenty-first century as global competition forced many manufacturing companies,
first of all car manufacturers, to increase efficiency and quality of machining
operations. To address these issues, leading tool and machine manufacturers have
developed a number of new products as new tool materials and coatings, new
cutting inserts and tool designs, new tool holders, powerful precision machines, part
fixtures, advanced controllers that provide a wide spectrum of information on
cutting processes, and so on. These increase the efficiency of machining operations
in industry by increasing working speeds, feed rates, tool life, and reliability. These
changes can be called the “silent” machining revolution as they happened in rather
short period of time. Implementation of the listed developments led to a stunning
result: For the first time in the manufacturing history, the machining operating time
became a bottleneck in the part machining cycle time.
To address this challenge of a new era, a closer look at the materials properties
involved in cutting should be taken. As the energy of plastic deformation of the
material to fracture is greatest by far and thus affects the productivity and efficiency
of machining operations, this energy should be analyzed so that some means to
reduce this energy can be developed.
The energy of plastic deformation of the material to fracture is calculated as the
area under the damage curve [18] as
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
36 V. P. Astakhov
Zef
Ef ¼ re de ð29Þ
0
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 37
decreased from 0.81 to 0.17. In other words, the area under the damage curve for a
given work material (Fig. 24), which represents the work of plastic deformation in
cutting, can be altered to a wide extent by varying stress triaxiality.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
38 V. P. Astakhov
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 39
8. What is the most relevant property of the work material in shearing processes?
The area under the shear stress–strain curve defines the energy needed for
shearing of a unit volume of the work material. Knowing this energy, one can
easily calculate the power needed in punching, and then dividing this power
over the punching speed one can obtain the punching force.
9. What is the prime work material property in metal cutting?
The energy of plastic deformation of the material to fracture is calculated as the
area under the damage curve. This energy defines all other process outcomes as
the cutting force, cutting temperature, tool life, quality of the machined surface,
etc.
10. What is the technical objective of the cutting process optimization?
The objective of any cutting process, and thus its criterion of optimization, is
achieving fracture with minimum possible energy defined by the area under the
damage curve. This energy can be varied in wide range and thus successfully
minimized by altering the state of stress in the deformation zone.
Glossary
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
40 V. P. Astakhov
References
1. Davis, J. R. (2004). Tensile testing (2nd ed.). Materials Park, OH: ASTM.
2. Dieter, G. (1976). Mechanical metallurgy (2nd ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.
3. Zhu, X.-K., & Joyce, J. A. (2012). Review of fracture toughness (G, K, J, CTOD, CTOA)
testing and standardization. Engineering Fracture Mechanics, 85, 1–46.
4. Isakov, E. (2000). Mechanical properties of work materials. Cincinnati, OH: Hanser Gardener
Publications.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
1 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials: Relevance … 41
5. von Mises, R. (1913). Mechanik der festen Körper im plastisch deformablen Zustand. Göttin
Nachr Math Phys, 1, 582–592.
6. Hencky, H. Z. (1924). Zur theorie plastischer deformationen und hierduch im material
hervorgerufenen nebenspannunger. Z Angerw Math Mech, 4, 323–334.
7. Burdekin, F. M. (2007). General principles of the use of safety factors in design and
assessment. Engineering Failure Analysis, 14, 420–433.
8. Oberg, E. (Ed.) (2016). Machinery’s handbook. Technology & Engineering. Industrial Press:
New York.
9. Groover, M. P. (2010). Fundamentals of modern manufacturing: materials, processes and
systems (4th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
10. Atkins, A. G., & Mai, Y. W. (1985). Elastic and plastic fracture: metals, polymers. Ceramics,
composites, biological materials. New York: Wiley.
11. Johnson, G. R., & Cook, W. H. (1983). A constructive model and data for metals subjected to
large strains, high strain rates and high temperatures. In Proceedings of the 7th International
Symposium on Ballistics, The Hague.
12. Keeler, S., & Backofen, W. (1963). Plastic instability and fracture in sheets stretched over
rigid punches. ASM Trans Quart, 56(1), 25–48.
13. Goodwin, G. M. (1968). Application of strain analysis to sheet metal problems in press
shop. Metallurgica Italiana, 60, 767–774.
14. Roll, K. (2008). Simulation of sheet metal forming—necessary developments in the future. In:
LS-DYNA Anwenderforum (pp. A-1-59–A-1-68), Baberg.
15. Kalpakjian, S., & Schmid, S. R. (2001). Manufacturing engineering and technology (4th ed.).
New Jersey: Prentice-Hall.
16. Taylor, F. W. (1907). On the art of cutting metals. Transactions of ASME, 28, 70–350.
17. Astakhov, V. P. (2010). Geometry of single-point turning tools and drills: Fundamentals and
practical applications. London: Springer.
18. Astakhov, V. P. (1998/1999). Metal cutting mechanics. Boca Raton, USA: CRC Press.
19. Astakhov, V. P. (2006). Tribology of metal cutting. London: Elsevier.
20. Abushawashi, Y., Xiao, X., & Astakhov, V. P. (2013). A novel approach for determining
material constitutive parameters for a wide range of triaxiality under plane strain loading
conditions. International Journal of Mechanical Sciences, 74, 133–142.
21. Zhang, Y. C., Mabrouki, T., Nelias, D., & Gong, Y. D. (2011). Chip formation in orthogonal
cutting considering interface limiting shear stress and damage evolution based on fracture
energy approach. Finite Elements in Analysis and Design, 47, 860–863.
22. Astakhov, V. P., & Xiao, X. (2008). A methodology for practical cutting force evaluation
based on the energy spent in the cutting system. Machining Science and Technology, 12,
325–347.
23. Astakhov, V.P., & Xiao, X. (2016). The principle of minimum strain energy to fracture of the
work material and its application in modern cutting technologies. In J. P. Davim (Ed.), Metal
cutting technology (pp. 1–35). Berlin: De Gruyter.
24. Bai, Y., & Wierzbicki, T. (2008). A new model of metal plasticity and fracture with pressure
and Lode dependence. International Journal of Plasticity, 24(6), 1071–1096.
25. Wierzbicki, T. B., Lee, Y. W., Bao, Y., & Bai, Y. (2005). Calibration and evaluation of seven
fracture models. International Journal of Mechanical Science, 47, 719–743.
26. Bai, Y., Teng, X., & Wierzbicki, T. (2009). On the application of stress triaxiality formula for
plane strain fracture testing. Journal of Engineering Materials and Technology, 131, 021002.
27. Teng, X., & Wierzbicki, T. (2006). Evaluation of six fracture models in high velocity
perforation. Engineering Fracture Mechanics, 73(12), 1653–1678.
28. Shaw, M. C. (2004). Metal cutting principles (2nd ed.). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
Chapter 2
Analysis and Material Selection
of a Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) for a Bicycle
Drivetrain
Abstract There has been much research and deliberation on what the optimum
cadence for a cyclist is to achieve maximum efficiency and hence maximum per-
formance. Research to date has shown that the ideal pedal rate varies based on the
particular cycling task, such as course geography and duration. Several components
of a CVT bicycle were analysed using SolidWorks finite element analysis to
determine the von Mises stress. These results were used to determine and examine
candidate materials for the components of the drivetrain by using Granta Design
software. Technical feasibility study was carried out on the drivetrain where a v-belt
was subjected to a pretension load which is uniform around the belt before ped-
alling. As the cyclist pedals, one side of the belt tightens whilst the other side of the
belt slackens. However, the sum of the tension in the belt never changes and hence
the load on the pulley. For a professional cyclist starting their sprint, 300 Nm
applied torque at the highest gear ratio, the required pretension to prevent slippage
is roughly 1500 N. The simulation yielded an initial maximum von Mises stress of
1250 MPa in the corner of the spindle. This stress was reduced to 1059 MPa by
adding 0.7 mm radius to the corners of the cut-outs. Cadence is the rate at which a
cyclist is pedalling/turning the pedals. Higher cadence in the order of (100–
120) rpm would improve sprint cycling over shorter distances where the muscle
fatigue is reduced and the cycling power output is increased. A well-maintained
chain drive system with a derailleur setup can achieve an efficiency of 98.6%,
whereas a well-maintained v-belt drive 97%. The reduced efficiency of a v-belt
CVT drivetrain plus design constraints will be a hindrance to its adoption into
professional cycling racing; however, a market for the recreation cyclist exists. The
design will require further iterations to reduce the number of parts, improve inte-
gration with a standard bicycle, increase efficiency and will also require an
extensive testing/commissioning phase. Results from the FEA indicated that
materials with yield strengths exceeding 500 MPa would be required. Due to the
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
44 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
nature of loading, materials with properties such as high specific stiffness and
strength would be necessary.
1 Introduction
Bicycles are enjoyed by people from all backgrounds and ages throughout the
world. The common chain and sprocket drivetrain developed in the late nineteenth
century for bicycles in principle have remained largely unchanged. In contrast, a
car’s transmission has seen many advances, from manual, automatic and most
recently a continuously variable transmission (CVT). Unlike a multiple gear chain
drive, a CVT offers a smooth transition through a defined gear range by providing
an infinite number of gears. The first commercially successful, true CVT for a
bicycle was manufactured by Fallbrook Technologies Inc., which became publicly
available in 2006. The NuVinci CVT comprises a set of balls positioned between an
input disc and an output disc. The balls are free to rotate and tilt on their own axis
around a central hub. Torque is transmitted from the input disc to the output disc
through the balls via a layer a viscous fluid. The balls are held in place by the
clamping force of the discs onto the balls [1].
The speed ratio of the system is determined by the angle of the ball axis com-
pared to that of the central transmission axis. When the balls are tilted so that the
perpendicular distance between the input disc edge and the ball axis is greater than
the perpendicular distance between the output disc edge and the ball axis, i.e.
ri [ ro , the output disc will rotate slower than the input disc. When ri \ro , the
output disc will rotate slower than the input thus creating an overdrive speed ratio.
When the ball and transmission axis are collinear, then the input speed and output
speed are the same. The system comprises of two units, a front pulley and a rear
pulley which work in tension to maintain the same belt length and thus correct
pretension in the system. As the name suggests, the drivetrain is able to deliver an
unlimited number of gear ratios between the upper and lower limits.
This study looks at the material selection and analysis of a 3D prototype CVT
drivetrain on a bicycle. The main objective was to refine the current design and further
develop it mechanically so a physical prototype could be manufactured to aid in
further research and development. The CVT drivetrain consists of two variable
diameter pulleys connected via a v-belt. The principle operation is similar to that of a
convention pulley-style CVT allowing infinite gear ratios over a predefined range at a
constant input speed. The study also looks at the feasibility of applying CVT tech-
nology to a bicycle. The use of a CVT on a bicycle is not new, with the NuVinci CVT
having seen success in this area. This success has been limited to
non-performance-orientated cyclists, who are after simplicity and ease of mainte-
nance. The major factor that has prevented CVT adoption in professional cycling
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 45
racing is due to weight, size and inefficiency. A typical chain and derailleur system can
have a drivetrain efficiency above 98%. A typical v-belt design that uses friction to
transmit power is around 95%. Third party analysis conducted on the NuVinci CVT
indicated efficiencies below 90%. These less-efficient drivetrains do not appeal to the
performance-oriented cyclists who are looking at converting the most power to the
rear wheel with the least amount of energy. In addition to the study of efficiency,
physical factors and limitations to the design are addressed. These design constraints
including pedal width, aerodynamics, weight, maintenance, crank length, aesthetics
and durability are discussed. It is important that these design constraints are met in
order to maintain the cyclist’s comfort and ease of use. The study indicated that the
current design would not meet the requirements of a performance-oriented cyclist;
however, the use of the transmission on e-bike could have merit.
2 Background
Fig. 1 Treadle (left) and Ariel High-Wheeler Bicycle (right), Woodforde [2: 18 and 42]
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
46 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
Fig. 2 Xtraordinary 1878 (left) and Geared Facile 1879 (right) bicycles, Woodforde [2: 59],
Streeter [31]
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 47
were connected by a sprocket which transferred power to the centre of the hub by
chains either side of the wheel as shown in Fig. 3 [2].
By 1885, today’s common bicycle had taken shape. These bicycles were referred
to as the “safety bike”, due to the lowered seat height in conjunction to that of its
predecessors. The Rover bicycle combined many of the idiosyncrasies we associate
with modern bicycles. These included direct steering, equal diameter wheels, chain
and sprocket drive to the rear wheel and the familiar diamond-shaped frame for
stiffness. It contained all the basic components that form the style of the present-day
bicycle.
During the early twentieth century, bicycle manufacturers looked at ways to
produce bicycles with multiple gears. The concept was to equip the rear wheel with
different sized sprockets either side of the hub. To achieve the other gear ratio, a
cyclist would have to dismount the bicycle, flip the wheel and reconnect the chain.
In the 1930s, a mechanical system for changing gears was developed in France and
introduced to professional cycling racing in 1937 [4].
The derailleur allowed the shifting of the chain onto different sized rear
sprockets, known as a “cassette” by a mechanical cable. Figure 4 is a pictorial
representation of a current derailleur setup. It incorporates a front shifter that is
typically used to change between two or three front sprockets known as a chainring
and a cassette with ten sprockets. Advancements of the derailleur have focused on
improvements in shifting precision, changing under load, ease of shifting and a
move towards electronic control as opposed to mechanical control.
A modern professional road bike with two chainrings and a ten-speed cassette
theoretically has twenty gear ratios. In reality, many of these ratios are overlapping
so the number of usable gears would be much less. For this setup, the range
between the lowest and highest gears is 428% meaning a cyclist would be able to
travel 4.28 times faster assuming that the pedalling rate known as cadence remains
the same. This equates to a mean step between each of the gears being 12.9% as
shown in Table 1 along with other bicycle drivetrains.
In the professional world of competitive cycling, a cyclist aspires to maximise
their efficiency. The maximum efficiency is determined in part by the combination
Fig. 3 Kangaroo drivetrain 1884 (left) and Premier Safety 1885 bicycle (right), Vintage Bicycle
[32], Woodforde [2]
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
48 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
of cadence and resistance that will produce the most power with the least amount of
stress on the body. Factors that contribute to this stress include oxygen consump-
tion, heart rate level and muscle fatigue. Studies suggest that the optimum efficiency
was around 90 rpm [5]. Since the mean steps in gear ratios for derailleur drivetrains
are limited to 12% as shown in Table 1 there will be situations where the optimal
cadence will not be possible. A continuously variable transmission (CVT) will
allow for a continuous gear range between the lowest and highest gears. This will
allow a professional cyclist to ride at the most efficient cadence and a recreational
cyclist to ride at the most comfortable cadence.
A typical cone CVT system includes a driven and drive pulley, with cones at
each pulley that are connected by a steel belt that is in the shape of a wedge. The
cones move closer together or further apart which in turn increases or decreases the
effective diameter at the point the belt rotates [6]. Since the belt length must remain
constant, when one of the pulley diameters changes, the other pulley changes its
diameter accordingly. A method used to move the cones is by a centrifugal force
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 49
generated from weights inside the cone. Torque is transmitted via friction from the
belt to the cone as shown in Fig. 5. CVT’s are commonplace on scooters, small
tractors, snowmobiles and are increasing in popularity amongst cars. CVT use as a
bicycle transmission is limited. One particular CVT system named the
NuVinci CVT has been adopted by some bicycle manufacturers.
The first commercially successful, true CVT for a bicycle was manufactured by
Fallbrook Technologies Inc., which became publicly available in 2006. The
NuVinci CVT comprises a set of balls positioned between an input disc and an output
disc as evident in Fig. 6. The balls are free to rotate and tilt on their own axis around a
central hub. Torque is transmitted from the input disc to the output disc through the
balls via a layer a viscous fluid. The balls are held in place by the clamping force of the
discs onto the balls [1]. The speed ratio of the system is determined by the angle of the
ball axis compared to that of the central transmission axis. As shown in Fig. 6, when
the balls are tilted so that the perpendicular distance between the input disc edge and
the ball axis is greater than the perpendicular distance between the output disc edge
and the ball axis, i.e. ri [ ro , the output disc will rotate slower than the input disc.
When ri \ro , the output disc will rotate slower than the input thus creating an
overdrive speed ratio. When the ball and transmission axis are collinear, then the
input speed and output speed are the same [1]. The NuVinci CVT is incorporated into
the rear hub of a bicycle. A rear sprocket is connected to the input disc which in turn is
driven by a chain connected to a front sprocket. The setup has the appearance of a
typical, single-speed bicycle. The NuVinci N380 CVT released in 2015 is capable of
providing a continuous gear width of 380%, 0.5 underdrive to 1.9 overdrive [7]. This
is less in comparison with that of a typical road racing setup which has a gearing ratio
of between 420 and 450%.
The main hurdle for not just the NuVinci CVT but all CVT systems is the
efficiency of the overall transmission. Efficiency details have not been released by
the manufacturer, however; independent efficiency tests resulted in measurements
of 78–86% [8]. A well-maintained chain drive system with a derailleur setup can
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
50 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
achieve an efficiency of 98.6% [9]. Other factors such as scalability and weight
have kept CVTs from widespread adoption.
The major benefit with a CVT is that it allows the engine to constantly run at the
most efficient power band, which in turn reduces fuel consumption. Additionally, a
CVT can often be manufactured lighter than a manual or automatic transmission.
A major drawback to CVTs is the amount of torque that can be applied to the
transmission. This is restricted by the belt which requires friction to transfer the
torque and is susceptible to slippage under high torques. As such, no automobile
with an eight-cylinder engine has been manufactured with a CVT. A belt-driven
CVT offers an overall drivetrain efficiency of 88% [10]. This is a lot lower than that
of a manual or automatic transmission and, however, is offset by the fact the engine
can run at the most optimal speed thus reducing fuel consumption (Table 2).
V-belt drive efficiency loss is caused by many factors. Notched style v-belts have
shown to be run cooler and last longer than standard unnotched belts. They are
generally about 2% more efficient. The reason behind this is due to the reduction in
compressive stresses during belt bending and flexing. The notches allow the belt to
bend without clogging and provide better engagement against the pulley sheaves.
This helps to discourage any energy-consuming slippage. This is clearly evident in
Fig. 7 that the energy lost through heat from an unnotched v-belt compared to a
notched v-belt.
The sheave diameter of the driven and non-driven pulley has a direct effect on the
drive efficiency. Studies show that v-belt drive efficiency improves steadily as the
diameters of the sheaves increase. Under certain conditions, the drive efficiency
could be increased by as much as 10% when larger diameter sheaves are utilised.
Factors such as torque and tension play a major role. The largest pulleys possible
should be used considering space limitations in order to achieve the most efficient
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 51
Fig. 7 Comparison between heat dissipation from a notched (right) and unnotched (left) v-belts
[11]
transmission. The benefits of using larger diameter pulleys include less tension due
to more surface contact with the pulley. This translates to reducing loading on the
bearings. Further, the v-belt bends less, therefore generating less heat resulting in
improved efficiency. The wedging action of the v-belt into the pulley groove is
improved allowing for increased tension. Less bending stresses in the belt prolong
the longevity with regard to failure [11]. Alignment of v-belts refers to the posi-
tioning of the pulleys in relation to one another. Losses of up to 2% can result in
parallel or offset misalignment. In the case, the v-belt favours one side of the pulley
resulting in uneven loading causing heat build-up and loss of efficiency. Another
consequence of this misalignment is the unnecessary and additional wear on the
pulleys. Improper tensioning of the v-belts is the most energy-consuming mistake.
Energy losses of up to 20% may be experienced due to over-tensioned or
under-tensioned belt. Under-tensioning accelerates the wear of the belt and the
pulley due to slippage. This causes the belt to harden or “heat age” which resists
bending and flexing this reducing efficiency. It is important the regular maintenance
is carried out on the transmission. The tension is the system can reduce significantly
over an hour of operation. This is not so much due to elongation in the belt but more
to do with the belt heating up, which causes the belt to fit better into the pulley.
Cadence is the rate at which a cyclist is pedalling/turning the pedals. It is the
number of revolutions of the crank per minute (rpm). The wheels in turn spin
proportional to the cadence and, however, change depending on the gearing
setup. It is an important factor, which influences the power output, energy burnt and
development of fatigue during cycling [12]. Research has also suggested that the
best cadence is associated with neuromuscular fatigue, blood flow, comfort and
oxygen consumption. It has also been suggested that the efficiency of a cyclist is
dictated by the individual’s muscle composition.
There has been much research and deliberation on what the optimum cadence for
a cyclist is to achieve maximum efficiency and hence maximum performance.
Research to date has shown that the ideal pedal rate varies based on the particular
cycling task, such as course geography and duration. Higher cadence in the order of
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
52 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
100–120 rpm would improve sprint cycling over shorter distances. In these situa-
tions, muscle fatigue is reduced and the cycling power output is increased [12]. For
cycling events, up to four hours in length, a reduced cadence of 90–100 rpm would
be more beneficial. For an increased length in cycling time, the optimal cadence
falls. For endurance racing staged over multiple days, relativity low cadences of
70–90 rpm improve cycling economy and lower metabolic consumption [12]. This
is also true for high climbs where relativity lower cadences are better suited at
70 rpm. Lucia et al. [12] stated that lower cadences are known to increase the pedal
forces necessary to maintain a given power output. The ideal cadence is also related
to the workload of the cyclist. Extremely low cadences of 50–60 rpm appear to be
most efficient at low power outputs of less than 200 W. However, at lower
cadences, more force is required per pedal stroke to maintain the power output
which results in additional muscle fibre recruitment at a higher metabolic expen-
diture. The optimal cadence also increases linearly with increased output. With
increased workloads of approximately 350 W, higher cadences of 80–100 rpm are
more suitable.
With advancements in technology and design, bicycles are being manufactured
with an ever-increasing number of gears. This advancement is mainly due to the
invention of the derailleur, which allowed for multiple sprockets on the rear hub
and front crank arm assembly letting for a wide selection of gears. A typical road
bicycle setup has an 11-speed cassette with two chainrings resulting in a possible
twenty-two gears; however, not all are a distinct ratio. The gearing arrangement
shown in Fig. 8 is for a typical road bicycle as described above. The two chainrings
are 52 and 36 teeth represented by the horizontal lines. The eleven-speed cassette
ranges from 11 to 28 teeth as shown by the inverted triangles. The number above
the triangle represents the speed in km/h based on a tyre size of 27.5″ and a cadence
of 90 rpm for the top chart and 96 rpm for the bottom chart as shown in Fig. 8.
Additionally, the top bar represents the metres travelled for one complete revolution
of the cranks. Also included is the mean step displayed as a percentage between two
adjacent gears. The range of gears between the low and high is 368% as shown in
the bottom corner. Not only is the range of gears is important, the mean step
between gears is vital to ensure no awkward or uncomfortable gear changes.
A moderate change in gears is considered as being less than 15%. A professional
cyclist would aim to have step in gears less than 10% to ensure relative constant leg
speed [13]. The largest mean step throughout the gear range is 13% as in Fig. 8.
This is between the 52:17 and the 52:15 ratios. At 90 rpm, this results in a jump in
road speed of 4.9 km/h from 37 to 41.9 km/h. In order for a cyclist to ride at a
speed directly between these gears say at 39.5 km/h, an increase in cadence from 90
to 96 rpm will be required as shown in Fig. 8. Therefore, the cyclist can effectively
travel at any given speed between the upper and lower gear ratios if the cadence is
varied by only ±6 rpm.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 53
Fig. 8 Typical gearing of a two chainring setup on a road bike. Top figure at 90 rpm, bottom
figure at 96 rpm, Feeken [35]
3 Analysis
The design of the CVT drivetrain was analysed using SolidWorks, which is a 3D
modelling software package. The main focus was to determine the external forces
and torques acting on the system so an FEA simulation could be conducted. These
external loads were to be justified by acquiring cycling data and performing
engineering calculations from first principles. The forces present in the system
included the pretension from the v-belt and torque applied at the pedals from a
cyclist. The model was firstly separated into individual components to simplify the
analysis, and then the applicable forces/torques were applied and analysed using
SolidWorks inbuilt FEA simulation package. The analysis was to be initially lim-
ited to a static FEA. The key information recorded from this analysis included
deflection/elongation and von Mises stress values. Additionally, results from this
analysis were verified using different solving methods such as solid bodies and shell
elements. The FEA study suggested that materials with elastic modulus greater than
that of steel will be required to achieve an adequate safety factor for the spindle.
The crank arm FEA study was achieved by using shell elements. This allowed the
shell thickness to be optimised in order to reduce stress whilst limiting its weight.
Following this analysis, an appropriate selection criterion was established based
on the dependent variables and a suitable factor of safety was applied. The com-
ponents were prepared for FEA by simplifying and cleaning the geometry and by
suppressing non-structural features and components. Boundary conditions were
defined to the model such as loads, fixtures and contact sets. Succeeding this, an
appropriate mesh was applied to the components and iterations were made to ensure
correct aspect ratios. A simulation was run prioritising in resolving problems,
meshing issues, identifying singularities, checking general behaviour, adjustment of
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
54 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
V-belt drives transfer torque entirely through friction where maximum belt tension
ratio can be derived. Assume that a section of the belt has an angle of d/ at the
centre. The length of the segment of belt is then
dl ¼ rd/ ð1Þ
The forces acting on the belt segment are shown in Fig. 9. There is a normal
force acting on the belt segment due to the rotation and a friction force which is
given by
f ¼ ldl ð2Þ
where l is the coefficient of friction between the belt and the pulley. The centrifugal
force (CF) due to the motion of the belt acting on the belt segment is
1
CF ¼ mðrd/Þv2 ð3Þ
r
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 55
CF ¼ mv2 d/ ð4Þ
where v is the peripheral velocity and m is the mass of the belt per unit length.
m ¼ btq ð5Þ
where b is the width, t is the belt thickness and q is the belt density. For the system
to be in equilibrium, the sum of all forces must equal zero.
X d/ d/
Ft ¼ 0 T cos ðT þ dT Þ cos þ ldN ¼ 0 ð6Þ
2 2
X
d/ d/
Fn ¼ 0 mv d/ þ dN þ T sin
2
ðT þ dT Þ sin ¼ 0: ð7Þ
2 2
d/ d/ d/
cos ffi 1; sin ffi : ð8Þ
2 2 2
dT
dN ¼ : ð9Þ
l
dT
mv2 d/ þ Td/ ¼ 0 ð10Þ
l
dT
¼ ld/: ð11Þ
T mv2
ZT2 Za
dT
¼ ld/: ð12Þ
T mv2
T1 0
Thus, the equation for determining the relationship between the belt tensions is
T1 mv2
¼ ela : ð13Þ
T2 mv2
Assuming negligible belt mass and velocity and taking into account the V-belt
angle Eq. 13 reduces to,
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
56 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
T1 h
¼ ela= sin2 : ð14Þ
T2
By solving Eq. 15 for the two extreme gear ratios with a variety of coefficients of
friction, the pretension required to transmit the given torques can be investigated.
As indicated in Eq. 16, the ratio of tension is an exponential function of the
coefficient of friction. Figures 10 and 11 show that as the coefficient of friction is
increased, the corresponding decrease in the required pretension diminishes.
A coefficient of friction of 0.6 is a reasonable starting point as higher coefficients of
friction may become more difficult to achieve, and it would result in only a slight
decrease in required pretension. Figure 8 shows that for a professional cyclist
starting their sprint (300 Nm applied torque) at the highest gear ratio, the required
pretension to prevent slippage is roughly 1500 N. Under this pretension, up to
175 Nm can be applied without belt slippage occurring at the lowest gear ratio, with
an applied torque at the driving gear as shown in Fig. 11. This is considered
reasonable as it is highly unlikely that 300 Nm of torque would be applied at the
lowest gear ratio.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 57
A high pretension also affects other aspects of the bicycle design. The tight side
tension in the v-belt when peddling is approximately equivalent to the tension in a
chain or timing belt-driven bicycle given the same applied torque. Hence, the peak
load on the frame and bearings is equivalent. However, the static pretension, and
hence the static load on the frame and bearings, is much higher when using the
v-belt considered in the present work.
The spindle shown in Fig. 12 is supported by two bearings and fits inside the
bottom bracket of the bicycle. Dimensionally the outside diameter is restricted at
32 mm, which is a standard size to suit most bicycles. Torque is applied to the
spindle from the force exerted by a cyclist on the pedals. A force of 1820 N is
applied at a distance of 170 mm (typical crank length) from the centre of the spindle
resulting in a torque of 310 Nm. This value is based on independent studies into the
maximum power a professional cyclist can generate in a sprint.
Firstly, the model was simplified by removing redundant geometry such as the
splines which connect the cranks to the spindle. All radii were removed to achieve a
more consistent mesh. Multiple holes were removed from an internal bracket. The
outside surface of the spindle was split into multiple surfaces to allow the appro-
priate application of loads and constraints. A fixed geometry constraint was applied
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
58 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
1820 N
on the opposite crank spline, which fixed movement in all planes. Two bearing
fixtures were applied to the model that replicates the bearings. These fixtures were
set to allow axial and circumferential movements but no radial expansion or
movement. A standard solid mesh with an element size of 1.4 mm was used for the
FEA study. This ensured that the thickness of the shell comprised of at least three
elements as shown in Fig. 13. An aspect ratio <3 was achieved for 99.7% of all
elements, and also no Jacobian elements were present.
The study was simulated yielding an initial maximum von Mises stress of
1250 MPa. This maximum was shown to be on the edges of the square cut-outs as
shown in Fig. 12. As a result, a 0.7 mm radius was applied to the corners of the
cut-outs and the simulation was rerun. This reduced the maximum von Mises stress
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 59
Fig. 14 Comparison of results using solid body (left) and shell elements (right)
to 1059 MPa. As a comparison, the model was also analysed as a shell, improving
solving time of which the results can be seen on the right of Fig. 14. The maximum
von Mises stress was 1112 MPa with the location coinciding with the location from
the solid body analysis, which in turn provided a level of verification for the
analysis. By clipping the results to show only the areas where Von Misses stresses
were greater than 500 MPa, it was evident that stresses were localised and con-
centrated around the radii of the cut-outs as shown in Fig. 15. The location of these
stresses was also matching.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
60 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
Fig. 15 Comparison between shell (left) and solid body (right) of von Mises stress above
500 MPa
Fixture
Shell Body
1820 N
Although the von Mises stresses were in a reasonable range that would allow the
use of many materials, the amount of deflection indicated otherwise. Figure 18
shows the deflected state of the crank with an elastic modulus of 105 GPa, repre-
senting a typical titanium alloy. The maximum deflection occurred at the point of
the applied load resulting in 0.61 mm. This was deemed to be not acceptable as the
deflection was greater than 1/500 industry standard. It would be recommended to
increase the thickness of the shell if this material is considered as a suitable can-
didate for the application.
Table 3 is a summary of the FEA study on the crank and spindle. In summary,
the maximum von Mises stress for the spindle and crank were 1059 and 211 MPa,
respectively. It is noted once one of the deflections is known the other deflections
can be calculated by using ratios. Likewise, if the applied load was reduced to
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 61
Fig. 17 FEA results of crank showing maximum von Mises stress for a thickness of 3 mm
Maximum displacement
Fig. 18 Deflection results for a titanium alloy with 105 GPa elastic modulus
4 Material Selection
The successful design is closely related to the correct selection of materials for each
of the components. With thousands of materials to choose from, a tool to assist with
the material selection would be required. Granta Design CES Selector provides a
collection of software tools and materials property data to support systematic
materials selection. CES Selector allows a designer to combine considerations of
properties such as environmental, engineering and economic factors. This is
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
62
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
clamp
Titanium 105 1820 211 Edge of 0.617 Pedal 600 70 0.20
clamp
E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 63
achieved through the use of a systematic rational selection process that involves
trade-offs between cost, engineering, performance and eco-behaviour [14].
Metals exhibit characteristics such as stiffness or rigidity which allows them to
resist deformation under an applied load. They also display relatively high elastic
moduli due to this stiffness. In a pure form, metals are soft and easily deformed. The
tensile strength of a metal can be increased by alloying with other elements.
Strength can also be increased through heat treatment processes. During this pro-
cess, the steel remains ductile allowing them to be formed by deformation pro-
cesses. Before a metal fails, it displays elongation known as yielding before it
fractures. More than other material groups’ metals are least resistant to corrosion
and also suffer from fatigue due to their ductility. Ceramics like metals have a high
elastic modulus and, however, are brittle. The strength of ceramics in compression
is far greater than that in compression. Ceramics can withstand fifteen times more
force in compression than tension before brittle failure. Due to not displaying, any
ductility ceramics are prone to stress fractures due to holes or upon a clamping
force. Brittle materials cannot distribute a load evenly over its shape and thus
require a substantial volume of material directly under the load. The main features
of ceramics include stiffness, hardness, resistance to abrasion and corrosion as well
as maintaining strength under high temperatures. Glasses are non-crystalline
(amorphous) solids. The common glasses include the soda-lime and borosilicate
glasses used in applications such as ovenware and bottles. Due to the lack of a
crystalline structure which suppresses plastic deformation glasses are hard, brittle
and prone to stress concentrations. Polymers have a low elastic modulus which is
approximately fifty times lower than that of metals, however that can be almost as
strong as metals. This means that their deformation under a load can be large. The
mechanical properties of polymers can vary greatly with temperature. A polymer
may be flexible at room temperature or brittle at 4 °C and few have strength over
200 °C. Polymers are mainly a crystalline structure with some amorphous or a
combination of both. The strength to density ratio can be as high as steels. Benefits
of polymers include resistance to corrosion, low coefficients of friction and easy to
form. Elastomers are long-chain polymers that exist above their glass transition
temperature. The polymer chains remain intact from covalent bonds above the glass
transition temperature and by van der Waals and hydrogen bonds below this
temperature. As such elastomers exhibit unique characteristics such as a very low
elastic modulus, as well as an increase in strength as temperatures rise and a vast
elastic region. Hybrids are a combination of two or materials in a prearranged shape
and scale. These materials aim is to combine the advantages of other materials
whilst avoiding their disadvantages. Hybrids include fibre and particulate com-
posites, sandwich structures, lattice structures, foams, cables and laminates. They
also included naturally occurring materials such as wood, leaf and bone. Advanced
hybrids include a polymer matrix reinforced with fibres such as glass, carbon. The
benefits of hybrids are that they are light, stiff, strong and tough. The disadvantages
are the cost and formability.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
64 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
4.1 Properties
Many materials have to conform to standards and codes, i.e. for those that will
come in contact with food. Others will be required to conform to environmental
considerations. For a product to be successful in the marketplace, it must be eco-
nomically viable and meet the design considerations in terms of performance,
consumer appeal and cost, for example. This performance is directly related to the
chosen material. Table 4 represents a list of basic material properties to consider
when choosing materials.
These vital properties are inbuilt into the material libraries of CES Selector. The
density, q (kg/m3), is the mass per unit volume. This is an important selection
criteria since the weight of the unit needs to be minimised. Performance for a
professional cyclist can be greatly affected by weight. Even a less
performance-orientated cyclist wishes to minimise weight in order to reduce the
required energy. The price, Cm ($/kg), is an important consideration. For a bicycle
drivetrain component to be marketable and sell, its cost must be relative to existing
equipment. The elastic modulus, E (GPa), is the slope of the initial linear elastic
region on a stress–strain curve. It describes the response of a material to tensile or
compression loading. The curve is used to measure the yield and tensile strength of
a material. The yield strength, oy (MPa), for metals is the stress at which the stress–
strain curve deviates by a strain of 0.2% from the linear elastic line as shown in
Fig. 19. For polymers, the yield strength is defined when the stress–strain curve
becomes nonlinear. The tensile strength, rts (MPa), is the nominal stress at which a
round bar of material loaded in tension begins to separate. For brittle materials such
as ceramics and glasses, the tensile strength is the same as the yield strength. For
ductile metals as shown in Fig. 19, the tensile strength is a lot greater than the yield
strength.
Cyclic loading can cause cracks to develop and to grow in a material, culmi-
nating in fatigue failure. For many materials an endurance limit, re (MPa), exists
which is illustrated in Fig. 20. The endurance limit can be defined as withstanding a
very large number of cycles 107, without fracture. The spindle undergoes a typical
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 65
W
¼ KA P ð16Þ
A
where A is the area of the slider surface, P is the normal force acting on the adjacent
surface and KA is a constant based on the sliding couple.
There are four main steps involved in the process of selecting materials for a
product. This includes firstly translation, which involves translating the design
requirements into functions, constraints, objectives and free variables. Secondly,
materials that do not meet the above requirements must be carefully eliminated.
Thirdly, the remaining materials must be ranked based on the objective that will
make the material perform the best. Finally, research into the top-ranked materials
must be performed to ensure suitability. Material selection will be performed on
(i) end disc, (ii) crank arm, (iii) shifter ring and (iv) spindle.
The end discs house the complete assembly comprising of the shifter rings,
shifters and guide rings which are then mounted on the spindle. The right-hand end
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
66 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
disc incorporates the crank, whilst the inner or left-side disc enclosures the unit. The
selection process will involve choosing the same material for the end discs and the
crank. It is unnecessary to have different material candidates for these items as it
would complicate the function and add complexity. The constraints imposed on the
ends discs and crank include elastic modulus, yield strength, density and cost. Of
these, it is imperative that the material meets the required yield strength to avoid
failure. It is also non-negotiable that the material must have a certain elastic
modulus. Elastic modulus is a variable used in order to determine the stiffness of a
member. The end discs must be stiff to ensure that the v-belt maintains contact with
the shifter rings. The density and cost are negotiable constraints. Both of these
constraints help with the marketability of the product, however, are not critical to
the function of the system and thus can be considered free variables. Table 4
highlights constraints which shall be maximised and minimised.
Elastic modulus versus density chart was plotted as shown in Fig. 21. To reduce
the number of candidates, limits were applied in line with Table 4. The density of
materials was restricted to less than 6000 kg/m3 with elastic modulus filtering out
materials less than 10 GPa. This still resulted in 1200 candidates. Furthermore,
1=2
material indices were plotted on the graph. These index, Eq , lines prescribe the
light and stiff beam materials. The top-ranking materials from all material groups
using this index included carbon fibres, polyethylene fibres, diamond, Kevlar and
beryllium as shown in Fig. 21. The best-ranked materials upon material class are
shown in Table 5.
The strength versus density plot as shown in Fig. 22 is used to find materials that
prescribe a low weight and high strength beam material. Figure 23 represents
materials that call for stiffness and strength at a minimum weight. The tensile
strength and elastic modulus are divided by the density. These properties measure
the mechanical efficiency of the material, meaning the minimum weight to support a
force. A high specific strength gives a material stiffness, whilst a high specific
strength prevents failure. Again, the density was restricted to materials less than
6000 kg/m3 with a tensile strength requiring at least 300 MPa to filter out brittle
materials. FEA results showed that the von Mises stress was 211 MPa in the crank
thus 300 MPa was chosen as a minimum. Additionally, the cost per kilogram of
material was restricted to $200 AUD to lower candidates and to meet objectives.
The best performing materials were a range of carbon fibres including a metal
matrix composite (MMC), bamboo as a natural material, titanium and aluminium
alloys. The best performing polymer was PEKK a thermoplastic with 40% carbon
fibre.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 67
100
10
Fig. 21 Elastic modulus E plotted against density q. The guidelines of constant E 1=2 =q allow
selection of materials when high stiffness and low weight are prescribed
Table 5 Short list of candidate materials for the cranks and end discs
Metals/ Hybrids Polymers Ceramics/ Fibres
alloys glasses
Beryllium Cyanate ester/carbon PEKK Diamond Carbon fibre
fibre
Magnesium PEEK/carbon fibre PA66 Boron carbide Polyethylene
fibre
Aluminium Wood PEEK Silicon carbide Kevlar
Titanium SPS
The shifter rings need to meet the same objectives as the end discs and the crank.
Additionally, they need to be wear resistant due to the frictional contact between
them and the v-belt known as adhesive wear. This wear is non-avoidable since it is
required to transmit the torque. Friction is required in the direction of the v-belts
motion; however, radially it should be minimised to reduce the force required to
change the belts diameter. Material candidates described below are possible
chooses; however, methods of improving the surface are required. Kevlar, as
indicated in Table 5 by itself, is a candidate material. Kevlar the main material
being aramid fibres is also a high abrasion resistant material in body armour. When
used in conjunction with carbon and glass fibres, it would be suitable for the shifter
rings. Common materials used on v-pulleys in the industry include aluminium,
brass, cast iron, plastic, stainless steel and zinc alloys; however, not all these meet
the objectives for design.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
68 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
10000
Strength - Density
1000
Bamboo (longitudinal)
100
Density (kg/m^3)
2=3
Fig. 22 Strength, rf is plotted against density, q. The guidelines of constant rf =q allow
selection of materials when minimum weight and high strength beam are prescribed
0.2
Alumina (Si3N4 hardened, pressed and sintered)
0.1
PEKK (40% carbon fiber)
0.05
0.01
Zinc-aluminum alloy, ZA-27, general casting
0.005
0.002
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 69
Titanium is an abundant metal found in the earth’s crust; however, extraction of the
metal from the oxide is difficult. This makes titanium expensive compared to other
light metal alloys such as aluminium and magnesium. Regardless, titanium is a
fast-growing material based on some outstanding mechanical properties. Titanium
alloys have a high melting point (1677 °C) and are light, resistant to corrosion from
most chemicals protected by a film of oxide on its surface. Titanium alloys are
exceptionally strong for their weight and can be used in high-temperature appli-
cations. An example is compressor blades on an aircraft turbine. They also exhibit
low thermal and electrical conductivity and low expansion coefficients.
Titanium alloys such as Ti-3A1-2.5V has been used on modern sports equipment
including golf clubs, tennis rackets and bicycle frames. With carbon fibre com-
posites becoming more advanced, titanium alloys fell out of favour. However,
titanium cranks can still be purchased today. Although expensive, titanium alloys
are an option for the cranks and end discs. Aluminium alloys have been used in the
bicycle industry for many years. Aluminium alloy 7075 composing of zinc, mag-
nesium and copper plus other trace elements is a common material used in the
bicycle industry. As shown in Fig. 23, it has a high specific strength and modulus.
It is strong compared with carbon steel, has good fatigue strength and is machin-
able. Its low cost and low weight contribute to making it a candidate for the use of
the spindle and shifter rings. Carbon fibre-reinforced polymer (CFRP) is a very
strong and lightweight fibre-reinforced plastic that comprises of carbon fibres.
CFRP is more expensive than steel alloy options but is used extensively on bicycle
components due to their high strength to weight ratio. They are also very stiff,
making them good for sports equipment plus usable in aerospace and the auto-
motive industries. Compared to aluminium or titanium, CFRP is lighter whilst
maintaining the same strength. Carbon fibre composites are workable meaning they
can be made into sections that will maximise stiffness in one direction by the
orientation of the weave. Hence, CFRP can be manufactured to maximise the
aerodynamics of a cyclist which is important in professional cycling events.
Currently, CFRP dominates modern performance-orientated bicycle designs. It can
be found on suspension linkages, pedals, handlebars, derailleur parts and brake
components. As such, CFRP is a viable choice of material for many parts namely
the cranks, spindle and shifter.
The design of CVT needs to consider the existing hardware and setup of the
common chain drivetrain. This is important to ensure that the new design can
integrate into a standard bicycle with the least alterations possible. It is also
important that the pulley is designed for manufacture (DFM). This means that the
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
70 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
pulley is designed in such way that it can be produced easily. DFM is the practice of
designing products with manufacturing in mind, so they can:
• Be designed in the least time with the least development cost,
• Make the quickest and smoothest transition into production,
• Be assembled and tested with the minimum cost in the minimum amount of
time,
• Have the desired levels of quality and reliability, and
• Satisfy customers’ needs and compete well in the marketplace.
The horizontal distance between the outside of the pedal connection from one
crank to the other is known as the tread width or “Q” factor. This lateral distance
determines the distance between the feet during a pedal stroke. There is no stan-
dardisation of tread distance in bicycle manufacturing. The tread distance is mainly
determined by the width of the bottom bracket and the number of chainrings.
A touring mountain bike generally has three chainrings compared to two on a road
bike and hence would have a greater tread distance to accommodate the extra
chainring. The tread width also plays an important role in cycling performance,
injury prevention and comfort [15]. The ideal tread width varies based on the
individual’s biomechanical characteristics. In order to pedal efficiently, the tread
width should mimic that of the cyclist’s natural stance. Previous research has shown
that performing squats at alternating stance widths affected the electromyography
(EMG) activity [16]. Also, Donelan et al. [17] found that the metabolic cost of
walking was reduced with narrower steps, compared to that of a wider footprint.
Having said these, it is thought that reducing the tread width on a bicycle will
result in lower oxygen intake for a given power output thereby increasing the gross
mechanical efficiency (GME). GME was calculated using the ratio of the work
accomplished in kcal/min to energy expended in kcal/min. Disley and Li [15]
examined whether changes in the tread width had any benefit on cycling efficiency
and muscular activation. A total of twenty-four professional cyclists were examined
on stationary test bike that involved pedalling for five minutes at 90 rpm using tread
widths of 90, 120, 150 and 180 mm. Although there was no substantial evidence
suggesting more or less muscle activity over the varying tread widths, there was a
significant difference of GME as shown in Fig. 24.
The results show that for tread widths below 120 mm, there was an increase in
GME approximately 0.3% compared to the tread widths 150 mm and above. This
increase results in an additional power output at submaximal levels of approxi-
mately 1.5–2.0% [15]. Professional cyclists competing in events such as the Tour
de France over three weeks require cyclists to perform at submaximal levels for up
to six hours a day. For an 180 km stage with a cyclist working close to the
submaximal level with a power output of 180–280 W, this would correlate to
around a 3–5 W saving resulting in a potentially finishing the race 2–3 min earlier
[18].
A typical road bike has a tread width of approximately 150 mm, whereas a
mountain bikes are larger at around 170 mm [19]. Recent new designs in bottom
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 71
Fig. 24 Changes in gross mechanical efficiency (GME) with different tread widths [15]
bracket design notably the BB30 allow the road bikes to have narrow tread width. It
has been noted that some Olympic and World Champion cyclists have ridden
custom-made bicycles with tread widths less than 130 mm in order to improve their
performance and in doing so have won Olympic and World Championship medals
and time trial stages of the Tour de France [15]. From the tests carried out by Disley
and Li [15], the cyclists also reported that the 180 mm tread width felt uncom-
fortable and not natural. In order for a cyclist to perform well, it is important that the
design of the bicycle encompasses good ergonomics. Additionally, the tread width
affects the manoeuvrability of the bicycle. When a cyclist is banking their bike to
navigate a corner, a wider tread width causes the pedals to come in contact with the
ground at a lesser angle. This is known as a pedal strike which can cause a cyclist to
crash at high speeds. Bicycle manufacturers look to design bottom brackets (BB) as
low as possible as this allows for better handling. It allows the seat to be lower to
the ground, in turn, lowering the rider’s centre of gravity. This provides more
responsive rear end steering and sharper cornering [20].
Consumers are expecting more visually on how a product looks more than ever
before. In the past, people were satisfied if the product did the intended job and
were not so concerned about its visual appeal. The modern consumer is looking for
well thought out designs that showcase an understanding of their values and life-
style. If a product falls short in this respect, the consumer will be disappointed and
will start to look elsewhere [21]. The aesthetic appearance will be more important to
the daily commuter than the performance-orientated cyclist. However, it is
important to understand the benefits that the cyclists want from the product and to
understand what is required to achieve these desirable features. In essence, the
product will need to bring joy to the end-user [21].
During individual time trials in cycling racing, or in triathlons where a cyclist
races on their own, it is important to be as aerodynamic as possible. In these events,
a few seconds advantage can result in a podium position. Manufactures and cyclists
go to extreme lengths to reduce drag. This includes helmet design, bicycle frame
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
72 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
design, cyclists’ body position, wheel design and clothing to name a few. It can be
seen that a larger tread width will widen the cyclist’s legs and feet resulting in
additional drag. Although not ideal for a performance, a cycling commuter could be
less forgiving. In addition, the frontal surface area of the pulley that houses the
shifter rings and v-belt is greater in the area compared to that of two chainrings.
Although no computational fluid dynamic simulations have been conducted on the
pulley, it is reasonable to suggest that the aerodynamic performance will be weaker.
It is possible that this could be improved by adding a cowling to the front of the
pulley.
The bottom bracket is the tubular pipe which sits at the bottom of a bicycle
frame. Its purpose is to house the crank arm assembly. The crank arm assembly
consists of the cranks, spindle and chainrings. In the past, the bottom bracket came
fairly standard, with the only decisions needed to make were the shell width,
spindle length and in rare occasions, the thread type, being either English or Italian
threading [22]. In today’s market, there are many different sized bottom brackets
each with varying configurations from bicycle manufacturers that claim benefits
over the others. These benefits may include at-home serviceability, weight reduc-
tion, pedal stiffness, narrower “q” factor, reduced creaking, longevity and reduced
manufacturing costs. The conventionally threaded bottom bracket dates back to
more than twenty years. The idea is to allow the use of a much larger spindle by
moving the bearings to the outside of the shell. The standard diameter spindle for
this setup is 24 mm. The major benefit of this design is that it is compatible with the
largest range of cranks that isolate the bearing from the frameset and avoid
creaking. The consequence for this system is that it is heavier than a press-fit
arrangement [22]. In 2007, Trek introduced the BB90 system which involved the
manufacturer pressing bare bearing directly into the bottom bracket. To save
weight, the bearings are pressed into precision-machined carbon seats with the
bottom bracket. This replaced the common arrangement in which bearings were
pressed into aluminium cups which were then screwed into the frame. The benefits
of the BB90 include maintaining a wide range of compatibility with conventional
setups and create a wider bottom bracket without affecting the “q” factor [23].
Disadvantages include not being able to use cup-mounted chain guides and
requiring special tooling for serviceability. Similar to the BB90 system, the BF86
standard is used by popular brands such as Giant and Scott. The bearing spacing is
identical to a conventional threaded bottom bracket setup with the exception that
the bearings are fitted into cups before being press-fitted into the bottom bracket.
The tolerances are more relaxed compared to the BB90 system which allows them
to easier adapt to alloy frames. The press-fit cups improve the pedalling stiffness by
up to 10% on the traditional threaded bottom brackets [22]. The benefits and
negatives are the same as the BB90 system. In 2006, Cannondale released the BB30
system as an open standard. As with the BB90 system, the bearing cartridges press
directly into a tight tolerance shell. The difference is that the spindle and shell
diameters are increased and not the shell width. This results in a lighter weight
system due to not requiring separate cups that house the bearings. Another differ-
ence is that the BB30 system has a larger 30 mm diameter spindle which is fitted
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 73
into a bottom bracket that is just 68 mm. This compares to 86 and 90 mm for the
BB86 and BB90 systems, respectively. This shorter width allows for more heel
clearance against the frame of the bicycle and depending on the crank offset makes
it possible to have a narrower “q” factor. In fact, the BB30 allows for the narrowest
“q” factor on the market. Additional advantages include reduced weight and
increased stiffness [22]. The increased stiffness is due to the increased diameter of
the spindle which has a greater radius of gyration compared to a 24 mm spindle.
As with most products, a product that requires as little maintenance as possible
will appeal to consumers. A typical derailleur chain drivetrain requires regular
cleaning of road built-up grime. This is as simple as using a brush to loosen debris,
applying degreaser and wiping clean. It is also important to clean and lubrication
the chain. Research has shown that an inadequate lubricated chain can cause a loss
in efficiency [24]. Lubrication of the cable/housing is important to ensure smooth
shifting. Additional maintenance would include calibration of the front and rear
derailleurs to ensure a smooth transition when shifting between gears. As expected,
all manufactured parts do not have an infinite life expectancy. A typical derailleur
chain drivetrain requires replacement of chains, cassettes and chainrings at regular
intervals. A chain comprises of many links made up from a pin, outer and inner
plates a bushing and a roller. The typical road bike can have in excess of one
hundred links. The spacing between each chain link is known as the pitch.
Depending on the brand of chain, it may require replacing every 5000 km due to
stretch. This sketch occurs from the bushings rubbing on the chain pins. Over a
period of time, the inner diameter of the bushings increases and hence pins reduce
in diameter. A bicycle chain is generally said to be worn when the growth exceeds
1% of the original length [25]. It is critical that a worn chain is replaced in order to
reduce wear on the cassette and chainrings. A worn chain can easily wear out a
brand new cassette within 1000 km. A chain is very good at making the sprockets
match the pitch of the chain; therefore, it is important to change the chain before its
worn out to ensure the longevity of the cassette and chainrings [25]. Even so, the
cassette will require replacing every second or third chain replacement, 10,000–
15,000 km [26].
As with a chain drivetrain, a v-belt will stretch over time. In automobile
applications and some industrial applications, the sketch of the belt is controlled by
the use of a tensioner. Tensioners can be automatic or manual depending on the
equipment and required maintenance schedule. A chain derailleur system takes up
the slack chain by the use of a spring mechanism built into the body of the rear
derailleur. These belts are made of several flexible high strength steel bands that are
held together by bow-tie-shaped pieces of metal. Theses bow-tie-shaped pieces or
elements work together with the metal bands to transmit torque. This occurs
because of the friction between the bands and the elements [27]. This causes a
combined push–pull action in the belt that allows torque transmission.
Bicycle cranks are made to varying lengths to suit different sized riders and
different types of cycling. The length of the crank is measured from the centre of the
spindle to the centre of the pedal. The typical and most common crank length on a
bicycle is 170 mm; however, manufacturers offer sizes anywhere from 165 to
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
74 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
180 mm usually in 2.5 mm increments. Speciality cranks and adjustable cranks can
also be purchased outside of this range [28]. The general idea of the perfect crank
length has been centred on the length of the cyclist’s leg. A longer leg would lead to
a longer crank, whereas a shorter leg would require a shorter crank. Research in this
area has produced numerous considerations for crank length selection.
Considerations include the inseam length to the leg length. The inseam length is a
measurement from the ground to the crotch, whereas the leg length is a measure
from the ground to the femoral head. This ratio is not always proportional to one
another; therefore, one would expect these lengths to be used in the calculation of
the optimal crank length. Also, the leg proportions between the upper and lower leg
should be considered. A cyclist with a long tibia bone will experience higher knee
lift which can cause the thigh to interfere with their rig cage especially on longer
cranks and low handlebars. A longer foot relative to the leg will enable the cyclist to
reach longer pedals and may be a factor in determining the crank length. Other
considerations may include the flexibility of the cyclist in terms of their hamstrings
[28]. Research done by Martin and Spirduso [29] investigated the effects of cycle
crank length on maximum cycling power, cadence, pedal speed and crank length to
leg ratio. Crank lengths of 120, 145, 170, 195 and 220 mm were analysed. The
results on maximum power to crank length from their work are shown in Fig. 25. It
can be seen that 145 mm cranks resulted in the maximum power output under test
conditions. The optimal crank length was 20% of the leg length or 41% of the tibia
length [29]. The conclusion to this work suggested that even though maximum
cycling power was affected by crank length, using standard 170 mm cranks should
not dramatically affect maximum cycling power in cyclists.
The majority of new bicycle equipment on offer targets weight reduction by
using advanced materials and hollow components. For a performance-orientated
cyclist, 100 grams’ reduction can result in seconds or even minutes’ advantage
depending on the event. That being said, in 2000 the world governing body for
sports cycling put a limit on the weight of bicycles in tournaments to be greater than
6.8 kg [30]. This was mainly due to safety reasons because of the rapid develop-
ment of bicycle componentry towards the end of the century. Due to this current
restriction, it is possible for an amateur cyclist to be riding a bicycle that is lighter
than that of the professionals. In major cycling tournaments, weights are added to
the bicycle to ensure compliance or heavier equipment is used. Table 6 represents a
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 75
5 Conclusion
There has been a small success with some drivetrains such as the internal hub gears
and the NuVinci CVT; the chain derailleur system has been dominated the market
since its inception in the late 1930s.
The spindle and cranks had to bare a 300 Nm torque in a performance-orientated
bicycle. This torque results from the FEA analysis suggested the spindle would
require yield strengths exceeding 500 MPa. The von Mises stresses in the spindle
could be reduced by increasing the shell thickness; however, thickness needed to be
minimised due to the requirement of housing an internal electric motor. Results
from the FEA on the crank indicated a maximum von Mises stress of 211 MPa.
Maximum deflection occurred at the pedal is approximately 0.6 mm which was
deemed acceptable.
The material selection process involved the use of an advanced material database
within CES Selector software. The goal was to determine materials for the initial
physical prototype. By determining the desirable conditions of the material and
their objectives, graphs were plotted along with material indices to highlight and
systematically determine the optimal materials. Materials such as aluminium and
titanium alloys performed well due to their low weight-to-strength ratio. Composite
materials that incorporated carbon fibres such as CFRP showed to be the most
suitable due to their high stiffness and low cost, as well as the low weight and a high
tensile strength common amongst low weight steel alloys.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
76 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
A technical feasibility study was performed on the drivetrain. Some of the key
areas explored included the “q” factor, aesthetics, aerodynamics, bottom bracket
design, maintenance, durability, crank length and weight. Compared to a standard
chain derailleur drivetrain, the CVT system was greater in volume, which in this
case resulted in significantly higher overall drivetrain weight. A larger ‘q’ factor and
poorer aerodynamics will lead to further inefficacies. The current design can only fit
a BB30 style bottom bracket which limits its implementation on popularly branded
bicycles.
The overall drivetrain efficiency of a standard chain derailleur system can have
high as 98.6%. The major problem with CVT systems compared to the currently
preferred derailleur chain setup is that they are less efficient at transferring torque to
the rear wheel. This is due to heat dissipation from the friction of the v-belt onto the
shifter rings. Another factor that is responsible for the overall drivetrain efficiency is
the diameter of the rear pulley. The rear pulley is not included in the scope of this
project of work; however, the relatively small diameter reduces the drivetrain
efficiency. The CVT will need to overcome many hurdles to be accepted and
marketable as an alternative drivetrain. The drivetrain has the potential to exploit
the rapidly growing e-bike industry as many of the issues facing the current design
would be alleviated.
Questions
1. What is the significance of a bike?
Answer: The bicycle is one of the most identifiable creations of mechanical
equipment worldwide due to its availability and mass production. The bicycle is
a common occurrence in most countries of the world being used as the primary
mode of transport in developing countries and for predominately recreational
use throughout the developed world. Advances in mechanical design in today’s
market of the bicycle are more focused on a niche set of consumers. These
advances include components such as the braking system, material selection
and drivetrain components.
2. What is the function of derailleur in a bike?
Answer: The derailleur allowed the shifting of the chain onto different sized
rear sprockets, known as a “cassette” by a mechanical cable. It incorporates a
front shifter that is typically used to change between two or three front
sprockets known as a chainring and a cassette with ten sprockets.
Advancements of the derailleur have focused on improvements in shifting
precision, changing under load, ease of shifting and a move towards electronic
control as opposed to mechanical control.
3. How to define maximum efficiency of a bike?
Answer: In the professional world of competitive cycling, a cyclist aspires to
maximise their efficiency. The maximum efficiency is determined in part by the
combination of cadence and resistance that will produce the most power with
the least amount of stress on the body. Factors that contribute to this stress
include oxygen consumption, heart rate level and muscle fatigue.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 77
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
78 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
governing body for sports cycling put a limit on the weight of bicycles in
tournaments to be greater than 6.8 kg. This was mainly due to safety reasons
because of the rapid development of bicycle componentry towards the end of
the century. Due to this current restriction, it is possible for an amateur cyclist
to be riding a bicycle that is lighter than that of the professionals. In major
cycling tournaments, weights are added to the bicycle to ensure compliance or
heavier equipment is used. A benefit is that the weight is being added quite low
on the bicycle which reduces the centre of the bicycle of gravity. This, in turn,
will assist with the stability and cornering capabilities.
8. Please indicate whether the following statements are True or false
(1) Continuously variable transmission (CVT) offers a smooth transition
through a defined gear range by providing an infinite number of gears.
(2) The derailleur allowed the shifting of the chain onto different sized rear
sprockets, known as a “cassette” by a mechanical cable.
(3) A modern professional road bike with two chainrings and a ten-speed
cassette theoretically have twenty gear ratios.
Answer: All are true
9. Please indicate whether the following statements are True or false
(1) The maximum efficiency is determined in part by the combination of
cadence and resistance that will produce the most power with the least
amount of stress on the body.
(2) The press-fit cups improve the pedalling stiffness by up to 10% on the
traditional threaded bottom brackets.
(3) CVT use as a bicycle transmission is limited though NuVinci CVT has
been adopted by some bicycle manufacturers.
Answer: All are true
10. Please indicate whether the following statements are True or false
(1) A well-maintained chain drive system with a derailleur setup can achieve
an efficiency of 98.6% in comparison with 78–86% of NuVinci CVT.
(2) The spindle and cranks had to bare a 300 Nm torque in a
performance-orientated bicycle.
(3) The tight side tension in the v-belt when peddling is approximately
equivalent to the tension in a chain or timing belt-driven bicycle given the
same applied torque.
(4) The CVT will need to overcome many hurdles to be accepted and mar-
ketable as an alternative drivetrain.
Answer: All are true.
Glossary
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 79
References
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
80 E. M. Berge and A. Pramanik
11. Recapturing the Lost Efficiency of a V-Belt Drive. (2015). Regal Beloit Corporation. http://
www.regalpts.com/PowerTransmissionSolutions/Brochures/Form_9950E.pdf. Accessed 01
June, 2017.
12. Lucia, A., Hoyos, J., & Chicharro, J. L. (2001). Preferred pedalling cadence in professional
cycling. Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise, 33(8), 1361–1366.
13. Kifer, K. (1999). Cycling cadence and bicycle gearing. https://web.archive.org/web/
20120204100228/http://www.kenkifer.com/bikepages/touring/gears.htm. Accessed 28 June,
2017.
14. Ashby, M. (2010). Materials selection in mechanical design (4th ed).
15. Disley, B. X., & Li, F.-X. (2014). The effect of Q factor on gross mechanical efficiency and
muscular activation in cycling. Scandinavian Journal of Medicine and Science in Sports, 24
(1), 117–121. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1600-0838.2012.01479.x.
16. McCaw, S. T., & Melrose, D. R. (1999). Stance width and bar load effects on leg muscle
activity during the parallel squat. Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise, 31(3), 428–
436. https://doi.org/10.1097/00005768-199903000-00012.
17. Donelan, J. M., Kram, R., & Kuo, A. D. (2001). Mechanical and metabolic determinants of
the preferred step width in human walking. Proceedings of the Royal Society B-Biological
Sciences, 268(1480), 1985–1992. https://doi.org/10.1098/rspb.2001.1761.
18. Laursen, P. B., Rhodes, E. C., Langill, R. H., McKenzie, D. C., & Taunton, J. E. (2002).
Relationship of exercise test variables to cycling performance in an Ironman Triathlon.
European Journal of Applied Physiology, 87(4–5), 433–440. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00421-
002-0659-4.
19. Lamy, M. (2015). What is ‘Q Factor’, and does it make a difference? Time Inc. (UK) Ltd
Sport & Leisure Network. http://www.cyclingweekly.com/news/latest-news/what-is-q-factor-
and-does-it-make-a-difference-187403. Accessed 22 May, 2017.
20. Kavanagh, A. (2016). How to use bike geometry charts and what they mean. BikeExchange
Inc. https://www.bikeexchange.com.au/article/privacy-and-security. Accessed 23 June, 17.
21. Jordan, P. W. (2003). Designing pleasurable products: An introduction to the new human
factors, designing pleasurable products: An introduction to the new human factors. Hoboken:
Taylor and Francis.
22. Huang, J. (2017). Complete guide to bottom brackets. Immediate Media Company Ltd. http://
www.bikeradar.com/au/gear/article/complete-guide-to-bottom-brackets-36660/. Accessed 24
May, 17.
23. Sohner, B. (2010). Bottom brackets 101. https://www.bikerumor.com/2010/02/17/bottom-
bracket-tech-breakdown/. Accessed 25 May, 2017.
24. Huang, J. (2012). The effects of temperature on chain lubricant and friction. Immediate Media
Company Ltd. http://www.bikeradar.com/au/gear/article/the-effects-of-temperature-on-chain-
lubricant-and-friction-35806/. Accessed 29 May, 2017.
25. Rome, D. (2016). How to know when it’s time to replace your bicycle chain. Immediate
Media Company Limited. http://www.bikeradar.com/au/road/gear/article/bicycle-chain-wear-
explained-46015/. Accessed 25 May, 2017.
26. Stone, J. (2014). How many miles will a road bike’s chain and cassette last? John Stone
Fitness LLC. http://www.johnstonefitness.com/2014/10/07/how-many-miles-will-a-road-
bikes-chain-and-cassette-last/. Accessed 26 May, 2017.
27. Srivastava, N., & Haque, I. (2009). A review on belt and chain Continuously Variable
Transmissions (CVT): Dynamics and control. Mechanism and Machine Theory, 44(1), 19–41.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.mechmachtheory.2008.06.007.
28. Hogg, S. (2011). Crank length—which one? Steve Hogg—All rights Reserved. https://www.
stevehoggbikefitting.com/bikefit/2011/06/crank-length-which-one/. Accessed 27 May, 2017.
29. Martin, J. C., & Spirduso, W. W. (2001). Determinants of maximal cycling power: Crank
length, pedaling rate and pedal speed. European Journal of Applied Physiology, 84(5), 413–
418. https://doi.org/10.1007/s004210100400.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
2 Analysis and Material Selection of a Continuously Variable … 81
30. Arthur, D. (2015). Could the Uci Scrap the 6.8 kg Weight Limit in 2016? Farrelly Atkinson
(F-At) Limited. http://road.cc/content/tech-news/173097-could-uci-scrap-68kg-weight-limit-
2016. Accessed 27 May, 2017.
31. Streeter, C. (2014). Model of a facile bicycle. Fine Art America—Buy Art Online. http://
fineartamerica.com/featured/model-of-a-facile-bicycle-clive-streeter-dorling-kindersley-
science-museum-london.html.
32. Vintage Bicycle. (2014). WordPress.com. https://vintagebicycle.wordpress.com/page/2/.
33. Brown, S. (2008). Gear theory for bicyclists. http://www.sheldonbrown.com/gear-theory.html.
34. CVT. (2016). Mitsubishi Motors Corporation. http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/spirit/
technology/library/cvt.html.
35. Feeken, D. (2017). Gear calculator. Dirk Feeken. http://www.gear-calculator.com/. Accessed
28 May, 2017.
36. Component Weights (2017). Total cycling & export technologies. http://www.totalcycling.
com/en/au/Component-Weights/cc-8.aspx. Accessed 27 May, 2017.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
Chapter 3
Coin Minting
P. Alexandrino P. J. Leitão
INCM, Imprensa Nacional Casa da Moeda, Av. António José de Almeida,
1000-001 Lisbon, Portugal
e-mail: [email protected]
P. J. Leitão
e-mail: [email protected]
L. M. Alves P. A. F. Martins (&)
IDMEC, Instituto Superior Técnico, Universidade de Lisboa, Av. Rovisco Pais,
1049-001 Lisbon, Portugal
e-mail: [email protected]
L. M. Alves
e-mail: [email protected]
C. V. Nielsen
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Technical University of Denmark,
2800 Kongens Lyngby, Denmark
e-mail: [email protected]
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
84 P. Alexandrino et al.
1 Introduction
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
3 Coin Minting 85
(a)
Reverse die
Disk
(coin blank)
(b)
Fig. 1 Coin minting process. a Schematic representation and notation and b photograph of the
dies utilized for producing the collection coin dedicated to the age of iron and glass in Europe that
was utilized in the investigation
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
86 P. Alexandrino et al.
Plancak [10] on the plastic flow to form coin microfeatures, which included a
comparison between the experimentally required contact pressure and that calcu-
lated by means of the upper bound method.
The third period (2000–until now) has been mainly driven by the availability of
three-dimensional finite element computer programs and high-performance com-
puters. Nowadays, it is possible to set up finite element models that account for the
actual nonlinear material properties and for the complex contact features that are
typical of the coin minting processes in order to produce accurate predictions of
plastic flow, strain, stress, damage, and force versus die stroke evolution.
The fundamental discussion on the numerical modeling of the coin minting
process is nowadays centered in the choice between dynamic finite element for-
mulations based on explicit solution schemes and quasi-static finite element for-
mulations based on implicit solution schemes.
In 2007, Buffa et al. [11] utilized a commercial three-dimensional finite element
computer program based on a quasi-static formulation with rigid–plastic constitu-
tive equations to simulate a coin minting process, where simple three-dimensional
circular, o-shaped, and t-shaped relief features were engraved in a coin. The disk
was discretized by means of a non-structured mesh of tetrahedral elements, and the
dies and collar were assumed to be rigid objects. The accuracy and reliability of the
numerical predictions were not validated against experimental results.
In 2008, Xu et al. [12] reported the development of a special purpose finite
element computer program based on a dynamic explicit formulation with elastoplastic
constitutive equations to simulate the coin minting process. The discretization of the
disks was performed by means of hexahedral elements, and the dies and collar were
considered rigid and discretized by means of spatial triangular and quadrilateral
elements. The program was utilized to optimize the edge shape of the disks.
In 2009, Guo [13] utilized a commercial three-dimensional finite element
computer program based on a dynamic explicit formulation to simulate coin
minting with serrations on the inner surface of the collar. The dies were considered
rigid and discretized by means of triangular elements, but the overall level of detail
and complexity of its surfaces were simplified by removing letters and replacing the
relief features of the figures by stepped cavities with 0.1 mm depth. The numerical
predictions of the coin minting force obtained under these simplifying assumptions
were compared against experimental results. However, the above-mentioned sim-
plifications created no conditions to compare finite element predicted and experi-
mentally observed filling of the actual relief coin features.
Later in 2012, Zhong et al. [14] utilized the above-mentioned special purpose
finite element computer program [12] to predict the formation of tiny scratches
caused by radial friction in the flat regions of the coin adjacent to the edge, in
collaboration with the Shenyang Mint of China. The accuracy and reliability of the
computer program were assessed by means of qualitative observations related to
material flow. Quantitative comparisons between finite element predictions and
experimental results were limited.
More recently, Li et al. [15] further developed the special purpose dynamic
explicit finite element computer program [12] by introducing locking-free
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
3 Coin Minting 87
The analytical estimate of the coin minting force F is based on the determination of
the average contact pressure pavg ,
where A is the area of the coin, rR is the tensile strength of the coin material, and Qf
is a pressure multiplying factor. Typical values of Qf are in the range of 4–5 in
order to account for the complexity of the relief profiles and the combined influence
, friction l, diameter D, and thickness t of the coins.
of flow stress r
The latter combined influence can be obtained from the slab method analysis of
free upsetting of a cylinder between flat parallel platens,
lD
pavg 1þ
ffir ð2Þ
3t
However, when a detailed evolution of force with die stroke is required and the
progressive filling of the relief coin features needs to be analyzed, more sophisti-
cated calculation approaches based on the finite element method have to be con-
sidered. Two main finite element formulations can be chosen for this purpose:
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
88 P. Alexandrino et al.
(i) the quasi-static finite element formulations based on implicit time integration and
(ii) the dynamic finite element formulations based on explicit time integration.
This section starts by presenting a brief overview of both finite element for-
mulations and ends by disclosing the modeling conditions utilized in the numerical
simulation of the collection coins produced by the Portuguese Mint. Emphasis is
also given to the procedure utilized for transforming the three-dimensional clay
models prepared by the sculptor into the triangular spatial meshes that were utilized
in the discretization of the dies.
The quasi-static finite element formulations are based on the static governing
equilibrium equations in current (say, deformed) configuration (in the absence of
body forces),
@rij
¼0 ð3Þ
@xj
In the above equations rij denotes the stress tensor, xj are the coordinates, ti ¼
rij nj are the tractions applied on the boundary ST with prescribed tractions having
the unit normal vector nj , and ui are the velocities (or, instead, the displacements).
The duality between velocities and displacements is due to the fact that finite
element formulations can be set up in the rate form or in the rate independent form.
Equation (4) is commonly referred as the ‘weak variational form’ of Eq. (3)
because the static governing equilibrium equations are now only satisfied in weaker
continuity requirements. Its computer implementation requires solving the fol-
lowing matrix set of nonlinear equations,
Kt ut ¼ Ft ð5Þ
which expresses the equilibrium condition at the instant of time t. The symbol K
denotes the stiffness matrix, and F is the generalized force vector resulting from the
loads, pressure, and friction stresses applied on the boundary. The basic feature of
K is its nonlinearity with u.
The main advantage of the quasi-static finite element formulations over the
dynamic finite element formulations is related to the solution scheme which is
commonly based on implicit instead of explicit procedures. As a result of this,
quasi-static finite element formulations check equilibrium at each increment of time
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
3 Coin Minting 89
by means of iterative procedures meant to minimize the residual force vector R ðuÞ
to within a specified tolerance g (the symbol i denotes the current iteration number),
@ rij
q €
ui ¼ 0 ð7Þ
@ xj
In the above equation, q denotes the material density and €ui is the acceleration.
The matrix form of Eq. (7) for computer implementation is expressed as follows:
€t þ Ftint ¼ Ft
Mt u ð8Þ
where the symbol M denotes the mass matrix, Fint ¼ Ku is the vector of internal
forces resulting from the stiffness of the metal forming system, and F is the gen-
eralized force vector.
The above-mentioned advantages in computation and memory requirements of
the dynamic finite element formulations result from diagonalization of the mass
matrix M (lumped mass matrix). In fact, its inversion is trivial and the overall
solution can be performed independently and very fast for each degree of freedom.
However, because there is no check of equilibrium after each increment of time, the
increments of time need to be very small, and the overall number of steps to
conclude the simulations is, therefore, very large.
Other drawbacks resulting from the utilization of dynamic finite element for-
mulations with explicit solution schemes that are not addressed here are related to
the utilization of scaling parameters for mass, velocity, and damping. These scaling
parameters are commonly utilized to artificially increase the time increments and
may give rise to inaccurate solutions for the deformation, prediction of forming
defects, and distribution of the major field variables within the workpiece [18].
From what was said above, it is easy to understand the reason why some
investigations in coin minting made use of quasi-static finite element formulations
(e.g., references [9, 11, 17]), while other made use of dynamic finite element
formulations (e.g., [12–15]). The same applies in the numerical simulation of other
metal forming processes.
The in-house finite element computer program that is being developed by the
authors in collaboration with the Portuguese Mint is based on the three-dimensional
finite element computer program I-form, which has been validated against exper-
imental results of forming processes since the end of the 1980s [19]. I-form is based
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
90 P. Alexandrino et al.
on the quasi-static finite element flow formulation which may be derived from
Eq. (4) as follows:
0 1
Z Z Z Z Zjur j
B C
e_ dV þ K
1
P¼ r e_ 2v dV ti ui dSþ @ sf dur A dS ð9Þ
2
V V ST Sf 0
Figure 2a, b show the original clay models (in a scale 7:1) prepared by the sculptor
and the discretization of the corresponding obverse and reverse dies by means of
spatial triangular contact–friction elements.
The original clay models are much larger than the dies in order to allow facial
details, hair, and hands to be sculptured more lifelike and also to facilitate the
inclusion of folds and other realistic features in cloths, flowers, and other motifs
commonly available in coins. In fact, all these details would be very difficult to
accomplish if the sculptor theme had to be directly expressed in the actual size of
the coins.
The scaling down of the clay models to the actual shape and size of the dies is
performed digitally and involves three-dimensional scanning and correction of the
relief profiles in order to add appropriate small convex curvatures on the obverse
and reverse surfaces of the dies. Letters, numbers, and the national coat of arms are
digitally added to each die.
The digital representation of each die surface is performed by means of a tri-
angular tessellation and then saved in an stereolithography (STL) file format and
converted into a workable finite element input data file. The conversion of the STL
file into a workable finite element input data file containing the geometry of the dies
is performed automatically by the finite element computer program in order to save
time and effort and to prevent the loss of details of the die profiles due to the
utilization of intermediate preprocessing systems.
The collar (not shown in Fig. 2) was also discretized by means of spatial tri-
angular contact–friction elements. Two types of collar profiles are used: flat and
serrated.
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
3 Coin Minting 91
Fig. 2 Discretization of the die surfaces. a Original clay models supplied by the sculptor (scale
7:1) and b discretization of the die surfaces by means of spatial triangular elements after scanning
and scaling down the clay models to the actual coin size
The disks are discretized by a structured mesh of hexahedral elements with five
layers of elements across thickness as shown in Fig. 3.
In the proposed investigation, the convergence tolerance g of the residual force
vector was specified as 10−3, and the overall numerical simulation was accom-
plished through a succession of 85 displacement increments each of one modeling
approximately 0.15% of the initial disk thickness.
3 Experimentation
The industrial case studies utilized in the investigation were the collection coins
dedicated to Portuguese architecture (Fig. 4a), to the age of iron and glass in Europe
(Fig. 4b) and to Portuguese Ethnography (Fig. 4c). The selected case studies
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
92 P. Alexandrino et al.
Fig. 3 Finite element simulation of the coin minting process. a Initial mesh and b numerically
predicted geometry at the end of the coin minting process
combine different types of relief features. Table 1 summarizes the material and
geometry of the disks that were utilized in the investigation performed with each
coin.
This section describes the experimental work for determining the stress–strain
curve of the disk materials by means of stack compression tests, the verification of
the force values provided by the industrial knuckle-joint press where tests were
performed and the experimental work plan for assessing finite element predictions
of the coin minting process.
The stress–strain curves of the Silver–Copper alloy (Ag500) and of the Copper–
Nickel alloy (Cu75Ni25) were determined by means of the stack compression test.
This test was chosen instead of the conventional tensile test due to its capability to
characterize material stress response to larger values of strain without necking [21].
The stack compression test was performed on multilayer cylinder specimens that
were assembled by piling up four circular disks with 15-mm-diameter machined out
of the coin blanks utilized in production. The tests were carried out at room tem-
perature on a hydraulic testing machine (Instron SATEC 1200 kN) with a crosshead
speed equal to 10 mm/min. The photograph included in Fig. 5 shows a multilayer
cylinder test specimen of Ag500 before and after compression.
The experimentally determined stress–strain curves of Ag500 and Cu75Ni25
and their approximation by means of the Ludwik–Hollomon’s strain hardening
model are shown in Fig. 5,
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
3 Coin Minting 93
Fig. 4 Industrial test cases utilized in numerical modeling and experimentation of the coin
minting process. a Ag500 collection coin dedicated to Portuguese architecture, b Cu75Ni25
collection coin dedicated to the age of iron and glass in Europe, and c Cu75Ni25 collection
dedicated to Portuguese Ethnography
www.TechnicalBooksPDF.com
94 P. Alexandrino et al.
Fig. 5 Stress–strain curves for the Silver–Copper (Ag500) and the Copper–Nickel (Cu75Ni25)
disk materials. Solid lines are the Ludwik–Hollomon’s approximation
This sections start by assessing the forces given by the industrial press with those
obtained in the hydraulic testing machine and follows with validation of finite
element predictions of the coin minting process with experimental observations and
measurements. The final part includes an example showing how finite element
predictions can be utilized to optimize the design of the dies before its fabrication.
The black solid circular markers in Fig. 6 are the maximum forces read in the
control panel of the industrial knuckle-joint press for the five compression disks
labeled as ‘1’ to ‘5’ in Table 2. The gray open diamond markers correspond to the
average force versus stroke evolution for the two disks labeled as ‘6’ and ‘7’ in
Table 2 obtained from continuous upset compression in the hydraulic testing
machine. As seen, the overall agreement is good and enables the utilization of the
forces measured by the industrial knuckle-joint press with minor corrections.
Finite element analysis of the upset compression of the disks also allows con-
cluding that the rough surface of the flat dies constrains material outward flow with
friction shear stresses corresponding to a friction factor m ffi 0:35 (refer to the black
dashed line in Fig. 6). This type of surface finishing was needed to ensure that upset
compression forces were in the range of coin minting forces because flat parallel
dies with typical surface finishing of that utilized in coin minting dies would only
be able to provide forces up to 300 kN (refer to the black open rectangular markers).
3 Coin Minting 97
Fig. 6 Force versus stroke results for the upset compression of disks between flat parallel dies
performed in the knuckle-joint press (KJP) and in the hydraulic testing machine (HTM). Finite
element (FEM) results are included for reference purposes
The numerical simulation of the coin minting process allows analyzing the filling of
the relief coin features before fabricating the dies and producing the coins. One of
the variables that can be used for this purpose is the finite element predicted
distribution of z-stress rz ¼ p (where p is the applied contact pressure) in the
obverse and reverse of the coins at different percentages of the total die stroke.
This is shown in Figs. 7 and 8 for the collection coins corresponding to
Portuguese architecture and to the age of iron and glass in Europe, respectively.
The dark red color in both figures corresponds to pressures close to zero and,
therefore, to regions of the coins that are not in contact with the dies. In contrast, the
other colors evolving from light red to dark blue correspond to increasing values of
the applied pressure and, therefore, to regions of the coins that are in contact with
the dies. In addition to this, the enclosed photographs in Figs. 7 and 8 allow
distinguishing the actual regions of the obverse and reverse of the coins that are in
contact with the dies (refer to the shiny surfaces) from those that are still free. The
agreement with the finite element predicted distribution of z-stress for the same
amount of die stroke is very good.
Other conclusions that may be drawn from the analysis of the z-stress are (i) the
detection of excessive lack of symmetry during coin minting and (ii) the identifi-
cation of the regions of the coin where contact starts. Ideally, contact should
develop as much symmetric as possible in order to minimize rigid body movements
and should initiate at the center of the coin and progressively evolve toward its
rimmed edge.
98 P. Alexandrino et al.
Fig. 8 Finite element predicted distribution of z-stress (MPa) at a 17%, b 35%, c 76%, d 85%,
e 94%, and f 100% of the total die stroke with photographs of the corresponding coin samples
(collection coin dedicated to the age of iron and glass in Europe)
100 P. Alexandrino et al.
The results shown in Fig. 7 allow concluding that contact develops with a
substantial lack of symmetry in the collection coin dedicated to Portuguese archi-
tecture. The top regions of both the obverse and reverse dies get in contact earlier
than the bottom regions because the coin contains significant profiles to be filled in
the bottom regions. Later, in Sect. 4.4, authors will explain how lack of symmetry
can be compensated.
The results shown in Fig. 8 allow concluding that contact initiates at the rimmed
edge of the disk. This is attributed to the flat edge profile of the reverse die and to
the large thickness of the disk edge.
Figure 9 presents the finite element predicted evolution of the force versus die
stroke and the actual forces measured in the industrial knuckle-joint press for the
collection coins dedicated to Portuguese architecture (Fig. 9a) and to the age of iron
and glass in Europe (Fig. 9b). The forces in the industrial knuckle-joint press were
measured for different values of die stroke and are plotted as open circular markers.
The force versus die stroke evolution pattern is typical of close die forging, but
coin minting requires high compression forces with relatively small die strokes. The
force is low until every surface of the disk is squeezed and material is trapped to
start filling the remaining and more intricate details in the dies (refer to ‘P1’ in
Fig. 9b). As the dies continue to close, the force increases sharply to ‘P2’ at which
the relief coin features are completely filled with sharp corners, well-defined fea-
tures, and a brilliant surface finish.
The last positions ‘P3’ are obtained for die strokes beyond needed and give rise
to localized plastic deformation of the tooling and to the production of coins with
final diameters slightly larger than that originally specified (30 mm). This situation
is shown in Fig. 10.
Figure 10 also reveals a good agreement between the finite element predicted
and the experimental evolution of the outside diameter of the disks with the die
stroke. The final difference to 30 mm (refer to the continuous and the dashed black
lines) is due to the tolerance bandwidth of the finite element contact algorithm
(0.03 mm per radius).
Coin minting processes with lack of contact symmetry can be optimized by cor-
recting the profile of the dies. In practical terms, the procedure consists of tilting the
obverse and reverse dies in order to guarantee that the center of die pressure is
located on the vertical symmetry line of the die.
3 Coin Minting 101
Fig. 9 Experimental and finite element predicted evolution of the force with die stroke for the
collection coins dedicated to a Portuguese architecture and to b the age of iron and glass in Europe
The procedure for correcting the die profile is performed for a die stroke cor-
responding (or very close) to the end of the coin minting process and involves the
following tasks to be carried out for each die:
(a) Calculate the point of application ðxr ; yr Þ of the resultant vertical force Fr for
the original die profile;
(b) Determine the maximum z-distance between the disk surface and the die profile
after some compression of the disk;
(c) Perform a first correction of the original die profile based on the maximum z-
distance that was determined in (b) and determine the corresponding new point
of application ðx1r ; y1r Þ of the resultant vertical force Fr1 ;
102 P. Alexandrino et al.
Fig. 10 Experimental and finite element predicted evolution of the outside diameter with die
stroke for the collection coins dedicated to the age of iron and glass in Europe
(d) Interpolate the second correction of the original die profile in order to ensure
that the new point of application ðx2r ; y2r Þ of the resultant vertical force Fr2 move
toward the center ð0; 0Þ;
(e) Repeat (c) and (d) using additional correction values until ðxm r ; yr Þ ffi ð0; 0Þ,
m
where Fji is the vertical force of a nodal point j with coordinates ðxij ; yij ; zij Þ located
on the surface of the disk in contact with the die after correction i of the original die
profile, and n is the total number of nodal points located on the surface of the disk in
contact with the die.
The resultant vertical force Fri after correction i is determined from
X
n
Fri ¼ Fji ð13Þ
j¼1
Regarding the determination of the maximum z-distance between the disk sur-
face and the die profile required by the above-mentioned procedure (refer to task b),
3 Coin Minting 103
it may be claimed that it could be directly obtained from the z-differences in height
for each die profile. However, it is better to determine this distance after some
amount of die stroke because material flow arising from the initial contact (espe-
cially in the rimmed edge) will lead to a better estimate.
In what concerns the collection coin dedicated to Portuguese ethnography, the
z-distance between the disk surfaces and the dies was determined for a die stroke
corresponding to location ‘P’ in Fig. 11.
Figure 12 shows the corresponding contact/no-contact distribution plotted as
‘1—dark red’ and ‘0—dark blue’ (Fig. 12a), and the distribution of the distances
between the disk surface and the obverse and reverse dies (Fig. 12b).
The maximum z-distances to the obverse and reverse dies for a die stroke
corresponding to location ‘P’ in Fig. 11 were identified as 0.16 mm and 0.14 mm
(Fig. 12b). So, by taking into account that the tolerance bandwidth of the finite
element contact algorithm was set to 0.04 mm, and it was decided to tilt the obverse
and reverse dies by 0.12 mm and 0.10 mm exclusively in the y-direction as a first
attempt to correct the die profile. The tilting procedure is schematically shown in
the cross-sectional details of the dies that are included in Fig. 13.
Figure 14 shows the results of the above-mentioned procedure for correcting the
die profile after two correction attempts performed in the y-direction. As shown in
Fig. 14a, the point of application ðxr ; yr Þ of the resultant vertical force Fr reduces
the misalignment in the y-direction from 0.9 to 0.3 mm after performing the second
correction attempt of the die profile.
The value of the second correction of the reverse die profile was obtained by
interpolation. Figure 14b shows the procedure and the resulting value of 0.05 mm.
A similar procedure applied to the obverse die profile (not shown in the figure) gave
an interpolated correction value of 0.06 mm.
Fig. 11 Finite element predicted evolution of the force with die stroke for the collection coin
dedicated to Portuguese ethnography
104 P. Alexandrino et al.
Fig. 12 Finite element estimates of the a contact/no-contact distribution and of b the z-distances
(mm) between the surfaces of the disk and the obverse and reverse dies for a die stroke
corresponding to point ‘P’ in Fig. 11. The collection coin dedicated to Portuguese ethnography is
shown in (c) for reference purposes
Fig. 13 Cross section of the reverse and obverse dies showing the first correction in the y-
direction of the coin. Values in (mm)
the bending moment M applied in both dies is reduced from (in the original
profiles),
M ¼ Mx~ ey ¼ 1008 ~
ex þ My~ ex þ 204 ~
ey Nm ð14Þ
M ¼ Mx~ ey ¼ 132 ~
ex þ My~ ex þ 24 ~
ey Nm ð15Þ
As a result of this, the bending moment applied in the dies with corrected
profiles is 10 times smaller than the bending moment applied in the original dies
resulting from the clay models supplied by the sculptor.
To conclude, Fig. 15 presents a comparison of the finite element predicted
distribution of z-stress for the original and final corrected die profiles for a die
stroke corresponding to 1200 kN (close to the end of coin minting). As seen, the
corrected die profile resulting from the above-mentioned procedure improves the
overall symmetry of the coin minting process.
106 P. Alexandrino et al.
Fig. 14 Correction of the die profile. a x, y position of the resultant vertical force in the reverse
and obverse dies after two profile correction attempts in the y-direction. b Schematic representation
of the interpolation procedure that was utilized to determine the second profile correction of the
reverse die in the y-direction
The reduction of the bending moment M applied in both dies with corrected
profiles extends their service life and facilitates the filling of the relief coin features.
The pressure peaks are also lower in case of the corrected die profile of Fig. 15b. In
fact, the maximum z-stress is reduced from −3100 MPa (in the original die profiles,
Fig. 15a) to −2840 MPa (in the corrected die profiles, Fig. 15b).
3 Coin Minting 107
Fig. 15 Finite element predicted distribution of z-stress (MPa) at the end of the coining process
for the a original die and for b corrected die profile (collection coin dedicated to Portuguese
ethnography)
5 Conclusions
The first part of this chapter presents a state-of-the-art review of the application of
analytical and numerical methods to the coin minting process. Special attention was
paid to recent developments in the utilization of finite element computer programs
based on quasi-static formulations with implicit solution schemes and dynamic
formulations with explicit solution schemes.
Then, by centering the presentation on the assessment of the accuracy and
reliability of finite element predictions in coin minting, the chapter entails a com-
prehensive description of the ongoing developments made by the authors in col-
laboration with Portuguese Mint. These comprise the independent determination of
the stress–strain curves by means of stack compression tests on multilayer cylinder
108 P. Alexandrino et al.
specimens that are assembled by piling up circular disks machined out of the coin
blanks utilized in production, the verification of the coin minting forces measured in
an industrial knuckle-joint press, and the comparison between finite element pre-
dictions and experimental results and observations of the coin minting forces and of
the filling of the relief coin features.
Finite element modeling was carried out in a special purpose software based on
the in-house three-dimensional computer program I-form, and experimentation
made use of three collection coins dedicated to dedicated to Portuguese architecture
(Ag500), to the age of iron and glass in Europe (Cu75Ni25), and to Portuguese
Ethnography (Cu75Ni25).
The overall results, with special emphasis to those related to the correction of die
curvatures, demonstrate that finite elements can be utilized to foster the relationship
between artists who create the modulated reliefs of the coins and technicians and
engineers who fabricate the dies and industrialize the process with the objective of
minimizing defects, optimizing shapes, and reducing tryouts.
Questions
1. Which are the main components of a coin minting system?
Answer: The obverse and reverse dies, the collar (also known as side ring) and
the disk (also known as coin blank).
2. Why is the stack compression test adequate to determine the stress–strain curve
of the materials utilized in coin minting?
Answer: Until recently, Mints fabricated their own coin blanks by cutting them
out from metal sheets. Because, nowadays, coin blanks are supplied by
third-party manufacturers; it is more difficult for a Mint to cut out tensile test
specimens from the original metal sheets.
Under these circumstances, it is easier for a Mint to assemble compression test
specimens by piling up disks cut out from the coin blanks and to determine the
stress–strain curve of the materials by means of stack compression tests.
And, most important, stack compression tests also allow determining the stress–
strain curve of the materials for values of strain above those commonly reached
in tension tests due to the avoidance of necking.
3. Consider the production of a coin with 30 mm diameter and 1.6 mm thickness
made from a Copper–Nickel alloy Cu75Ni25. The tensile strength of the
material rR ¼ 359 MPa.
(a) Calculate the average contact pressure pavg during the initial stage of
deformation when there is no contact between the disk and the collar (side
ring). Assume the diameter of the disk at this stage to be approximately
equal to 29.8 mm and the friction coefficient l ¼ 0:15
Answer : pavg ¼ 693:3 MPa
(b) Calculate the average contact pressure pavg at the end of the coin minting
process. Assume Qf ¼ 5.
3 Coin Minting 109
Glossary
Coin minting A net-shape metal forming processes in which a disk (coin blank) is
compressed between two dies while it is being retained and positioned by a
110 P. Alexandrino et al.
collar (side ring) with the objective of producing well-defined imprints of the
dies in its opposite faces.
Finite element method The governing equations of engineering problems solved
by the finite element method are typically formulated by partial differential
equations in their original form. These are rewritten into a weak form, such that
domain integration can be utilized to satisfy the governing equations in an
average sense. The domain integration is solved numerically and approximated
by a summation over a number of elements utilized for discretizing the domain.
Force–displacement curve A graphical representation showing the evolution of
the compression force with the die stroke.
Knuckle-joint press A special press design very appropriate for coin minting in
which the connecting rod driven by the eccentric actuates a knuckle-joint system
in order to provide a short stroke length and high load capacity.
Stack compression test An alternative experimental procedure for evaluating the
stress–strain curve of raw materials. The test makes use of circular disks that are
cut out of the coin blanks and stacked to form a cylindrical specimen with an
aspect ratio in the range of solid cylinders commonly employed in the con-
ventional compression test.
Stress–strain curve A graphical representation showing the stress response of a
material and the corresponding deformation (strain).
Tool system The main components of a coin minting tool system are the obverse
and reverse dies and the collar (also known as side ring).
Acknowledgements Luis Alves and Paulo Martins would like to acknowledge the support
provided by the Portuguese Mint (Imprensa Nacional Casa da Moeda) and IDMEC under
LAETA-UID/EMS/50022/2013.
The authors would also like to acknowledge the technical assistance of Elisabete Novais and
Nuno Caetano from Imprensa Nacional Casa da Moeda.
The support of Dr. Silvia Garcia and Dr. Alcides Gama from Imprensa Nacional Casa da Moeda
is also acknowledged.
References
1. Bocharov, Y., Kobayashi, S., & Thomsen, E. G. (1962). The mechanics of the coining
process. Journal of Engineering for Industry—Transactions ASME, 84, 491–501.
2. Bay, N., & Wanheim, T. (1976). Real area of contact between a rough tool and a smooth
workpiece at high normal pressures. Wear, 38, 225–234.
3. Kiran, C., & Shaw, M. C. (1983). Coining. Annals of CIRP, 32, 151–154.
4. Delamare, F., & Montmitonnet, P. (1984). Mechanical analysis of coin striking: Application
to the study of byzantine gold solidi minted in Constantinople and Carthage. Journal of
Mechanical Working Technology, 10, 253–271.
3 Coin Minting 111
K. Wu B. Wu C. Li X. Hu (&)
Institute of Tribology, School of Mechanical Engineering,
Hefei University of Technology, Hefei 230009, China
e-mail: [email protected]
1 Introduction
Diamond is of a solid network structure (Fig. 1). The primary particle size of
nanodiamond particles is around 7–10 nm. Nanodiamond has several advantages
such as high hardness, attractive optical, high thermal conductivity, high wear
resistance, excellent chemical stability, and favorable biocompatibility, which are
not equipped to most other nanoparticles [3, 6, 15, 20, 32, 34]. These properties
would facilitate its use in some potential applications including abrasive pastes and
suspensions for high precision polishing [6], nanofluids for thermal conduction [5,
28], and nanodiamond–polymer composites for wear-resistant surface coatings,
thermal conduction coatings, and transparent coatings [6, 8–10, 28]. However, the
nanodiamond particles are of large specific surface and high surface area, as well as
in thermodynamically unstable state, which makes it easy to agglomerate and forms
larger particles, and present micrometer size. Nanodiamonds cannot effectively play
its unique function in real application due to its agglomeration.
The tribological behavior of nanometric diamond has been studied widely and
deeply in recent years. Shen et al. [29] conducted a research on the tribological
properties of ultrafine diamond powder additives by the principle of relative light
intensity. The results showed that, in the film lubrication region, the thickening of
the mixed oil film was caused by the increase of the adhesion of the spherical
nanodiamond particles, and the microrolling effect caused the friction force to be
decreased. The friction process is the process of continuous dispersion and
aggregation of diamond particles with time effects. Elomaa et al. [7] compared the
tribological properties of uniformly distributed and agglomerated nanocrystalline
diamond on the contact surface of steel. It was found that the wear rate of
agglomerated nanodiamond was lower than that of uniform distribution. The pos-
sible cause was that the diamond enters the friction film and reduced the friction and
wear. Chou and Lee [1] studied the tribological behavior of nanodiamond dispersed
in lubricating oils on the effect of carbon steel and aluminum alloy. The reason that
reducing the wear of aluminum alloy is mainly due to the change in oil viscosity,
the reason for reducing the wear of the carbon steel is not only due to the change of
oil viscosity, but also the embedding of the diamond causes a change in the
roughness of the contact surface. Kim et al. [14] studied the lubricating properties
of nanodiamond dispersed in liquid paraffin. It is considered that the octagonal
structure of nanodiamond is similar to spherical feature, and the rolling ball action
reduces the friction coefficient, and the high thermal conductivity increases the wear
life. Lee et al. [17] treated the nanodiamond with oleic acid, and the obtained
nanodiamond was dispersed in oil with a stable state for more than 10 days.
Moreover, the tribological experiments showed that nanodiamond with an optimal
addition of 0.05 wt% could be provided with a significant reduction in the friction
coefficient and low wear.
In general, it can be realized that the lubrication mechanism of nanometric
diamond as a lubricant additive is various under different conditions. The dispersion
state and stability in lubricating oil have important influence on their tribological
behavior. Therefore, a stable dispersion state is an important prerequisite for the
development of better anti-wear and anti-friction properties.
Nanodiamond is of high surface energy and specific surface area and can be easily
agglomerated into micron size particles. Therefore, the precondition of the dis-
persion is to prevent aggregation and reduce the particle size. The most effective
way to solve the agglomerate problem and improve the dispersibility of nanodia-
mond is to modify the nanodiamond surface. The surface modification of nanodi-
amond refers to the action of surface active agents which can cause chemical
reaction or physical action on the nanodiamond surface, thus changing its surface
state and improving dispersibility. The methods of surface modification of nan-
odiamond include surface coating, surface chemical, mechanochemical.
Surface coating modification is to make surface modifiers adsorb on the surface
of particles and form a stable adsorption layer with a certain thickness, which result
in a strong repulsion due to steric effect. On the one hand, the mutual repulsion
between particles is increased by increasing the absolute value of the surface
potential of particles. On the other hand, by enhancing the wettability of the
medium, the surface solvation membrane force between the particles is increased
and the repulsion force is increased, which make agglomeration between particles
extremely difficult. Surface modification process is usually co-operated with
ultrasonic method together. Although the process is simple and workable, there it
maybe lead to some problems in the application of nanodiamond particles in
lubricating oils. For instance, it is difficult to get a better dispersion effect. At the
same time, the agglomerated particles size is also relatively large and easy to be
deposited. In addition the type, dosage and usage of surface modifiers will have a
great impact on the application of products.
Surface chemical modification is achieved by chemical reaction or adsorption of
the particle surface and surface modifier. One of the most effective ways of surface
chemical modification is that the surface of nanodiamond is grafted with different
functional groups, so as to achieve the purpose of modification. The effect of this
method will be more obvious compared with the modified method of surface
coating. The aggregation size of nanodiamond decreased significantly, and the
stability and dispersion time in the solution lasted for a long time. However, this
method was only suitable for the diamond with relatively initial small average
particle size.
Mechanochemical modification refers to the surface activation of powders by
ultrafine grinding and other mechanical forces. The crystal structure, chemical
adsorption, and reaction activity of the particle surface undergo a certain degree of
change to cause the particles to take a reaction or adhesion each other for the
purpose of surface modification. Compared with surface coating modification,
mechanical-chemical modification may lead to better dispersion effect. Because it
combines the mechanical action with chemical force acting on the agglomerated
nanodiamond particles, it then modifies the nanodiamond particles surface by
reducing the combination among agglomerated nanodiamond particles.
118 K. Wu et al.
3.2 Experiment
In our experiment, the method of acid treatment combined with heat treatment at
high temperature is employed to achieve the agglomeration of nanometric diamond
particles to obtain smaller particle size. With further treatment of surfactant, a stable
dispersion system of nanometric diamond and hydraulic oil was obtained. The
specific steps to be taken in the experiment are as follows.
Nanodiamond was added into the solution of sulfuric acid and nitric acid (3:1 in
volume), and then heated and stirred to ensure them oxidation sufficiently. The
process was employed to exert a remarkable oxidation effect on nanodiamond due
to the strong oxidizing property of the mixed acid of sulfuric acid and nitric acid. In
order to remove the residual acid on the nanodiamond surface, the mixture was
filtered and the obtained solid was washed with excess amounts of distilled water
until the filtration pH reached about 7. The final product was obtained and then
marked as ND-1 after drying at 50 °C.
Next, the obtained nanodiamond (ND-1) was treated at high temperature. The
treatment procedures included as follows: ND-1 powder was heated at 600 °C
under the flowing air atmosphere inside a high-temperature tube furnace for several
hours, and the obtained final product was marked as ND-2. The role of
high-temperature treatment was that the particle size of nanodiamond was
decreased and the agglomeration tendency was achieved. On the other hand, the
surface functional groups of nanodiamond were purified by high-temperature oxi-
dation, and the rich oxygen functional groups were prepared for further modifica-
tion and dispersion. Before ND-2 was dispersed in the lubricant, surfactant like
oleylamine was selected to treat ND-2. After the completion of nanodiamond
treated with surfactant, the lipophilic nanodiamond was obtained and marked as
ND-3. Finally, ND-3 as additive was added in the hydraulic oil with a stable and
homogeneous system.
3.3 Characterization
In order to know the modification effect and the dispersing mechanism of nan-
odiamond clearly, the raw ND particles and modified ND particles were charac-
terized using the following methods.
In order to view the size and agglomeration of nanometric diamond, the micro-
morphology was observed by high-resolution field-emission electron microscope
(SEM, Hitachi, SU8020).
4 Gradation, Dispersion, and Tribological Behaviors of Nanometric … 119
Figures 2 and 3 show the SEM images of raw and treated nanometric diamond
(ND-2) particles, respectively. The raw nanometric diamond and the treated
nanometric diamond were observed and compared clearly as using the magnifica-
tion of 30 thousand times. The raw nanometric diamond (Fig. 2) was exhibited with
larger size and uneven distribution due to agglomeration. Compared with the raw
nanometric diamond, the degree of agglomeration of the treated nanometric dia-
mond (Fig. 3) is reduced, and the particle size of the nanometric diamond becomes
smaller, and the particle size and morphology became more uniform.
Figure 4 shows the particle size distributions of the untreated NDs and treated NDs
measured by Zeta potentiometer (Nano-ZS90, Malvern UK). The particle size of the
raw NDs was distributed from 200 to 700 nm with an average size of 418.0 nm,
which resulted from severe aggregation of the primary nanoparticles.
Intensity (%)
20
15
10
5 Mean Size:418.0nm
0
0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000
Size (d.nm)
25
(b)
20
Intensity (%)
15
10
5
Mean Size:102.6 nm
0
It was clearly demonstrated from Fig. 4b that after acid and heat treatment, the
ND aggregates were broken into smaller sized particles in the range from 60 to
200 nm and the average particle diameter of the treated NDs decreased to
102.6 nm. This indicates that the acid and heat treatment together are highly
effective in breaking down the ND aggregates into smaller sized particles, which
results in the size of diamond has been reduced obviously.
Figure 5 shows the FTIR spectra of raw ND, ND-2, ND-3, respectively. FTIR
spectrum of raw ND (Fig. 1a) displayed a relatively weak C–O stretching band at
1092 cm−1, C=O stretching vibration band at 1773 cm−1, and O–H stretching band
at 3439 cm−1, implying the existence of carbonyl and hydroxyl groups on ND
surface. Another broad absorption band at 1630 cm−1 was attributed to the –OH
deformation vibration of absorbed water. A weak absorption band at 2932 cm−1
belonged to C–H asymmetry stretching vibration.
4 Gradation, Dispersion, and Tribological Behaviors of Nanometric … 121
Transmittance / %
80 vC=O
(c) δO-H
60
δC-H
40 vasC-H
vO-H
20
vC-O
0
4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500
Wavenumber / cm-1
After a strong acid oxidation and high-temperature treatment, the FTIR spectrum
of nanodiamond (ND-2) was shown in Fig. 5b. The weak peaks of the intermediate
position of 1700–2800 cm−1 disappear obviously, which indicated that some
impurity groups were removed on the diamond surface after treatment. Moreover,
the peaks of oxygen functional groups of C–O and O–H at 1092 and 3439 cm−1
were enhanced evidently. It reveals that the amount of surface oxygen groups
increases, which indicates that the modification of the surface oxidation of nan-
odiamond has been achieved. The appearance of C–H stretching band at 1462 cm−1
and the stronger absorption peaks of asymmetric stretching vibration of hydrocar-
bon group at 2932 cm−1 implied the hydrogen bonds or oxygen bridge bonds
totally to be destroyed under high-temperature condition. Apparently, the surface of
nanodiamond particles was adsorbed with oxygen active groups, hydroxyl groups,
carboxyl groups, ether groups, carbonyl groups, and ester groups and the existence
of these surface groups provided the possibility for dispersing diamond nanopar-
ticles in the medium [11, 22, 35].
Figure 5c shows the FTIR of ND-3 obtained by further treatment with dispersant
to ND-2. The peak strengths of C–O stretching band at 1092 cm−1, C–H bending
in-plane vibration at 1462 cm−1, C–H stretching band at 2932 cm−1, and O–H
stretching band at 3439 cm−1 were further strengthened sharply, which was
observed that the surface of final modified nanodiamond with rich functional groups.
X-ray diffraction (XRD, D/MAX2500V Japan) was used to analyze the diamond
before and after treatment. The result was shown in Fig. 6.
The powder XRD pattern of raw ND was shown in Fig. 6a. It was clear that the
raw nanodiamond peaks of ND were more obvious. These patterns present crys-
talline planes of (111) and (220) with 2h of 43.69° and 75.36°, respectively [31],
and confirmed the presence the active structure. Besides, there was a small weak
122 K. Wu et al.
CPS
(b)
(c)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
2θ/°
peak representing graphite diffraction peaks of (002) with 2h of 26°. After acid
treatment, the XRD pattern of ND-2 was shown in Fig. 6b. The characteristic peaks
of nanodiamond (ND-1) remained without any change, but graphite diffraction
peaks of (002) became slightly stronger than before, and a little peak of impurity
occurred at about 25°. It illustrated that the degree of surface graphitization
increased by treating diamond with acid. After further heat treatment of ND-1, the
XRD pattern of ND-2 was shown in Fig. 6c. The peak of graphite carbon (002) was
more obvious than ND-1. It indicates that the high-temperature treatment further
alters the graphite carbon on the crystal surface of nanodiamond.
Both experiments of the centrifugal stability and the static stability were selected to
investigate in order to observe the dispersion stability of modified nanodiamond in
32# hydraulic oil. The suspension system of 0.1 wt% nanodiamond in 32# hydraulic
oil was put into the 10 ml centrifugal tube. Then, the high-speed centrifuge was
used to test centrifugal stability of the suspension system at 3000 rpm and
4000 rpm, respectively. After 10-min centrifugation, the bottom precipitation was
shown in Fig. 7. It can be seen that there is no any precipitates at the bottom under
3000 rpm and 4000 rpm centrifugation for 10 min. The results show that the
suspension system of hydraulic oil with nanodiamond has excellent centrifugal
stability.
In addition, the suspension system of 0.1 wt% nanodiamond in hydraulic oil was
stored in the test tube and observed at the bottom of test tube for a long period, as
shown in Fig. 8. It was found that the modified nanodiamond was dispersed in
hydraulic oil well and could exist stably for 120 days. Obviously, the results prove
that the suspension system of nanodiamond and hydraulic oil has a high-degree
4 Gradation, Dispersion, and Tribological Behaviors of Nanometric … 123
static stability. Due to the modification of nanodiamond, the particle size decreased
and the oxygen functional groups increased, which was beneficial to disperse in the
oily medium [21]. What’s more, the surfactant can be adsorbed on the surface of
nanodiamond particles to form steric hindrance and prevents it from aggregation.
Generally, these favorable conditions make nanodiamond achieve a state of good
dispersion in lubricating oil.
4.1 Tribometer
A MQ-800-type four-ball tester was used for this experiment. All the balls were
washed with petroleum ether and then blow dry with a blower. Three stationary
balls were fixed in a steel cup, and 10 ml of test oil was poured on the cup. The
three balls were covered with the test oil, with a depth of 3 mm covering the ball
surface. Another ball, which was adjusted with a collet, was rotated around these
stationary balls. Figure 9 shows the schematic diagram of the four-ball tribometer.
The effects of modified nanodiamond with different additions on the tribological
properties of 32# anti-wear hydraulic oil provided by Anhui Runpu Nanometer
Scientific Co. Scientific Company were carried out in this experiment. Before the
friction test, ultrasonic cleaning of the steel ball and oil box used in the experiment
was carried out in the petroleum ether. The experimental conditions are as follows:
load 392 N, rotational speed 1450 r/min, duration 30 min, and test temperature
25 °C. The material of the four balls is AISI E52100 (u12.7 mm, provided by
Sinopec Research Institute of Petroleum Processing). After the four-ball test was
completed, the wear scar diameter of the stationary balls was measured by an
optical microscope. The friction coefficient is automatically generated.
4.2 Results
The friction and wear properties of modified nanodiamond lubricating oil added
with a rate of 0, 0.02, 0.04, 0.06, 0.08, and 0.1 wt% were studied, respectively. The
results are shown in Figs. 10 and 11.
As shown in Fig. 10, the average friction coefficient of pure hydraulic oil is the
highest. When the diamond nanoparticles with different amounts are added,
4 Gradation, Dispersion, and Tribological Behaviors of Nanometric … 125
0.085
0.080
0.075
0% 0.02% 0.04% 0.06% 0.08% 0.1%
Addition concentration of nanodiamond / wt%
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0% 0.02% 0.04% 0.06% 0.08% 0.1%
Addition concention of nanodiamond / wt%
126 K. Wu et al.
Fig. 12 Surface topography of the worn surface of the lower ball lubricated with 32# hydraulic oil
containing different additions of nanodiamond
higher concentration of nanodiamond may cause reduce the anti-wear ability of oil.
The corresponding detailed topography taken by 3D surface profilometer was
shown in Fig. 12 in order to show the wear scar directly.
4 Gradation, Dispersion, and Tribological Behaviors of Nanometric … 127
Figure 13 shows the SEM micrographs of the wear zones of the upper ball and the
corresponding energy-dispersive spectrometry analysis. The worn surface area was
shown in Fig. 13a for the pure hydraulic oil. It can be seen that the worn surface
furrows are revealed obviously, which exposes the main form of wear is abrasive
wear. The content of characteristic elements in the worn surface was analyzed by
EDS (Fig. 13a). The content of C element on the worn zones is less, and a part of
the C element comes mainly from the friction pairs, and partly from hydrocarbons
in the lubricant.
As shown in Fig. 13b, when the 0.04 wt% nanodiamond was added to the
hydraulic fluid, the worn surface was relatively smooth and taken on a shallower
furrow. EDS result showed that the proportion of C elements on the worn surface
was 3.19%, which was slightly higher than lubricant without nanodiamond. This
may be because the particles are smaller or the smaller particles occupy a higher
proportion when the nanodiamond added by 0.04 wt%. Since the surface roughness
caused by friction increases, the nanodiamond with smaller particle size partially
filled and repaired the concave and convex surfaces of the friction pairs, thus
reducing the surface roughness and improving the hardness of the contact surface of
the contact pair [2]. Besides, another part of nanodiamonds forms ball rolling
between the friction surfaces, thereby reducing friction and wear between the
friction pairs [14, 24, 29, 37].
It is shown in Fig. 13c that when the concentration of nanodiamond added to
hydraulic oil is increased to 0.1 wt%, the wear zones is no longer smooth, and the
deep furrow appeared. Furthermore, both abrasive and adhesive wear modes were
observed at the wear track edges, and there were a few spalling pits on the local
area. EDS results showed that the proportion of C elements on the surface of the
wear zones increased to 7.92%. The reason may be that the concentration of
nanodiamond is too high. Consequently, the occurrence of particle agglomeration
results in the decrease of the rolling effect and the decreases of friction resistance of
lubricant. On the other hand, a portion of the nanodiamond and the abrasive are
agglomerated to form hard particles during the rubbing process, embedded in the
friction pairs, and form a furrow effect.
128 K. Wu et al.
(a) 0wt%
(b) 0.04wt%
(c) 0.1wt%
Fig. 13 SEM images of the wear zones of upper ball and the corresponding energy-dispersive
spectrometry analysis
The Raman analysis is very predominant analysis for carbon material. Since the
friction pairs, lubricating oil, and nanodiamond contain carbon elements, the Raman
analysis is performed for wear zones of the upper ball lubricated with hydraulic oil
containing 0, 0.04, and 0.1 wt% addition of nanodiamond, respectively.
4 Gradation, Dispersion, and Tribological Behaviors of Nanometric … 129
Intensity/a.u.
b 0.04 wt%, c 0.1 wt%
1590
100
50
The results are shown in Fig. 14. The sharp peaks at 1318 and 1590 cm−1 refer
to D band and G band of ND, which are attributed to the vibration of the disordered
sp3—hybridized carbon and the in-plane vibrations of the sp2—bonded carbon,
respectively [16, 26]. The ID/IG ratio of the two peak strengths reflects the degree of
graphite ordering of the carbon material. The graphitization degree of the material
becomes higher with the ID/IG ratio decreasing.
Also from Fig. 14, as the addition of nanodiamond increased from 0 wt% to 0.1
wt%, it caused a decrease of D band intensity. It can be known that the ID/IG ratios
of 0.04 wt% and 0.1 wt% additions are 1.51 and 0.99, respectively, which are
smaller than the ratio (ID/IG = 1.75) of 0 wt%. This indicates that the graphitization
degree of the wear zones surface becomes high with increasing the concentration of
nanodiamond. The Raman studies showed the structural ordering of wear zones
surface in graphite-like phase as the nanodiamond addition increased.
5 Conclusion
The size of the modified nanometric diamond powder treated by strong acid and
high-temperature oxidation was reduced obviously, and the surface functional
group numbers of the powder were also increased, and the steric hindrance effect
was easy to be formed in the lubricating oil, which provided favorable conditions to
show excellent stability and dispersion. As the modified nanometric diamond was
added in hydraulic oil with a rate of 0.04 wt%, the anti-wear and friction reduction
of hydraulic oil were significantly improved, the average scar diameter decreased
by 17.8%, and the average friction coefficient decreased by 13.8%. The lubricating
mechanism was considered that smaller ND particles with an optimum concen-
tration filled into the rubbing interfaces and repaired the rough surfaces of the
friction pairs, and reduced the surface roughness and improved the hardness of the
contact surface of tribo-pair. Meanwhile, the action of rolling balls of nanometric
130 K. Wu et al.
diamond was produced between the rubbing surfaces to reduce friction and wear.
The Raman studies showed the structural ordering of wear zones surface in
graphite-like phase as the addition of nanometric diamond increased.
Acknowledgements This work was supported by the National Natural Science Foundation of
China (Grant No. 51675153).
Glossary
Abrasive wear The wear caused by the act of extruding or moving along the
surface of a solid surface by hard particles or rigid bodies. The wear caused by
the hard particles or hard body on the solid surface extrusion and along the
surface movement.
Ploughing The softer surface of the two surface of the relative motion results in
groove damage due to plastic deformation.
Graphitization Graphitization refers to the orderly transformation of carbon atoms
which are thermodynamically unstable from disordered structure to graphite
crystal structure.
References
16. Krüger, A., Liang, Y., Jarry, G., & Stegk, J. (2006). Surface functionalisation of detonation
diamond suitable for biological applications. Journal of Materials Chemistry, 16(24),
2322–2328.
17. Lee, G. J., Park, J. J., Lee, M. K., & Rhee, C. K. (2017). Stable dispersion of nanodiamonds in
oil and their tribological properties as lubricant additives. Applied Surface Science, 415,
24–27.
18. Liu, W. M., Xu, J., Feng, D. P., & Wang, X. P. (2013). The research status and prospect
synthetic lubricating oils. Tribology, 33(1), 91–104.
19. Michail, I. G., Pavlyshko, V. S., Ivanov, D. M., Petrov, I., McGuire, G., & Shenderova, O.
(2009). Nanodiamonds particles as additives in lubricants. MRS Proceedings, 1203, 89–94.
20. Mochalin, V. N., & Gogotsi, Y. (2015). Nanodiamond–polymer composites. Diamond and
Related Materials, 58, 161–171.
21. Motahari, H., & Spectroscopic, Malekfar R. (2017). Investigation for purity evaluation of
detonation nanodiamonds: experimental approach in absorbance and scattering. Journal of
Cluster Science, 28(4), 1923–1935.
22. Mou, G. J., & Zhao, B. (2004). Research advances of inorganic nano additives in lubricating
oil. Lubricating Oil, 19(1), 59–61.
23. Neville, A., Morina, A., Haque, T., & Voong, M. (2007). Compatibility between tribological
surfaces and lubricant additives—How friction and wear reduction can be controlled by
surface/lube synergies. Tribology International, 39(10), 1680–1695.
24. Novak, C., Kingman, D., Stern, K., Zou, Q., & Gara, L. (2014). Tribological properties of
paraffinic oil with nanodiamond particles. Tribology Transactions, 57(5), 831–837.
25. Nunn, N., Torelli, M., McGuire, G., & Shenderova, O. (2017). Nanodiamond: A high impact
nanomaterial. Current Opinion in Solid State and Materials Science, 21(1), 1–9.
26. Osswald, S., Yushin, G., Mochalin, V., Kucheyev, S. O., & Gogotsi, Y. (2006). Control of
sp2/sp3 carbon ratio and surface chemistry of nanodiamond powders by selective oxidation in
air. Journal of the American Chemical Society, 128(35), 11635–11642.
27. Puzyr, A. P., Selyutin, G. E., Vorobyov, V. B., & Fedorova, E. N. (2006). Prospects for
detonation nanodiamonds with colloidal stability in the technical field. Nanotechnique, 4,
96–105.
28. Red’Kin, V. E. (2004). Lubricants with Ultradisperse diamond–graphite powder. Chemistry
and Technology of Fuels and Oils, 40(3), 164–170.
29. Shen, M. Z., Luo, J. B., & Wen, S. Z. (2001). Influence of diamond nano-particles on the
tribological properties. Chinese Journal of Mechanical Engineering, 37(1), 14–16.
30. Shi, P. J., Xu, Y., & Xu, B. S. (2006). Application of nano friction-reducing lubricant on
engine. Lubrication Engineering-Huangpu, 7, 73–76.
31. Sundar, L. S., & Singh, M. K. (2016). Experimental thermal conductivity and viscosity of
nanodiamond-based propylene glycol and water mixtures. Diamond and Related Materials,
69, 49–60.
32. Taylor, A. C., Edgington, R., & Jackman, R. B. (2015). Patterning of nanodiamond tracks and
nanocrystalline diamond films using a micropipette for additive direct-write processing. ACS
Applied Materials & Interfaces, 7(12), 6490–6495.
33. Wang, F. F., Zhang, L. Q., Peng, J., & Zhou, W. J. (2015). Research progress in
nano-diamond surface modification. Superhard Material Engineering, 27(3), 36–39.
34. Xie, H., Yu, W., Li, Y., & Chen, L. (2011). Discussion on the thermal conductivity
enhancement of nanofluids. Nanoscale Research Letters, 6(1), 1–12.
35. Yang, C. J., Chen, G. X., & Zhao, L. T. (2009). Research progress of soft metal nanoparticles
as self-repairing lubricating oil additive. Lubrication Engineering, 34(5), 115–117.
36. Zhang, D., Hu, X. G., Tong, Y., & Hung, F. (2006). The research development of
nanodiamond as a lubricating additives. Lubricating Oil, 21(1), 50–54.
37. Zhang, J. X., Liu, K., & Hu, X. G. (2002). Effect of ultra-dispersed diamond nanoparticles as
additive on the tribological properties of 15W30 engine oil. Tribology, 22(1), 44–48.
Part II
Thermal Engineering
Chapter 5
Basics and Applications of Thermal
Engineering
Abstract This chapter presents the basics of three major topics of thermal engi-
neering, viz. fluid mechanics, heat transfer, and thermodynamics. The three main
parts of fluid mechanics, viz. fluid statics, kinematics, and dynamics, are summa-
rized. The three modes of heat transfer, conduction, convection, and radiation, are
briefly explained with examples. Finally, the basics of thermodynamics are pre-
sented in detail. The important thermodynamic properties and laws of thermody-
namics are introduced. Energy and exergy balances for thermodynamic systems are
discussed. Some application areas of thermal engineering are highlighted.
Keywords Fluid mechanics Fluid kinematics Fluid dynamics
Irrotational flow Laminar flow Turbulent flow Conduction
Convection Radiation Entropy Exergy Energy Open system
Closed system Temperature
1 Introduction
T. K. Gogoi
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Tezpur University, Tezpur, India
U. S. Dixit (&)
Department of Mechanical Engineering, IIT Guwahati, Guwahati, India
e-mail: [email protected]
some form of energy conversion takes place inside the body cells. Thermal comfort in
human body is maintained through metabolic heat rejection. To adjust heat transfer
rate from our body with changing climatic condition, people wear different types of
clothes in different seasons. Industrial thermal systems include automotive engines,
jet engines, rockets, power plants, refrigeration and air-conditioning plants, refiner-
ies, chemical processing plants, food processing and preservation units, and manu-
facturing industries. Among these, the automotive engines, jet propulsion engines,
and thermal power plants involve conversion of energy in fossil fuels for getting the
useful work. Figure 1 shows some common examples of the thermal systems.
2 Fluid Mechanics
Fluid mechanics is the study of fluids and their properties in static as well as moving
condition. Fluids include liquids and gases. Fluid mechanics consists of three parts
—fluid statics, fluid kinematics, and fluid kinetics. Study of fluid behavior at rest is
called fluid statics (also known as hydrostatics), while fluid kinematics and kinetics
deal with the study of fluid behavior in motion.
By definition, a fluid remains in static equilibrium under the action of shear
stresses. When the fluid is at rest, a typical fluid particle experiences gravitational
force and normal stress (hydrostatic pressure) [1, 2]. Some examples, where fluid
statics is used for analysis and design, are as follows:
(i) Pressure measuring devices such as manometers;
(ii) Velocity and flow rate measuring devices, e.g., pitot tube, venturimeter,
orifice meter, and rotameter;
(iii) Partially and fully submerged objects such as boats, ships, and submarines;
(iv) Dams, retaining walls, and other hydraulic systems.
140 T. K. Gogoi and U. S. Dixit
Fluid dynamics comprises fluid kinematics and fluid kinetics. Fluid kinematics
studies fluid motion without considering the nature of forces that causes the motion
[2]. Knowledge of fluid kinematics is essential in understanding fluid kinetics. In
fluid kinetics, the dynamic behavior of fluids is analyzed along with the forces
governing the fluid motion. Fluid dynamics associated with the motion of air or gas
is specifically known as aerodynamics, while the study of motion of a liquid is
called hydrodynamics.
Governing equations of motion are the key to fluid dynamics. They are derived
from physical laws by considering mass and force balance either on a differential
fluid element or on a control volume (CV). Accordingly, the differential and inte-
gral forms of mass and momentum conservation equations are obtained. These
governing equations are solved either analytically or numerically to determine the
velocity and pressure field in various flow geometries. There are different classi-
fications of a flow; some of them are described in the following subsections [3].
A steady flow is one in which the velocity and fluid properties may vary at different
points but remain constant with time at a fixed point in the flow field. On the other
hand, the flow is unsteady if the velocity and fluid properties change with time at a
given location in the flow.
At a given instant of time, if the flow velocity remains same everywhere in the flow
field, it is called uniform flow. If the fluid flow velocity is different at different
points, then it is called a non-uniform flow.
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 141
The flow in which the infinitesimal fluid elements also rotate about their own axis
while moving along a certain path is called rotational flow. A fluid element
undergoes rotation due to angular momentum in the flow field. When the angular
velocity vector is zero, the fluid particles do not undergo any rotation and the flow
is said to be irrotational. The combined translational and rotational motion of an
elemental fluid particle ABCD is shown in Fig. 2a, where the fluid element while
moving in a straight path is also rotating about its own axis, and hence, it is
rotational flow. In Fig. 2b, the fluid element ABCD although is moving in an
elliptical path, but there is no rotation of the fluid element about its own axis; hence,
it is an irrotational flow.
During fluid flow, if the fluid density changes significantly in the flow field, then it
is termed as compressible flow. All kinds of gas flows are compressible except in
case of gas flowing at low velocity with Mach number less than 0.3. Mach number
is defined as the ratio of the velocity of gas to the velocity of the sound in the
surrounding medium. Flow in which the density variation is negligible is called
incompressible flow. Flow of liquid is often considered as incompressible because
change in liquid density with pressure is almost negligible.
Laminar flow is a flow in which the fluid particles move in parallel layers in a very
organized manner. Highly viscous fluids such as oils moving at low velocity
usually exhibit laminar flow. On the other hand, the flow in which the movement of
Fig. 3 A typical flow with arrows indicating the trajectory of the fluid particles: a laminar flow
and b turbulent flow
fluid particles is highly irregular and chaotic in nature is called turbulent flow.
Turbulent flowis associated with formation of eddies and random fluctuations of
velocity and pressure with time and space. The low-viscosity fluids such as air
moving at high velocity typically display turbulent behavior. The difference
between laminar and turbulent flows is depicted in Fig. 3. In turbulent flow, con-
siderable mixing occurs among the fluid particles. Sometimes, the turbulent flow is
desired. For example, the combustion chamber in a diesel engine is designed to
cause a turbulent flow in order to obtain a good mixing between the fuel and air. In
fluidized bed boiler, turbulence is promoted by fluidization of fine solid particles
that assists in uniform mixing between fuel and air. This is basically done for
generating evenly distributed heat at lower temperature that minimizes harmful NOx
emission. It also allows the use of low-quality fuel in the boiler furnace.
Analysis of fluid flow through circular and non-circular ducts (rectangular, square,
triangular, and elliptical) is very common in fluid mechanics. These are internal
flow where the fluid particles move inside the duct. In external flow, for example in
flow past a cylinder, the fluid particles flow over the solid surface. Internal flow can
be classified into open-channel and pipe flows. In an open-channel flow, liquids
flow in a channel with a free surface open to atmosphere. Flow of water in rivers
and irrigation canals are examples of open-channel flow. Pipe flow is a flow in a
closed conduit.
When a fluid enters a circular pipe with certain uniform velocity, due to no-slip
condition, the fluid particles in contact with the pipe surface attain zero velocity.
The velocities of the adjacent fluid layers also decrease due to resistance offered by
the slow-moving layers at the bottom. In this process, the fluid layer at the pipe
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 143
center will attain the maximum velocity to satisfy the mass balance and the central
velocity will also be greater than the original uniform velocity at the pipe entrance.
This velocity variation gives rise to the development of velocity boundary layers
along the tube. In the boundary layers, there is sufficient amount of velocity gra-
dient, while outside the boundary layer, the velocity is more or less uniform. These
two velocity boundary layers keep growing in thickness until they merge at the
center at certain length from the pipe entrance. This length is called entry length,
and the flow in this entrance region is called hydrodynamically developing flow.
Beyond the entrance region, the velocity profile is fully developed; hence, it is
called hydrodynamically fully developed flow. In the fully developed region, the
velocity profile is the same at all locations along the flow direction.
During fluid flow, velocity and other flow properties actually vary in all the three
directions, i.e., they are functions of ðx; y; zÞ in Cartesian and ðr; h; zÞ in polar
coordinate systems. Under this situation, fluid flow is considered as
three-dimensional (3-D); 3-D flow analysis is usually complicated. However, under
certain conditions, velocity and property variation can be neglected in certain
directions. Accordingly, the fluid flow analysis can be done assuming it to be
two-dimensional (2-D) or one-dimensional (1-D). 1-D and 2-D assumptions make
fluid flow analysis simple. Exact solutions of the Navier–Stokes equations (mo-
mentum balance equations in the three directions) that are otherwise difficult to
obtain for 3-D flow can be obtained without much difficulty for 1-D and 2-D flow in
certain flow geometries. For example, fully developed laminar flow between two
parallel plates (Fig. 4) can be approximated as one-dimensional if it is assumed that
only the x velocity component (u) is the non-trivial one and it varies only in the y-
direction.
Knowledge of fluid mechanics and fluid flow behavior under various forces and
at different flow conditions helps mechanical, civil, and chemical engineers in
solving many practical engineering flow problems. All kinds of power plants
(hydroelectric, thermal, and nuclear), hydraulic machines, automobiles involve
application of fluid mechanics theory and principles.
Heat transfer deals with the rate of energy transfer (energy transfer per unit time) by
virtue of temperature difference. However, thermodynamics is concerned only with
the amount of heat transfer and not with the heat transfer rate. Thermodynamics
gives no idea about the time that is required to complete the process. Heat transfer
takes place by three modes—conduction, convection, and radiation. In most of the
heat transfer problems, all the three modes are active, for example, the solar water
heating systems that use different types of solar collectors.
3.1 Conduction
DT
Q_ cond ¼ kA ; ð1Þ
Dx
where k is the thermal conductivity of the material that measures the ability to
conduct heat. In the limiting case, when Dx ! 0, Eq. (1) is written in differential
form as
dT
Q_ cond ¼ kA : ð2Þ
dx
Equation (2) is known as Fourier law of heat conduction and dT/dx as the
temperature gradient. The negative sign in Eq. (2) implies that heat transfer occurs
in the direction of decreasing temperature. The Fourier law represented by Eq. (2) is
however limited to 1-D heat conduction problem. It can be generalized for 2-D and
3-D cases also. Heat transfer problems are often analyzed as steady or unsteady
problems. In steady-state analysis, it is assumed that the temperature and the heat
flux (heat transfer per unit area) at any location remain invariant with time although
they may be different at different locations.
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 145
3.2 Convection
Convective heat transfer takes place between a solid surface and an adjacent fluid in
motion. It involves the effects of diffusion, fluid bulk motion, or both. It can be in
the form of forced convection, natural (or free) convection, and sometime in mixed
mode of convection. In forced convection, the fluid is forced to flow over the solid
surface by some external means such as a pump or a fan, while in natural con-
vection the buoyancy force arising out of density difference caused by fluid tem-
perature variation governs the fluid motion. In Fig. 5a, air at 18 °C is forced to flow
over a hot plate at 300 °C by using an electric fan and heat transfer takes place from
the hot plate to the air moving over the plate. This is forced convection. However,
when the electric fan is switched off, the air ceases to flow over the plate but even
then, the layer of air adjacent to the plate will be heated due to conduction of the
plate to the air. Also, heat transfer by conduction will take place from this layer of
air to the next outer layer and so on. Consequently, the temperature of the neigh-
boring air particles increases and the density decreases. The lighter air particles rise
up, and the empty space created by upward movement of the lighter air is filled up
by the cold air that rushes from the top (Fig. 5b). This rising motion of lighter air
and downward motion of cold air is called the natural or free convection current.
Heat transfer by natural convection continues until the plate is cooled to the tem-
perature of the surrounding air.
The heat transfer rate by convection is determined by using Newton’s law of
cooling:
where As is the heat transfer surface area, Ts is the surface temperature, and T1 is
the temperature of the fluid amply far away from the surface. The heat transfer
coefficient h is the most crucial parameter in convective heat transfer that can be
determined either by experiment or theoretical analysis. The heat transfer coefficient
h itself is not a fluid property; however, it depends upon the fluid properties and
other flow variables such as flow regimes (laminar, transition, or turbulent), surface
roughness, and geometry of the body. Value of h is typically high for liquid flow
and forced convection compared to gas flow and free convection, respectively. It is
also higher for turbulent than that for laminar flow.
Fig. 5 Convection heat transfer from a hot plate to air a forced convection and b free convection
146 T. K. Gogoi and U. S. Dixit
3.3 Radiation
Eb ðT Þ ¼ rT 4 : ð4Þ
Fig. 6 Radiation heat transfer between the Sun and the Earth
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 147
E ðT Þ ¼ eEb ðT Þ: ð5Þ
4 Thermodynamics
Fig. 8 Schematic of
piston-cylinder assembly of
an internal combustion engine
combustion engines where the piston moves upward and downward during the
compression and expansion stroke, respectively, during which the inlet and exhaust
valves remain closed. However, the inlet valve opens during the suction stroke and
the outlet valve, during the exhaust stroke. Moreover, the system boundary on the
piston side moves and there may be leakage of gas through the piston rings and
crevices; therefore, the gas inside the engine does not constitute a pure closed
system, rather it can be referred to as a semi-open system. Devices such as com-
pressor, turbine, and nozzle involve both mass and energy transfer; hence, they are
open systems (Fig. 9).
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 149
Fig. 9 Practical examples of open system: a air compressor, b steam turbine, and c nozzle
Energy exchange between the system and its surroundings is known as energy
interaction. Basically, it represents the energy gained or lost by a system during a
process [8]. A system interacts with its surrounding either through heat or work. In
open systems, energy interaction also occurs through mass transfer. Energy inter-
action by temperature difference is called heat transfer, and any other energy
transfer is termed as work transfer. The basic modes of heat transfer were discussed
in Sect. 3. Different forms of work transfer arise in thermodynamic applications due
to interaction of system and surrounding. Some of them are briefly discussed below.
ZV2
W12 ¼ pdV: ð6Þ
V1
The general sign convention for heat and work interactions is as follows:
1. Heat flow into a system is positive, while heat outflow from a system is taken as
negative.
2. Work transferred to a system is negative, while work done by the system is
positive.
If a spring, under the action of a force, is displaced from its undisturbed position,
the total work done on the spring can be calculated as
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 151
k 2
Wspring ¼ x2 x21 ; ð7Þ
2
where k is the spring stiffness (force per unit displacement), x1 and x2 are the initial
and the final displacements of the spring measured from the undisturbed position of
the spring.
There are some non-mechanical types of work transfer. When work transfer occurs
due to flow of electricity into and out of the system, then it is called electric work,
for example electric work associated with electric motor and generator. It is the
product of voltage and current. Electric polarization work is related to material
polarization in the presence of an applied electric field. During electric polarization,
the positive and negative charges within the material are displaced from to another
and consequently, electric dipole moments (torque) are developed. The product of
the electric field strength and total electric dipole moment of the molecules is
defined as electric polarization work. Similarly, a material experiences magnetic
dipole moment when it is placed in a magnetic field. Magnetic work is calculated by
multiplying magnetic field strength with the total magnetic dipole moment.
Thermodynamic properties of a system are affected by electric or magnetic
polarization. In some cases, the electric and magnetic properties are correlated with
thermal properties to find out thermodynamic conditions for equilibrium of electric
and magnetic dipole moments. Thermodynamics of electric and magnetic systems
is a subject of practical interest such as thermoelectric generator, thermoelectric
refrigerator, magnetic cooling systems.
When a system undergoes a change from an equilibrium state to another, the system
undergoes a process. A system, while undergoing a process, passes through a
sequence of intermediate states. The locus of all these states is called the path of the
process. An ideal process that is almost static at every state is called quasi-static (or
quasi-equilibrium) process. A quasi-static process is an infinitesimally slow process
in which all the intermediate surroundings passed through by the system are
equilibrium states. It is also called a reversible process. It is an ideal concept. An
actual process can never be quasi-static process due to the presence of
non-equilibrium effects, and hence, it is irreversible. However, some real processes
can be modeled as quasi-static or reversible with negligible error. Reversible pro-
cesses are easy to analyze, and they set standards to which actual processes can be
compared [8].
152 T. K. Gogoi and U. S. Dixit
Fig. 10 Thermodynamic
processes represented in P-
v diagram: a a constant
pressure process and b a
constant volume process
where Ein is total energy input, Eout is the total energy output from the system, and
DEsystem is the change in total energy. The energy balance equation in rate form can
be written as
dEsystem
E_ in E_ out ¼ : ð9Þ
dt
Esystem in the above equations contain internal (U), kinetic, and potential energies
and therefore,
1
Esystem ¼ U þ mV 2 þ mgZ: ð10Þ
2
1 2
esystem ¼ u þ V þ gZ: ð11Þ
2
The first law for a closed system undergoing a process can also be written as
Q W ¼ DEsystem : ð12Þ
In this case, energy interactions involve heat transfer Q into the system and work
transfer W from the system. If a closed system undergoes a thermodynamic cycle,
the first law is expressed as
X X
Q ¼ W ; ð13Þ
cycle cycle
or
I I
dQ ¼ dW: ð14Þ
Symbol ‘d’ is used instead of ‘d’ to indicate that Q and W are path functions;
they depend on the path followed between two states. The energy is a thermody-
namic property. It has a fixed value at a given state, and hence, change in energy
154 T. K. Gogoi and U. S. Dixit
during a process is not affected by the process path followed by the system. In fact,
the first law does not provide any information about energy value at a given state; it
only deals with the change in energy [8].
The total energy E that was previously expressed as the sum of internal, kinetic,
and potential energies, now for a moving fluid, will additionally involve the flow
energy term. Hence, the total specific energy of a flow stream will be
1 2
eflow ¼ Pv þ u þ V þ gZ: ð16Þ
2
The summation of specific internal energy u and specific flow energy Pv together
constitutes another property called specific enthalpy. It is denoted by h and is
expressed as
h ¼ u þ Pv: ð17Þ
1
eflow ¼ h þ V 2 þ gZ: ð18Þ
2
Further, internal energy is a property associated with a closed system, while the
enthalpy is a property linked with an open system.
The formulation of first law of thermodynamics is different for an open system from
that of a closed system. Since an open system involves mass flow across their
boundaries, energy transfer by mass also needs to be considered. Thermodynamic
processes involving open systems can be analyzed from two aspects, either as
steady-flow or as unsteady-flow processes. During a steady-flow process, the fluid
flows steadily through the control volume and the fluid properties including mass
and energy remain constant with time. Hence, heat and work interactions between a
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 155
steady-flow system and its surroundings do not change with time. The properties
may however vary from point to point within the control volume. Many engineering
devices such as pumps, turbines, compressors, nozzles, and diffusers operate under
steady conditions; hence, they are often classified as steady-flow devices.
The energy balance equation for an open system or a control volume is
expressed as
where Ein is the total energy transferred into the control volume by heat, work, and
mass. Eout is the total energy transferred out of the CV. DECV is the change in
energy of the CV.
In rate form, the energy balance equation can be written as
dECV
E_ in E_ out ¼ : ð20Þ
dt
E_ in ¼ E_ out : ð21Þ
The general steady-flow energy equation (SFEE) for an open system with
multiple inlets and outlets can be written as [8]
X V2
X V2
Q_ in þ W_ in þ m_ h þ þ gZ ¼ Q_ out þ W_ out þ m_ h þ þ gZ :
in
2 out
2
ð22Þ
For an open system with heat input Q_ into the system and work output W
_ from
the system, the SFEE becomes
X V2
X
V2
Q_ W_ ¼ m_ h þ þ gZ m_ h þ þ gZ : ð23Þ
out
2 in
2
The SFEE for a single-stream (only one inlet and one outlet) further simplifies to
the following form:
1
Q_ W_ ¼ m_ ðh2 h1 Þ þ V22 V12 þ gðZ2 Z1 Þ : ð24Þ
2
156 T. K. Gogoi and U. S. Dixit
The changes in kinetic and potential energies are neglected in most of the
analyses; the SFEE under this assumption becomes
Q_ W
_ ¼ m_ ðh2 h1 Þ: ð25Þ
The first law of thermodynamics states about the energy conservation during a
process. However, it does not indicate the direction in which the process is
occurring. Also, it does not tell the direction of a spontaneous heat transfer process
which occurs always from a hotter to a cooler body. A spontaneous process occurs
naturally without outside intervention, just as water falls downward. It is also true
that the spontaneous natural processes which occur in one direction are not spon-
taneous in the reverse direction. Therefore, this direction-related issue on energy
transformation put a limit on what is stated by the first law regarding energy
conservation. In other words, satisfying the first law alone is not sufficient to ensure
the spontaneity of a process. This is where, the second law comes in and actually
for a process to occur, it must also satisfy the second law of thermodynamics in
addition to the first law of thermodynamics [8, 10].
Thermal energy reservoirs come into reference in the context of the second law of
thermodynamics. These are bodies of infinite heat capacity (mass specific heat)
which can supply or absorb finite quantity of heat without suffering any significant
change in temperature. A reservoir which supplies heat to a system is called a
source, and a reservoir to which heat is rejected is called a sink. A furnace where
large amount fuel is burnt continuously is typical example of a source. For example,
an ocean can be treated as a sink.
Enough discussion was provided earlier on energy interactions in the form of work
and heat transfer. Work is a form of high-grade energy, while heat is low-grade
energy. Work can be converted into heat completely, while direct conversion of
heat into work is not possible [8, 10]. The device which can be used to convert heat
into work is called a heat engine. A heat engine operating on a complete thermo-
dynamic cycle is termed as a cyclic heat engine (CHE). For example, a simple
steam power plant (Fig. 11) in which heat is produced in the furnace (source) is
supplied to produce high-pressure steam in the boiler that drives the turbine to
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 157
deliver mechanical work. The low-pressure steam at the turbine exit is condensed in
the condenser as it rejects heat to the sink. The pump is used in the CHE for
maintaining continuous circulation of water through the system. There are other
heat engines such as open-cycle gas turbine, petrol engine, and diesel engine;
however, the working fluid in these heat engines does not undergo a complete
cycle. The combustion gases in these heat engines are not recycled; instead, they are
exhausted into the atmosphere. In every cycle, a fresh air–fuel mixture is inducted
into the engine, and hence, they are called non-cyclic heat engines. In Fig. 11, Q_ in is
the rate of heat supplied from the source, Q_ out is the rate of heat rejected to sink,
W_ out is the amount of work delivered by steam turbine, and W_ in is the amount of
work supplied to drive the pump.
The performance of a heat engine is usually measured in terms of thermal
efficiency, gth that is defined as the ratio of net work output from the engine to the
total heat input to the engine:
or
_ net;out
W
gth ¼ ; ð27Þ
Q_ in
where
W_ net;out ¼ Q_ H Q_ L ; ð29Þ
Q_ L
gth ¼ 1 : ð30Þ
Q_ H
From the expression of gth , it is clear that for a fixed amount of Q_ H supplied to the
engine, gth would be high if the amount of heat rejected Q_ L is reduced. In the limit,
when Q_ L becomes zero, efficiency of the engine would be 100%, which however
cannot be achieved in real practice. No heat engine can convert heat completely to
work even in the best condition. It must reject some amount of heat to the sink to
complete the cycle. This is the basis on which the Kelvin–Planck statement of the
second law of thermodynamics is defined and it states that [8]:
It is impossible to construct a heat engine to produce net work in a cycle if it receives heat
only from the source.
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 159
Refrigerators and heat pumps are also cyclic devices that exchange heat between a
low- and a high-temperature reservoir. However, unlike a heat engine, which is a
work-producing device, refrigerators and heat pumps are work-consuming devices.
Moreover, the direction of heat transfer is opposite; i.e., heat is transferred from the
low-temperature medium to the high-temperature one. This is made possible by
supplying external work to the system. Both refrigerators and heat pumps work on
the same principle but with a different purpose. Refrigerators are used to maintain
low temperature in the refrigerated space by removing heat from it, while the
function of a heat pump is to maintain high temperature in a space by supplying
heat into it.
A cyclic refrigerator (also a cyclic heat pump) uses a refrigerant as working fluid
and operates in a vapor compression system shown in Fig. 13. A vapor compres-
sion system comprises a compressor, a condenser, an expansion/throttle valve, and
an evaporator. The compressor increases the pressure of the refrigerant vapor from
the evaporator to the condenser pressure. During compression, the temperature of
the refrigerant also increases above the temperature of the surroundings. The
refrigerant enters the condenser where it is condensed through heat rejection to a
surrounding medium. The refrigerant is then throttled to the evaporator pressure by
passing it through an expansion valve or a capillary tube. The low-temperature
refrigerant then enters the evaporator, where it evaporates by absorbing heat from
the source. The refrigerant vapor then enters the compressor and completes the
cycle. Thus, in a vapor compression system, the refrigerant absorbs heat in the
evaporator and it rejects heat in the condenser. When used as a refrigerator, the
system is operated in a way such that low temperature is maintained in the
refrigerated space during heat absorption from the source. Heat rejection in the
condenser is necessary to operate the system, but it is not the purpose of a
refrigerator. The sole purpose of a heat pump is however to discharge heat to a
medium, and the heat rejected in the condenser is used to heat a room or a house
during winter season. Figures 14 and 15 depict the schematics of refrigerator and
heat pump, respectively.
Fig. 14 Refrigerator
Desired output
COP ¼ ð31Þ
Required input
The desired output for a refrigerator is the heat removed from the refrigerated
space, while for the heat pump, it is the heat supplied to the heated space. Therefore,
the COP of the refrigerator ðCOPR Þ and the heat pump ðCOPHP Þ can be mathe-
matically expressed as
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 161
Q_ L Q_ L
COPR ¼ ¼ ; ð32Þ
_ _
Wnet;in QH Q_ L
Q_ H Q_ H
COPHP ¼ ¼ : ð33Þ
_ net;in Q_ H Q_ L
W
It is easy to see that if a refrigerator is used as a heat pump, the COP of the heat
pump will be 1 plus the COP of the refrigerator.
The Clausius statement of second law of thermodynamics arises from the working
principle of refrigerators and heat pumps, and it is stated as follows:
It is impossible to construct a device, which operates in a cycle and produces no effect other
than transfer of heat from a body at low temperature to a body at high temperature.
Thus, heat cannot flow itself from a cold to a hot medium unless it is made
possible by some external means. This is the reason that in a refrigerator (also in a
heat pump), an electric motor is used to drive the compressor of the vapor com-
pression system. Energy in the form of work must be supplied from an external
power source to the system; otherwise, it would not be possible to transfer heat
from a cooler to a hotter body.
It was discussed earlier that processes that occur spontaneously in a given direction
are not spontaneous in the reverse direction, and once it occurs in certain direction,
restoring the system to its initial state is not possible. Therefore, all real processes
are irreversible. A reversible process on the other hand can be reversed back to its
initial state, and while doing so, it would not leave any trace to show the occurrence
of the process [10]. However, an irreversible process, if attempted to bring it back to
its initial state, would produce some change in the system and its surroundings. An
irreversible process can approach the corresponding reversible one as a limiting
case. Additional work can be obtained from a work-producing device (such as
turbine) if it is made to operate in conditions close to reversible ones. Similarly, the
work consumed by a work-consuming device (such as pump, compressor) would
also be less if it is operated in near reversible conditions.
162 T. K. Gogoi and U. S. Dixit
The factors that contribute toward making a process irreversible are the lack of
thermodynamic equilibrium and the presence of dissipative effects. Heat transfer
between two mediums through a finite temperature difference, fluid flow due to
pressure difference, free expansion of gases from one compartment to a neighboring
evacuated compartment, mixing between two or more fluid streams, fuel com-
bustion in combustion chambers of engines are examples of some irreversible
processes where irreversibility is caused mainly by non-equilibrium effects.
Dissipative effects arise from friction, viscosity, turbulence, inelasticity, electric
resistance, and magnetic hysteresis. When these factors are present, the work done
on a system is dissipated into heat without an equivalent increase in the energy of
the system.
The extent of deviation of an irreversible process from its corresponding
reversible process is measured by its irreversibility. Irreversibility arising out of
dissipative effects internally within the system is called internal irreversibility.
Similarly, the irreversibility caused by non-equilibrium effects at the system
boundary is known as external irreversibility.
In discussing heat engine with reference to a steam power plant (Fig. 11), the
expressions for net work output and thermal efficiency were obtained. Efficiency of
the heat engine increases with increase in net work output. Net work output can be
maximized by maximizing the turbine work and minimizing the pump work. These
can be achieved through use of reversible processes. Similarly, if the other two
processes, i.e., production of high-pressure steam in the boiler and condensation of
steam in the condenser, are also replaced with corresponding reversible processes,
then all the processes of the cyclic heat engine will be reversible. Such a heat engine
can be referred to as reversible heat engine. The efficiency of a reversible heat
engine is always higher than an actual heat engine with irreversible processes. The
reversible cycle referred here is known as the Carnot cycle and was proposed in
1824 by French engineer Sadi Carnot, who is called the father of thermodynamics
[9]. The P-v diagram of the Carnot cycle is shown in Fig. 16. It comprises two
reversible isothermal processes (1–2 and 3–4) and two reversible adiabatic pro-
cesses (2–3 and 4–1).
In a Carnot cycle, if executed in a simple steam power plant, which is a
steady-flow system, the thermodynamic processes should be carried out ideally in
the following manner. Heat from the source (furnace) to water in the boiler should
be supplied reversibly and isothermally at a constant temperature TH . The expan-
sion of steam in the steam turbine should be reversible adiabatic. Heat rejection by
steam in the condenser to the sink should take place reversibly and isothermally at
constant temperature TL . Work needs to be supplied to the pump reversibly and
adiabatically to run the pump with minimum power consumption.
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 163
1. A reversible heat engine has the highest possible efficiency of any heat engine operating
between a source and a sink, both held at constant temperatures.
2. The efficiencies of all reversible heat engines operating between a pair of source and
sink held at prescribed constant temperatures are always the same.
3. The efficiency of a reversible heat engine is independent of the nature and amount of
working fluid.
The Celsius (°C) and the Fahrenheit (°F) are the common temperature scales
used in SI and British systems for temperature measurement, respectively. In these
temperature scales, the ice point and the steam point are used as references to assign
temperature values. A thermodynamic temperature scale, on the other hand, is a
temperature scale that is independent of the properties of the working substance.
The thermodynamic temperature scales in SI and British systems are known as
Kelvin scale (K) and Rankine scale (R), respectively. The temperatures on this scale
are called absolute temperatures. On this scale, the lower limit is zero and the upper
limit is infinity.
The Kelvin and Celsius scale is related by
Thus, in a reversible cycle, the heat transfer ratio Q_ H =Q_ L is replaced with TH =TL
and it is independent of the physical properties of any substance.
A heat engine working on reversible Carnot cycle is known as Carnot heat engine,
and its thermal efficiency can be expressed as
TL
gth;rev ¼ 1 : ð37Þ
TH
and heat pumps working on reversed Carnot cycle are called Carnot refrigerators
and Carnot heat pumps. The highest possible COPs with respect to Carnot refrig-
erators and Carnot heat pumps operating between the temperature limits TH and TL
can be expressed as
1
COPR;rev ¼ TH ; ð38Þ
TL 1
1
COPHP;rev ¼ : ð39Þ
1 TTHL
The equality sign in the above equation applies to reversible cycles and the
inequality to irreversible cycles. Thus,
I
dQ
¼ 0: ð41Þ
T rev
For a system undergoing a process i-f, the change in entropy can be determined
as follows:
Zf Zf
dQ
ds ¼ sf si ¼ : ð44Þ
T rev
i i
166 T. K. Gogoi and U. S. Dixit
An important point here is that the above integration can be done only for a
reversible process; hence, the irreversible process i-f has to be replaced with a
corresponding reversible one for performing the integration [10].
The entropy principle is obtained from the definition of entropy and Clausius
inequality. It states that the entropy of the universe (system and surrounding
together) is ever increasing. That is
s in Eq. (44) is specific entropy (kJ/kgK), while S in Eq. (45) is the total entropy
(kJ/K). Change in entropy occurs due to both internal irreversibility and external
irreversibility. During heat supply to a system, its entropy increases and vice versa.
The second law of thermodynamics emphasizes that energy has both quantity and
quality. The measure of usefulness of energy is termed as exergy. It is a Greek word
first used in 1956 and is derived from ex (external) and ergos (work). Whenever
there is no exchange of energy and other parameters, i.e., the equilibrium condition
is attained by the system with the surrounding, it is said to have attained a dead
state. Rudolf Clausius in 1865 proclaimed that if an increase in entropy is associ-
ated with decreased ability to perform work, the universe reaches a dead state.
A useful parameter to characterize the performance along with first law is defined
by the second-law efficiency.
The second law of thermodynamics not only indicates direction of processes; it also
defines the quality concept of energy. A system of gas at higher temperature pos-
sesses superior quality to a system at lower temperature because more work can be
extracted from the gas at higher temperature. Energy quality can be accessed from
the concept of exergy or availability.
Exergy (also called availability) of a system is a combined property linked with the
surroundings, and it indicates the extent of departure of a system from the equi-
librium state. It refers to the maximum useful work that can be obtained from a
system when it reaches complete thermodynamic equilibrium with the reference
environment. A system in complete thermodynamic equilibrium with its
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 167
surroundings is said to be at dead state where it has zero exergy with negligible
kinetic and potential energy relative to the reference environment. The properties of
a system at the dead state are symbolized by subscript zero, for example P0, T0, h0,
u0, and s0. The pressure and temperature of the reference environment are usually
taken as 25 °C and 1 atmosphere (101.325 kPa) unless otherwise stated.
The specific exergy of a closed and an open system at a given state can be
calculated using the following equations [8]:
V2
Specific exergy of an open system: w ¼ ðh h0 Þ T0 ðs s0 Þ þ þ gZ: ð47Þ
2
Like energy, exergy is also transferred due to heat and work interaction and also
due to mass flow. The exergy transfer rate associated with heat, work, and mass are
given as follows:
T0 _
Exergy transfer rate by heat: X_ heat ¼ 1 Q; ð48Þ
T
In the way in which the energy balance equation is applied to find out energy
loss in a device, in a similar manner, the exergy balance equation is applied to find
out exergy destroyed in a process.
The general exergy balance for any system undergoing a process can be
expressed as
dXsystem
X_ in X_ out X_ destroyed ¼ : ð52Þ
dt
Thermal efficiencies of heat engines and COP of refrigerators or heat pumps are
actually first-law-based performance parameters and hence referred to as first-law
efficiencies. The first-law efficiency in its definition ignores the best possible per-
formance of a system, and hence, it is not an accurate measure of actual system
performance. The second-law efficiency is defined to correlate the first-law-based
system performance with the performance under reversible conditions.
For work-producing devices (heat engines), it is defined as
gth
gII ¼ : ð55Þ
gth;rev
COP
gII ¼ : ð56Þ
COPrev
assigns quality to energy of a system at a given state and thus provides the theo-
retical base for evaluating the irreversible losses and the second-law efficiency of
thermal systems. Say for example, in a steam power plant, the information
regarding heat supplied in the boiler, net power developed, the energy loss in the
condenser, and the plant’s thermal efficiency (first-law efficiency) can be obtained
from an energy analysis. Energy analysis would indicate that the energy loss in the
condenser is mainly responsible for low efficiency of the plant because a major
portion of energy is lost in the condenser in transferring heat to the cooling water.
This information obtained from energy analysis in no way gives any idea about the
real utility of the low-temperature cooling water and the exergy loss in the con-
denser. It is possible, only through exergy analysis, to quantify that there is hardly
any exergy destruction in the condenser compared to the boiler irreversibility due to
fuel combustion and heat transfer through huge temperature difference between
combustion gas and water.
Exergy analysis is more appropriate for performance assessment and efficiency
of processes, energy conversion devices, and thermal systems. It is mainly applied
to design, evaluate, and optimize thermal energy systems to improve their perfor-
mance. Often energy and exergy analyses are performed together for analyzing
thermal systems. Combination of energy and exergy analysis is a better approach of
performance assessment as it gives a complete depiction of system characteristics.
1. Thermal power plants such as fossil-fuel-fired steam power plants [11, 12], gas
turbine, renewable energy plant, and combined cycle (CC) power plants [13–
15], integrated gasification CC plants [16, 17];
2. Cogeneration [18, 19], trigeneration [20, 21], and multi-generation [22, 23]
systems;
3. Heating [24, 25], cooling [26, 27], and air-conditioning [28] systems;
4. Internal combustion engines [29, 30];
5. Fuel cells [31, 32];
6. Solar [21, 33, 34] and geothermal energy [35] systems;
7. Organic Rankine cycle-based energy systems [36, 37].
Energy and exergy analyses are performed on thermal systems mainly to
(i) Analyze the effect of various operating parameters on energy and exergy
losses (irreversibility);
(ii) Determine magnitudes, location, and causes of irreversibility;
(iii) Identify those aspects of the processes that are significant to overall system
performance.
In energy-system-related researches, often new innovative thermal systems are
conceptualized and energy and exergy studies are performed to evaluate their
system performance under various operating conditions. The current research trend
is to develop and perform thermodynamic analysis on renewable-energy-based
hybrid multi-generational systems.
Exergoeconomics is another exergy-based cost reduction approach that combi-
nes thermodynamics (exergy) and economics (cost) to obtain better system design
and cost-effective operation of thermal systems. In an exergoeconomic analysis, the
principle of exergy costing and cost accounting methods are applied to allocate
costs to the energy streams and to govern exergy destruction in each system
component [37, 38]. The fuel–product–loss (F–P–L) is a very commonly used
method for developing exergetic cost balance equations for the system components.
In this method, each system component is characterized by its fuels, products, and
losses. With respect to each system component, the fuels represent the exergy
inputs and the products are the exergy outputs. The losses refer to the exergy loss in
the system component. The cost balance equations are solved to determine cost rate
of exergy destruction of the individual components and the overall system. Cost
assessment of energy streams and processes in a complex energy system provides
better understanding of the system economics in terms of the input resources and
the final products.
total annual operating cost rate. The calculation of the cost terms involves system’s
design and thermodynamic operating parameters; hence, it combines the thermo-
dynamic performance data in calculating the total annual cost rate of the system.
These are called thermoeconomic analyses. Combined thermoeconomic analysis
and optimization is another area where the concept of thermoeconomics is applied
in optimizing the performance of thermal systems [39–41]. In such studies, different
optimization techniques such as nonlinear programming, simplex search method,
conjugate-gradient method, genetic algorithm, differential evolution, particle swarm
optimization are used to identify the most interesting system design configuration
through determination of optimal parameters. System analysis combined with
thermodynamic and economic optimization is an effective tool as it indicates the
economic feasibility, improving operational performance and efficiency of the best
design configuration identified through optimization.
7 Conclusions
Glossary
Exergy Maximum useful work obtained from a system when it comes in equi-
librium with the surroundings.
Exergy analysis Analysis based on second law of thermodynamic that applies
exergy balance equation in determining exergy destruction (irreversibility) of
system components.
Exergoeconomic analysis Thermodynamic analysis based on exergy costing
theory.
External flow Fluid flow over an unbounded surface such as a plate or a pipe.
First law of thermodynamics The law of energy conservation applied to any
system undergoing a change of state or a cycle.
Flow field A region where velocities are specified at each and every location at all
times.
Fluid It is the state of matter which does not have a fixed shape and cannot remain
static under the application of a shear force.
Fluid dynamics The branch of fluid mechanics that studies fluid motion along with
the governing forces (inertia force, pressure force, viscous force, etc.).
Fluid Kinematics The branch of fluid mechanics that studies fluid motion without
considering the nature of forces.
Fluid statics The branch of fluid mechanics that studies fluids at rest.
Governing equations of motion Conservation equations of mass and momentum.
The mass conservation equation is called continuity equation, and the momen-
tum conservation equation is called momentum equation.
Hydrodynamics Study of flow of liquids.
Incompressible flow Flow of constant density fluids (all liquid flows).
Internal energy Total energy (sum of molecular internal energy, potential energy
and kinetic energy) of a system.
Internal flow Fluid flow bounded inside a solid surface such as a pipe or a duct.
Irrotational flow Flow in which rotational components in the flow field are zero.
Isolated system A thermodynamic system in total isolation from its surroundings
with no mass and energy transfer.
Laminar flow Fluid flow in which fluid particles move in parallel layers smoothly
over one another.
Navier–Stokes Equations Momentum equations for incompressible, isotropic,
Newtonian fluid of constant viscosity.
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 175
Non-uniform flow Flow in which velocity and other hydrodynamic parameters are
different at different locations at a given instant of time.
Open (flow) system A thermodynamic system that allows both mass and energy
transfer across the system boundary.
Radiation Heat transfer due to propagation of electromagnetic waves through
vacuum.
Reversible process An ideal process in which all the states passed through by a
system are equilibrium states.
Reynolds Number Ratio of inertia to viscous force defined mathematically as
Re ¼ VLm c , where V is the average flow velocity, Lc is the characteristic length
(e.g., diameter of a circular pipe, hydraulic diameter of non-circular ducts), and m
is the kinematic viscosity of the fluid. Reynolds number is a non-dimensional
parameter that is used to identify laminar and turbulent flow.
Rotational flow Fluid flow with rotation of fluid particles about their own axis.
Second law of thermodynamics The law that indicates the direction of energy
transfer. If the first law of thermodynamics is called the law of energy conser-
vation, then second law can be termed as the law of energy degradation.
Steady flow Flow in which the velocity and the fluid properties do not vary with
time in the flow field.
Stefan–Boltzmann law The law that governs radiation heat transfer rate emitted
by a blackbody at a given temperature.
Thermal energy reservoir A body of infinite heat capacity whose temperature
does not change upon receiving and rejecting heat.
Thermodynamic cycle A series of processes undergone by a system in which the
initial and final states are identical.
Thermodynamic process A change of state undergone by a system in which the
properties of the system change.
Thermoeconomic analysis Combined thermodynamic performance and cost
(capital, operating and maintenance) analysis.
Trigeneration Generation of power heating and cooling from the same thermal
system.
Turbulent flow Irregular and chaotic flow with random fluctuations of velocity
and fluid properties with time and space coordinates.
Uniform flow Flow in which velocity and other hydrodynamic parameters assume
constant values at all locations at a given time.
176 T. K. Gogoi and U. S. Dixit
Unsteady flow Flow in which the velocity and the fluid properties change with
time in the flow field.
Work transfer All modes of energy transfer except heat transfer governed by
temperature difference.
References
1. White, F. M. (2009). Fluid mechanics (6th ed.). New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Som, S. K., & Biswas, G. (2008). Introduction to fluid mechanics and fluid machines
(2nd ed.). New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Cengel, Y. A., & Ghazar, A. J. (2014). Heat and mass transfer: Fundamentals and
applications (5th ed.). Boston, MA: Tata McGraw Hill.
4. Jang, J. Y., & Chen, L. K. (2004). Numerical analysis of heat transfer and fluid flow in a
three-dimensional wavy-fin and tube heat exchanger. International Journal of Heat and Mass
Transfer, 47, 4327–4338.
5. Lee, P. S., & Garimella, S. V. (2006). Thermally developing flow and heat transfer in
rectangular microchannels of different aspect ratios. International Journal of Heat and Mass
Transfer, 49, 3060–3067.
6. Karmare, S. V., & Tikekar, A. N. (2010). Analysis of fluid flow and heat transfer in a rib grit
roughened surface solar air heater using CFD. Solar Energy, 84, 409–417.
7. Rashidi, M. M., Rastegari, M. T., Sadi, M., & Bég, O. A. (2012). A study of non-newtonian
flow and heat transfer over a non-isothermal wedge using the homotopy analysis method.
Chemical Engineering Communications, 199(2), 231–256.
8. Cengel, Y. A., & Boles, M. A. (2006). Thermodynamics: An engineering approach (5th ed.).
Boston, MA: Tata McGraw Hill.
9. Dixit, U. S., Hazarika, M., & Davim, J. P. (2017). A brief history of mechanical engineering.
Switzerland: Springer.
10. Nag, P. K. (2010). Basic and applied thermodynamics (2nd ed.). New Delhi: Tata McGraw
Hill.
11. Sengupta, S., Datta, A., & Duttagupta, S. (2007). Exergy analysis of a coal-based 210 MW
thermal power plant. International Journal of Energy Research, 3, 14–28.
12. Ganapathy, T., Alagumurthi, N., Gakkhar, R. P., & Murugesan, K. (2009). Exergy analysis of
operating lignite fired thermal power plant. Journal of Engineering Science and Technology
Review, 2, 123–130.
13. Woudstra, N., Woudstra, T., Pirone, A., & van der Stelt, T. (2010). Thermodynamic
evaluation of combined cycle plants. Energy Conversion and Management, 51, 1099–1110.
14. Shi, X., Agnew, B., & Che, D. (2011). Analysis of a combined cycle power plant integrated
with a liquid natural gas gasification and power generation system. Proceedings of the
Institution of Mechanical Engineers, Part A: Journal of Power and Energy, 225, 1–11.
15. Sarmah, P., & Gogoi, T. K. (2017). Performance comparison of SOFC integrated combined
power systems with three different bottoming steam turbine cycles. Energy Conversion and
Management, 132, 91–101.
16. Kanniche, M., & Bouallou, C. (2007). CO2 capture study in advanced integrated gasification
combined cycle. Applied Thermal Engineering, 27, 2693–2702.
17. Romano, M. C., Campanari, S., Spallina, V., & Lozza, G. (2011). Thermodynamic analysis
and optimization of IT-SOFC-based integrated coal gasification fuel cell power plants.
Journal of Fuel Cell Science and Technology, 8(041002), 1–11.
5 Basics and Applications of Thermal Engineering 177
18. Hycienth, I., Onovwiona, V., Ugursal, I., & Fung, A. S. (2007). Modeling of internal
combustion engine based cogeneration systems for residential applications. Applied Thermal
Engineering, 27, 848–861.
19. Talukdar, K., & Gogoi, T. K. (2016). Exergy analysis of a combined vapor power cycle and
boiler flue gas driven double effect water-LiBr absorption refrigeration system. Energy
Conversion and Management, 108, 468–477.
20. Khaliq, A. (2009). Exergy analysis of gas turbine trigeneration system for combined
production of power heat and refrigeration. International Journal of Refrigeration, 32,
534–545.
21. Al-Sulaiman, F. A., Dincer, I., & Hamdullahpur, F. (2011). Exergy modeling of a new solar
driven trigeneration system. Solar Energy, 85, 2228–2243.
22. Khalid, F., Dincer, I., & Rosen, M. A. (2015). Energy and exergy analyses of a solar-biomass
integrated cycle for multigeneration. Solar Energy, 112, 290–299.
23. Al-Ali, M., & Dincer, I. (2014). Energetic and exergetic studies of a multigenerational
solar-geothermal system. Applied Thermal Engineering, 71, 16–23.
24. Hawlader, M. N. A., Chou, S. K., & Ullah, M. Z. (2001). The performance of a solar assisted
heat pump water heating system. Applied Thermal Engineering, 21, 1049–1065.
25. Ayompe, L. M., & Duffy, A. (2013). Thermal performance analysis of a solar water heating
system with heat pipe evacuated tube collector using data from a field trial. Solar Energy, 90,
17–28.
26. Jain, V., Kachhwaha, S. S., & Sachdeva, G. (2013). Thermodynamic performance analysis of
a vapor compression–absorption cascaded refrigeration system. Energy Conversion and
Management, 75, 685–700.
27. Llopis, R., Sánchez, D., Sanz-Kock, C. S., Cabello, R., & Torrella, E. (2015). Energy and
environmental comparison of two-stage solutions for commercial refrigeration at low
temperature: Fluids and systems. Applied Energy, 138, 133–142.
28. Davirana, S., Kasaeiana, A., Golzari, S., Mahian, O., Nasirivatan, S., & Wongwises, S.
(2017). A comparative study on the performance of HFO-1234yf and HFC-134a as an
alternative in automotive air conditioning systems. Applied Thermal Engineering, 110,
1091–1100.
29. Rakopoulos, C. D., & Giakoumis, E. G. (2006). Second-law analyses applied to internal
combustion engines operation. Progress in Energy and Combustion Science, 32, 2–47.
30. Gogoi, T. K. (2013). Exergy analysis of a diesel engine operated with koroch seed oil methyl
ester and its diesel fuel blends. International Journal of Exergy, 12, 183–204.
31. Park, J., Li, P., & Bae, J. (2012). Analysis of chemical, electrochemical reactions and
thermo-fluid flow in methane-feed internal reforming SOFCs: Part I—modeling and effect of
gas concentrations. International Journal of Hydrogen Energy, 37, 8512–8531.
32. Silveira, J. L., Leal, E. M., & Ragonha, L. F., Jr. (2001). Analysis of a molten carbonate fuel
cell: Cogeneration to produce electricity and cold water. Energy, 26, 891–904.
33. Yagoub, W., Doherty, P., & Riffat, S. B. (2006). Solar energy-gas driven micro-CHP system
for an office building. Applied Thermal Engineering, 26, 1604–1610.
34. Siqueira, A. M. O., Gomes, P. E. N., Torrezani, L., Lucas, E. O., & Pereira, G. M. C. (2014).
Heat transfer analysis and modeling of a parabolic trough solar collector: An analysis. Energy
Procedia, 57, 401–410.
35. Coskun, C., Oktay, Z., & Dincer, I. (2011). Performance evaluations of a geothermal power
plant. Applied Thermal Engineering, 31(2011), 4074–4082.
36. Tuo, H. (2013). Energy and exergy-based working fluid selection for organic Rankine cycle
recovering waste heat from high temperature solid oxide fuel cell and gas turbine hybrid
systems. International Journal of Energy Research, 37, 1831–1841.
37. Sahoo, P. K. (2008). Exergoeconomic analysis and optimization of a cogeneration system
using evolutionary programming. Applied Thermal Engineering, 28, 1580–1588.
38. Khaljani, M., Saray, R. K., & Bahlouli, K. (2015). Comprehensive analysis of energy, exergy
and exergo-economic of cogeneration of heat and power in a combined gas turbine and
organic Rankine cycle. Energy Conversion and Management, 97, 154–165.
178 T. K. Gogoi and U. S. Dixit
39. Valdes, M., Duran, M. D., & Rovira, A. (2003). Thermoeconomic optimization of combined
cycle gas turbine power plants using genetic algorithms. Applied Thermal Engineering, 23,
2169–2182.
40. Quoilin, S., Declaye, S., Tchanche, B. F., & Lemort, V. (2011). Thermo-economic
optimization of waste heat recovery Organic Rankine Cycles. Applied Thermal Engineering,
31, 2885–2893.
41. Modi, A., Kærn, M. R., Andreasen, J. G., & Haglind, F. (2016). Thermoeconomic
optimization of a Kalina cycle for a central receiver concentrating solar power plant. Energy
Conversion and Management, 115, 276–287.
42. Gogoi, T. K. (2016). Estimation of operating parameters of a water–LiBr vapor absorption
refrigeration system through inverse analysis. ASME Journal of Energy Resources
Technology, 138, 022002.
43. Sarmah, P., Gogoi, T. K., & Das, R. (2017). Estimation of operating parameters of a SOFC
integrated combined power cycle using differential evolution based inverse method. Applied
Thermal Engineering, 119, 98–107.
44. Yadav, V., Singh, A. K., & Dixit, U. S. (2015). Inverse estimation of thermal parameters and
friction coefficient during warm flat rolling process. International Journal of Mechanical
Sciences, 96–97, 182–198.
Chapter 6
Alternate Fuels for IC Engine
Abstract This chapter describes the production and use of biofuels/alternate fuels
to run the internal combustion engine (IC Engine). Two methods, using biodiesel
blends with diesel and using syngas obtained from gasification system, for running
the IC engine in dual fuel mode have been analyzed. Describing the first method, the
objectives enumerate to select the vegetable oil plants for biodiesel production. To
accomplish this, the energy input and output analysis of biodiesel plants for 20-year
plantation have been done. The biodiesel plants, namely jatropha, mahua, neem,
palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba, and tung, have been identified for this purpose. This
analysis includes energy input during oil extraction, cultivation, and biodiesel pro-
duction. The energy inputs are based on manpower, fossil fuel, electricity, fertilizers,
plants protection, and water for irrigation, expeller used for oil extraction, agricul-
tural machinery, methanol, catalyst (H2SO4 and NaOH/KOH) and a transesterifi-
cation unit for biodiesel production. Net energy gain (NEG) and net energy ratio
(NER) are calculated for different biodiesel plants for 20-year plantation. Palm and
coconut consumed highest energy (117,122.32 and 122,832.84 MJ/ha) during cul-
tivation. Maximum energy output is obtained for palm (123,206.4 MJ/ha) and
minimum for tung after its maturity. Maximum net energy ratio is found for mahua
(1.7164) and minimum for coconut (1.3034) oil plants. The highest net energy gain
for palm (41,689.14 MJ/a) and lowest for jojoba (8494.92 MJ/ha) were found after
maturity of plants. There are significant increments in energy output, net energy
ratio, and net energy gain with the addition of coproduct (glycerin). This analysis
with methanol (used for biodiesel production) recovery has also been done and
found reduction in energy input during biodiesel production and also the improve-
ment in net energy gain and net energy ratio. In the second method, the virgin
biomass obtained from wood and cow dung is used to generate producer gas as the
feedstock for gasifier and in turn the syngas. The producer gas combination and
gasifier-engine system are operated in dual fuel mode operation and diesel,
respectively. The emission characteristics and performance of the CI engine are
S. K. Shukla (&)
Mechanical Engineering Department, Indian Institute of Technology
(Banaras Hindu University), Varanasi 221005, India
e-mail: [email protected]
analyzed by running the engine in dual fuel mode operation and liquid fuel mode
operation with respect to maximum diesel savings at different load conditions in the
dual fuel mode operation. It is found that in the dual fuel mode of operation, the
specific energy consumption is found to be the higher side at various load conditions.
As comparison to dual fuel mode operation, the brake thermal efficiency using diesel
is higher. In the dual fuel, the NOx emission was found to be very low which is
highly advantageous over diesel fuel alone, but HC and CO emissions are found to
be higher than the diesel.
The declination of crude oil deposits and its adverse effects on environment have
prompted to discover renewable source and environmental friendly of fuel. There is
some substitute for petroleum-based fuel-like vegetable oil, biogas, biodiesel, and
alcohol. The vegetable oils are one of the energy sources, and also, it has unique
compositions (fatty acids and glycerol) which provide a good base for making
biodiesel. In India, various types of edible (coconut, soybean, mustard, peanuts,
palm, etc.) and non-edible (neem, mahua, karanja, jojoba, jatropha, tung, etc.)
vegetable oil are available for producing the biodiesel. The purpose of this study is
to choose the suitable vegetable oil plants for the production of biodiesel. The
energy input and output analysis of biodiesel plants have been done in this study for
20-year plantation. For this purpose, considered biodiesel plants, namely jatropha,
mahua, neem, palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba and tung, are being used. This anal-
ysis includes energy input during oil extraction, cultivation, and biodiesel pro-
duction. The energy inputs are based on manpower, fossil fuel, electricity,
fertilizers, plants protection, and water for irrigation, expeller used for oil extrac-
tion, agricultural machinery, methanol, catalyst (H2SO4 and NaOH/KOH) and a
transesterification unit for biodiesel production. Net energy gain (NEG) and net
energy ratio (NER) are calculated for different biodiesel plants for 20-year plan-
tation. Palm and coconut consumed highest energy (117,122.32 and
122,832.84 MJ/ha) during cultivation. Maximum energy output is obtained for
palm (123,206.4 MJ/ha) and minimum for tung after its maturity. Maximum net
energy ratio is found for mahua (1.7164) and minimum for coconut (1.3034) oil
plants. The highest net energy gain for palm (41,689.14 MJ/a) and lowest for jojoba
(8494.92 MJ/ha) were found after maturity of plants. There are significant incre-
ments in energy output, net energy ratio, and net energy gain with the addition of
coproduct (glycerin). Above analysis has also done with methanol (used for bio-
diesel production) recovery and found reduction in energy input during biodiesel
production and also the improvement in net energy ratio and net energy gain.
6 Alternate Fuels for IC Engine 181
It has been evaluated that approximately 20% of energy should be achieved from
biodiesel by 2017. For this, it is expected to require 12–13 million ha biodiesel
feedstock plantation. Use of this oil to produce biodiesel is not feasible in India
because of high gap between demand and supply of edible oil. As per Indian
government policy, only non-edible oils are used for making biodiesel. The
non-edible oilseeds, fruit, or nut contain 30% or more oil. Around 300 or more
species of oil-bearing seeds trees are found in India [1, 2]. It has been identified that
approximately 75 plant species contain 30% or more oil in their seeds/kernel.
Generally, the poor people collect and sell the seeds. The biodiesel becomes more
attractive because it is produced from renewable resources and has low effects on
environments [3]. Among the various non-edible seed-bearing plants/trees such as
neem, jatropha curcas, and karanja (Pongamia pinnata) are rich in oil. And also, it
can be grown on all types of sands all over India. Non-edible oil can be only used as
biodiesel under Indian condition, which is produced in appreciable quantity and can
be grown in large scale on wastelands and non-cropped marginal lands. India has
around 63 million ha of wasteland, of which only three categories, namely
(1) grazing land and degraded pastures, (2) degraded land under plantation crop
categories, and (3) underutilized degraded notified forest land. Essentially the
alternative fuels are produced from renewable feedstocks with a lower negative
environmental impact. Day-by-day improvement and innovation in CI engines have
steered to excessive utilization of conventional fuel and acceleration of oil
extraction from the resources. Excess use of fossil fuels leads to rapid increase in
environmental pollution, greenhouse gasses and depletion of ozone layer. In the last
few decades swiftly increasing prices and uncertainties in the availability of pet-
roleum, therefore above problems have to lead to great interest on biodiesel pro-
duced from vegetable oil as a substitute for conventional diesel [1]. In the
transportation sectors, petroleum fuels are hugely used. Due to inadequate use of
these fossil fuels, the government is trying to find out substitute of these fuels [2].
To improve the energy security and sustainability, the wide range of investigations
has been done about energy management in the fuel production system. The pro-
duction of alternative fuel from vegetable oil should be investigated to achieve the
above objectives. Worldwide, many countries are a huge consumer of petroleum
fuel in the transportation sector [3]. The alternative fuels have become the subjects
of great interest because of lower environmental pollution, availability of feedstock,
and more consumption of fossil fuel. Among the various alternative sources such as
biodiesel, biomass, hydrogen, and biogas, biodiesel shows the similar properties as
diesel fuel [4]. The certain properties of biofuels like renewability, biodegradability,
and low global warming potential make more attractive to replace petroleum fuels.
These are obtained from biomass conversion. Biomass, which is extracted from
organic or living biological material, can be used as fuel for industrial production in
the energy production industry [5]. The main biofuels are biodiesel and bioethanol.
Bioethanol, known as alcohol, is produced from carbohydrates (found in sugar or
starch crops like sugarcane or corn) prepared by fermentation and distillation. There
is a significant reduction in greenhouse gas emissions when bioethanol is used as a
fuel [6, 7]. The biodiesel is an alternative fuel for diesel, produced from various
182 S. K. Shukla
feedstocks such as vegetable oil and animal fats. It has a lot of advantages such as
low environmental pollutions and biodegradability, and use of these fuels reduced
the dependency on foreign country for import of petroleum [8]. De Souza et al. [9]
have studied the life-cycle emissions and energy balance of palm biodiesel. They
have conducted wide range of investigation on life-cycle assessment and energy
cost. The essential factors are considered such as energy balance, reduction in
global warming potential, and biodiesel yields for life-cycle assessments. Sheehan
et al. [8] have conducted the life-cycle inventory on energy consumption for bio-
diesel production from soybean oil in the USA. During the life-cycle inventory,
they considered all inputs of biodiesel production from soybean oil. There are six
stages for LCA: cultivation of soybean, transportation of soybean and oil, oil
extraction, biodiesel production, distribution of biodiesel, and its uses in engines.
According to ISO standard [10], the study was performed to evaluate the energy
life-cycle assessment of biodiesel plants for 20 years. For this purpose, we considered
three stages of biodiesel production process: cultivation of crops, oil extraction, and
biodiesel production. In the cultivation phase, various energy inputs include human
labor, agricultural machinery, fossil fuel, fertilizer, chemical, seed, electricity, and
water for irrigation. Oil extraction phase includes electricity, decorticator, oil expeller,
and filter. Biodiesel production phase includes alcohol (methanol), catalyst (acid
H2SO4 and base NaOH/KOH), and electricity. The data have been collected from
various agricultural sites and research papers for the above study.
2.1 Methodology
This energy analysis is presented in terms of net energy gain (NEG) and net energy
ratio (NER), and NER and NEG can be defined as the ratio of total energy output to
total energy input and the differences between total energy output and input for one
year. The energy equivalent coefficient for different inputs and outputs is given in
Table 1. There are following parameters considered during the calculation of
energy input and output of different biodiesel plants.
1. Consider only those plants which are cultivated for long time.
2. Jatropha, mahua, neem, coconut, palm, karanja, jojoba, and tung oil plants.
3. Cultivation time 20 year.
4. Plant survival 100% taken for all calculations.
5. Plantation area is 1 ha.
6. All the input and output are converted into its corresponding energy.
6 Alternate Fuels for IC Engine 183
7. The inputs are fertilizers, manpower, machinery, fossil fuel, methanol, catalyst,
electricity, etc.
8. Biodiesel is final product.
9. Glycerin is the only coproduct.
Cultivation phase: This is the first stage of the energy life-cycle assessment for
biodiesel production. Cultivation of crops comprises various activities such as
seeding (by seeds, stem cutting, sowing in nursery beds, etc.), pit preparation, field
preparation (tilling and weed removal), plantation practices (direct planting by
seeds and transplanting), use of poly bags, fertilizers application (urea during
nursery and then nitrogen, phosphorous, potassium, di-ammonium phosphate
(DAP), cow dung (gobar), etc., are used), intercropping, irrigation, weeding,
pruning, and harvesting. The agricultural input data for jatropha [11, 12], mahua
184 S. K. Shukla
[13, 14], neem [15, 16], karanja [17, 18], jojoba [19], tung [20], coconut [21, 22],
and palm [23, 24] oil are adopted from National Oilseeds and Vegetable Oils
Development Board (Ministry of Agriculture, Govt. of India). The production of
seeds from plants depends on its gestation period and maturity time. The gestation
period of jatropha, mahua, neem, palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba, and tung is 1–2, 8,
5, 3, 6, 4, 4, and 4 years, respectively [11–24]. The maximum seed yield after
maturity of plants is 4000, 4500, 4876, 18,000 FFB (fresh fruit bunch), 10,620 nuts/
ha, 9000, 1125, and 3625 kg/ha/year for jatropha, mahua, neem, coconut, palm,
karanja, jojoba, and tung, respectively.
Oil Extraction: Crushing of seeds for oil extraction is the second stage of energy
life-cycle assessment for biodiesel production. Decortications and seed pressing are
the process carried out during oil extraction phase. The harvested fruits were
decorticated, i.e., extract the seeds from fruit shell. The decorticator is available in
IIT (BHU) Varanasi of 1.5 kW with 150 kg/h capacity. Screw press expeller of
5.5 kW with capacity 50 kg/h is used for extraction of oil from seed. Filtering of oil
after oil extraction is carried out with filter press of 1.5 kW with capacity of 600 kg/
h [25]. Oil and oil cake are obtained after crushing the seeds. The calculation has
been done with 100% efficient screw press for all the seeds. The oil content in
various seeds is given in Table 2.
Biodiesel production: Conversion of vegetable oil into biodiesel is the third stage
of energy life-cycle assessment. Direct use or blends, microemulsion, pyrolysis, and
transesterification are the biodiesel conversion technique to produce biodiesel from
vegetable oils or animal fats [26]. Among the above process, transesterification
reaction of vegetable oil or animal fats is a universal technique to produce biodiesel
(known as methyl or ethyl ester). There are two steps for biodiesel conversion,
esterification and transesterification. Esterification is the pretreatment of oil with
alcohol (30% by volume) and the acid catalyst (1% H2SO4 by volume) to reduce
the fatty acid, and this leads to avoid the soap formation and also increase the yield.
Transesterification reaction has been carried out at 65 °C temperature for 2 h with
alcohol (methanol or ethanol 30%, generally by volume) in the presence of catalyst
(NaOH/KOH, 0.5–1% wt/volume) [26–29]. The catalysts are used to improve the
6 Alternate Fuels for IC Engine 185
reaction rate and also biodiesel yield. Table 2 shows the biodiesel conversion
efficiency and calorific value of biodiesel.
Figure 1 shows the energy input of different biodiesel plants (jatropha, mahua,
neem, palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba, and tung) for 20 years. The figure depicts
initially (from seedling to gestation period) lower input, and then after, its value
increases and reaches maximum at maturity of plants. The energy input is
increasing (for coconut and palm from) and decreasing (for jatropha, mahua, neem,
and tung) order from seedling to gestation period of plants. This is because the
material (fertilizers) requirement increases for coconut and palm up to the gestation
period and the reverse trend for remaining plants. After completion of the gestation
period, plant starts fruiting, and after that, material inputs (fertilizers) are totally
stopped or reduced that is why there are lower energy inputs in the cultivation of
crops. The yields increase from gestation period to its maturity and on the same
time oil extraction and biodiesel also started, and hence, total energy input increases
up to the plant stabilization periods. The increasing of energy input due to the more
chemical (methanol, NaOH and H2SO4) is needed during biodiesel productions
when plants produce high yield. Increasing order of energy input during the first
year is of the plantation are mahua, neem, karanja, tung, coconut, jojoba, jatropha
and palm, respectively. Initially, higher energy inputs for palm, jatropha, coconut,
and jojoba are due to the higher requirement of fertilizers and chemical.
Fig. 2 shows the energy output for different biodiesel plants for 20 years. It is
clear from the figure that the initially (from seedling to gestation period of plants)
there is no output because of only cultivation of crops. After completion of the
gestation period, plants start yielding, and its value increases up to its maturity.
Therefore, maximum output achieved at maturity of plants. Figure 3 shows the
energy input and output after maturity of plants. Energy inputs for jatropha, mahua,
neem, palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba, and tung are 23,373.75, 33,271.93, 27,623.93,
81,517.26, 44,502.43, 68,597.72, 13,254.78, 27,485.55 MJ/ha, and energy outputs
are 32,970.53, 57,109.5, 39,690.64, 123,206.4, 59,309.81, 91,180.485, 21,749.70,
and 37,696.2 MJ/ha, respectively. Increasing order of energy inputs and outputs is
jojoba, jatropha, neem, tung, coconut, karanja, and palm. Maximum input and output
are obtained for palm biodiesel and minimum for jojoba oil plants.
3.2 Net Energy Ratio (NER) and Net Energy Gain (NEG)
Figure 4 shows the net energy ratio of different biodiesel plants for 20 years.
Initially, there is no output that is why NER is zero; when the plant starts fruiting,
then its value increases. Starting of NER depends upon the gestation period of that
plant. All the plants achieve its maximum NER at its maturity. Figure 5 shows the
net energy ratio after maturity of plants when biodiesel is only output. NER after
maturity for jatropha, mahua, neem, palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba, and tung
biodiesel plants is 1.4106, 1.7164, 1.4368, 1.5114, 1.3034, 1.3292, 1.6409, and
6 Alternate Fuels for IC Engine 187
1.3715, respectively. Maximum NER is obtained for mahua and minimum for
coconut biodiesel plants. Increasing order of NER is coconut, karanja, tung, jat-
ropha, neem, palm, jojoba, and mahua. Figure 6 shows the NER after maturity of
plants when the product (biodiesel) and coproduct (glycerin) both are considered as
output. NER for above biodiesel plants with considering coproducts are 1.5904,
1.8641, 1.5993, 1.5991, 1.4084, 1.4627, 1.7822, and 1.5032 respectively. With the
addition of coproduct (glycerin) there is significant increase in NER has been
found. Net energy ratio increased by 12.75, 9.19, 11.31, 5.80, 8.05, 10.04, 8.61, and
9.60% for jatropha, mahua, neem, palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba, and tung,
respectively, with the addition of coproduct (glycerin).
Figure 7 shows the variation of net energy gain of different biodiesel plants for
20 years. The NEG decreases from seedling to certain period and constant up to the
gestation period and after that increases up to the maturity of the plants. Initially,
there is no output that is why there is negative net energy gain for all biodiesel
plants. The net energy gain is in decreasing order from seeding to gestation period
when fruiting started, the NEG is in increasing order up to the maturity value.
Requirement of fertilizers increases from seedling to growing period due to this
very deep curve for palm and coconut but reverse for remaining biodiesel plants.
Figure 8 shows the net energy gain (NEG) after maturity of different biodiesel
plants. Net energy gain for jatropha, mahua, neem, palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba,
and tung is 9596.78, 23,837.57, 12,066.71, 41,689.14, 13,807.38, 22,582.77,
8494.92, and 10,210.68 MJ/ha after maturity of plants. Increasing order of NEG is
188 S. K. Shukla
jojoba, jatropha, tung, neem, coconut, karanja, mahua, and palm, respectively. Net
energy gain is maximum for palm and minimum for jojoba biodiesel plants.
Figure 9 shows the net energy gain when the product (biodiesel) and coproduct
(glycerin) both are considered as output. With the addition of glycerin, net energy gain
6 Alternate Fuels for IC Engine 189
increased by 43.79, 22, 28.03, 17.14, 24.38, 40.55, 22.05, and 35.47%, respectively,
for jatropha, mahua, neem, palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba, and tung after maturity.
During the life assessment of biodiesel plants, methanol shares very high energy
input. The esterification and transesterification have been done for biodiesel
190 S. K. Shukla
jojoba, and tung is 41.53, 46.19, 41.45, 19.46, 46.92, 42.24, 45.17, and 42.11%,
respectively. Increasing order of energy input reduction after methanol recovery is
palm, neem, jatropha, tung, karanja, jojoba, mahua, and coconut biodiesel plants.
Figure 11a shows the net energy ratio for different biodiesel plants after maturity
of plants with and without methanol recovery. Net energy ratios are 2.413, 3.19,
2.454, 1.877, 2.511, 2.301, 2.993, and 2.369, respectively, for jatropha, mahua,
neem, palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba, and tung with methanol recovery. Net energy
ratio increased by 71.06, 85.85, 70.79, 24.19, 92.65, 73.11, 82.38, and 72.76%,
respectively, for jatropha, mahua, neem, palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba, and tung
with methanol recovery.
Figure 11b shows the net energy gain for different biodiesel plants after maturity
of plants with and without methanol recovery. Net energy gains are 19,306.6,
39,205.51, 23,517.91, 57,553.26, 35,688.98, 51,562.25, 14,482.41, and
21,786.5 MJ/ha, respectively, for jatropha, mahua, neem, palm, coconut, karanja,
jojoba, and tung with methanol recovery. Net energy gain increased by 101.17,
64.47, 94.89, 38.05, 158.47, 128.32, 70.48, and 113.37% for jatropha, mahua,
neem, palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba, and tung with methanol recovery.
To compare the vegetable oil plants for production of biodiesel, the Pugh matrix is
used with the use of some selection criteria. The jatropha oil plant is selected as
“base line,” and it scored S against all of the selected criteria. The mahua, neem,
palm, coconut, karanja, jojoba, and tung vegetable oil plants are compared for each
of the criteria. If the selection criteria are:
192 S. K. Shukla
Fig. 11 a and b Comparison of NER and net energy gain with and without methanol recovery
4 Conclusion
Due to fuel crisis, alternative fuels have been interesting option for everyone in
country. To fulfill energy requirements, there has been growing interest in alter-
native fuels like methyl alcohol, biogas, biodiesels, hydrogen, and producer gas
ethyl alcohol to provide a suitable diesel alternative for internal combustion
engines. For a very efficient method, gasification ion is used to extract energy from
different types of organic materials and also has applications as a clean waste
6 Alternate Fuels for IC Engine 195
the heating of plant oils [36]. To extract energy from many different types of
organic materials, gasification method is used. Gasification is the decentralized
energy conversion system which operates economically even for small scale [37].
Partial combustion of biomass in the gasifier generates producer gas that can be
used for heating purposes in internal combustion engines. Producer gas could be
used in CI engine, without any modification in the engine. In present study, an
attempt is made to utilize the biomass residue as feedstock for biomass gasification.
The diesel replacement with the use of producer gas is also analyzed. The emission
and performance characteristics of the engine were studied for various gas flow
rates at different loads. When operated on dual fuel mode, a reduction in the
consumption of diesel fuel was observed though there was a decrement in the brake
thermal efficiency. In the dual fuel, NOx emission was found to be very low which
is a main benefit of dual fuel mode over diesel fuel alone, but the emission of HC
and CO for dual fuel mode was found to be greater than diesel fuel. A typical
composition of producer gas generated by biomass gasification on volumetric basis
is given in Table 4.
6 Methodology
Table 5 List of various parts of layout of experimental gasifier unit shown in Fig. 1
(1) Hopper (14) Blower
(2) Reactor first (15) Cyclone separator
(3) Air nozzle (16) Cyclone drain pipe
(4) Reactor second (17) Catch pot
(5) Grid (18) Fire valve
(6) Water seal (19) Chimney
(7) Water pump (20) Gas checking point
(8) Thermocouple (21) Three way gas filter
(9) Down draft (22) Dry filter using rice husk
(10) Up draft (23) Dry filter using wood dust
(11) Steam jet control valve (24) Cotton filter
(12) Venture (25) Producer gas outlet
(13) Butter fly valve or gas supply (26) Tar collecting pot
the PG–air mixture to the combustion chamber of the engine through inlet mani-
fold. On the volumetric basis, the liquid fuel flow rate was measured. For the
measurement of emission concentration, AVL 444 digas analyzer was used. To
measure the flow rate of producer gas, a gas flow rate meter was used. Producer gas
control valve (PG-valve) controls the producer gas supply rate. There was no
control on aspirated air. PG-valve is slowly opened till the engine started faltering,
to know the maximum intake of PG by engine. Later PG-valve is turned back
slightly, and the intake of PG at that point was taken as the maximum replacement
in the engine for each operating condition. At five different loading conditions 1, 2,
198 S. K. Shukla
3, 4, 5 kW using diesel, experiments were carried out on the engine, diesel + PG,
respectively, as a fuel to the engine. The calorific value of producer gas was
calculated from the gas composition, and the composition of producer gas was
determined using AVL 444 digas analyzer. The different parameters such as
specific energy consumption (SEC), thermal efficiency (BTE), speed of engine are
calculated and compared. The data for emissions from the engine were recorded
during these trials and compared with the baseline data using diesel fuels.
6 Alternate Fuels for IC Engine 199
The performance of the engine is mainly projected by calculating the brake thermal
efficiency of the engine. It shows the behavior of combustion of the engine.
Figure 13 shows the brake thermal efficiency (BTE) and variation of brake power at
different load conditions. The BTE of the diesel fuel is higher than that operated
under dual fuel mode. It has been observed that there is a relative reduction in brake
thermal efficiency of the engine with the engine operated under dual fuel mode at all
loads. In dual fuel mode, the efficiency achieved 18.68% is maximum so far and
17.96% for D+PG (CD) and D+PG (W), whereas the maximum efficiency achieved
by diesel fuel is 20.93%. The main reason for the decrement in the BTE is the lower
calorific value of producer gas, which holds more combusted mixture that enters
into the engine. Producer gas at higher temperature is evolved from the engine so
that the density of producer gas is decreased, which leads to reduction in the mass
flow rate of air and producer gas required for combustion. For this type of com-
bustion, low oxygen level is needed. The cause of incomplete combustion in the
combustion chamber is the insufficient oxygen [39]. It was found that when the
engine was operated with a large fraction of the fuel energy from producer gas
particularly the detonation or knocking occurred at high load. It was also noticed
that the sound-like knocking from engine reducers as intake of producer gas
reduces.
Fig. 13 Variation of engine load on brake thermal efficiency in dual fuel mode
200 S. K. Shukla
The brake specific energy consumption for the engine running on mixture of diesel
and producer gas has been used to analyze the performance of CI engine at different
loading conditions and diesel. The variation of specific energy consumption, brake
power, brake specific fuel consumption, to compare the two fuels having different
calorific values and density, may be weak parameter; however, it has been depicted
in Fig. 14. The brake specific energy consumption to compare the performance of
CI engine in dual fuel mode is calculated from the fuel consumption and calorific
value of diesel and producer gas. It has been revealed that specific energy con-
sumption in dual fuel is higher than that of diesel mode at all load conditions. The
relation between specific energy consumption and brake thermal efficiency seems to
be inversely proportional, and hence, the value of brake thermal efficiency reduces
by using the producer gas with air. The same may be attributed to the more energy
content with increased gas flow rate of wood (W) and cow dung (CD) producer gas
in the combustion chamber.
higher as compared to diesel fuel mode. Reduction in the oxygen amount required
for complete combustion reduces due to high-temperature mixture of producer gas
and air, flowing to the engine. This phenomenon increases the CO emission due to
incomplete combustion [40].
The formation of NOx attributed to mainly two reasons, higher temperature and
availability of oxygen. Nitrogen is inert at low temperature; however, in higher
temperatures such as 1000 °C, nitrogen reacts with oxygen and forms oxides of
nitrogen [42]. Thus, the emission of NOx depends upon temperature in combustion
202 S. K. Shukla
Fig. 16 Variation of brake power on HC emission at varying load in dual fuel mode
chamber and also varies with the applied load. From Fig. 17, it is observed that
NOx emission increases with increase in load for all the fuels, i.e., D+PG fuel
(wood, cow dung) and diesel. The nitrogen with oxygen causes formation of NOx at
high temperature in combustion chamber at high load. Insignificant difference in
NO emission was recorded at low brake power, while operating the engine on dual
fuel mode and diesel fuel mode, but the emission of NOx increases as brake power
increases for combinations of diesel and producer gas and diesel fuel. The excellent
advantage of dual fuel mode is that there is no possibility of lower emission in dual
fuel mode than diesel mode.
Fig. 17 Effect of brake power on NOx emission at varying load in dual fuel mode
6 Alternate Fuels for IC Engine 203
8 Conclusion
Glossary
References
1. Balat, M., & Balat, H. (2008). A critical review of bio-diesel as a vehicular fuel. Energy
Conversion and Management, 49, 2727–2741.
2. Basha, S. A., Gopal, K. R., & Jebaraj, S. (2009). A review on biodiesel production,
combustion, emissions and performance. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 13,
1628–1634.
3. IEA, International Energy Agency. (2012). http://www.iea.org/stats/.
4. Najafi, G., Ghobadian, B., Tavakoli, T., Buttsworth, D. R., Yusaf, T., & Faizollahnejad, M.
(2009). Performance and exhaust emissions of a gasoline engine with ethanol blended
gasoline fuels using artificial neural network. Applied Energy, 86, 630–639.
5. Ghobadian, B., Najafi, G., Rahimi, H., & Yusaf, T. (2009). Future of renewable energies in
Iran. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 13, 689–695.
6. Bounds, A. (2007). OECD warns against biofuels subsidies. Financial Times. Available at:
www.ft.com/cms/s/0/e780d216-5fd5-11dc-b0fe-0000779fd2ac.html.
7. Woods, J., Brown, G., & Estrin, A. (2005). Bioethanol greenhouse gas calculator. London,
UK: Home-Grown Cereals Authority. Biomass Energy Group, Centre for Environmental
Policy Imperial College. www.publications.hgca.com/publications/documents/Bioethanol_
Greenhouse_Gas_Calculator_Appendix_4.pdf.
8. Sheehan, J., Camobreco, V., Duffield, J., Graboski, M., & Shapouri, H. (1998). Life cycle
inventory of biodiesel and petroleum diesel for use in an urban bus. Final report. Golden, CO
(US): National Renewable Energy Lab. www.nrel.gov/docs/legosti/fy98/24089.pdf.
9. De Souza, S. P., Pacca, S., De Avila, M. T., & Borges, J. L. B. (2010). Greenhouse gas
emissions and energy balance of palm oil biofuel. Renewable Energy, 35, 2552–2561.
10. ISO14044. (2006). Environmental management-life cycle assessment and requirements and
guidelines. Geneva: International Organisation for Standardisation (ISO).
11. Kureel, R. S., Singh, C. B., Gupta, A. K., & Pandey, A. Jatropha: An alternate source for
biodiesel. National Oilseeds & Vegetable Oils Development Board (Ministry of Agriculture,
Govt. of India), website: www.novodboard.org.
12. Lele, S. (2007). The cultivation of Jatropha curcas. Available at: http://www.svlele.com/
jatropha_plant.htm.
13. Kureel, R. S., Kishore, R., & Dutt, D. Mahua: A potential tree borne oilseed. National
Oilseeds & Vegetable Oils Development Board (Ministry of Agriculture, Govt. of India),
website: www.novodboard.org.
14. Lele, S. (2007). The cultivation of Mahua (Madhuca indica). Available at: http://www.svlele.
com/mahua.htm/.
15. Kureel, R. S., Kishore, R., & Dutt, D. Neem: A tree borne oilseed. National Oilseeds &
Vegetable Oils Development Board (Ministry of Agriculture, Govt. of India), website: www.
novodboard.org.
16. Lele, S. (2007). The cultivation of Mahua (Madhuca indica). Available at: http://www.svlele.
com/neem.htm.
6 Alternate Fuels for IC Engine 207
17. Kureel, R. S., Singh, C. B., Gupta, A. K., & Pandey, A. Karanja a potential source of
bio-diesel: An alternate source for biodiesel. National Oilseeds & Vegetable Oils
Development Board (Ministry of Agriculture, Govt. of India), website: www.novodboard.
org.
18. Agarwal, A. K., & Rajamanoharan, K. (2009). Experimental investigations of performance
and emissions of Karanja oil and its blends in a single cylinder agricultural diesel engine.
Applied Energy, 86, 106–112.
19. Kureel, R. S., Kishore, R., & Dutt, D. Jojoba: A potential tree borne oilseed. National
Oilseeds & Vegetable Oils Development Board (Ministry of Agriculture, Govt. of India),
website: www.novodboard.org.
20. Kureel, R. S., Singh, C. B., Gupta, A. K., & Pandey, A. Tung: A potential tree borne oilseed.
National Oilseeds & Vegetable Oils Development Board (Ministry of Agriculture, Govt. of
India), website: www.novodboard.org.
21. How, H. G., Masjuki, H. H., Kalam, M. A., & Teoh, Y. H. (2014). An investigation of the
engine performance, emissions and combustion characteristics of coconut biodiesel in a high
pressure common-rail diesel engine. Energy, 69, 749–759.
22. https://www.nabard.org/english/plant_coconut.aspx.
23. Oil Palm Cultivation Practices: Directorate of Oil Palm Research (Indian Council of
Agricultural Research) Pedavegi-534450, West Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh. Website:
http://dopr.gov.in.
24. https://www.nabard.org/english/plant_oilpalm.aspx.
25. Pandey, K. K., Pragya, N., & Sahoo, P. K. (2011). Life cycle assessment of small-scale
high-input Jatropha biodiesel production in India. Applied Energy, 88, 4831–4839.
26. Girard, P., & Fallot, A. (2006). Review of existing and emerging technologies for the
production of biofuels in developing countries. Energy for Sustainable Development, 10,
92–108.
27. Maeda, H., Hagiwara, S., Nabetani, H., Sagara, Y., Soerawidjaya, T. H., Tambunan, A. H.,
et al. (2008). Biodiesel fuels from palm oil via the non-catalytic transesterification in a bubble
column reactor at atmospheric pressure: A kinetic study. Renewable Energy, 33, 1629–1636.
28. Alamu, O., Waheed, M., & Jekayinfa, S. (2007). Biodiesel production from Nigerian palm
kernel oil: Effect of KOH concentration on yield. Energy for Sustainable Development, 11,
77–82.
29. Noiroj, K., Intarapong, P., Luengnaruemitchai, A., & Jai-In, S. (2009). A comparative study
of KOH/Al2O3 and KOH/NaY catalysts for biodiesel production via transesterification from
palm oil. Renewable Energy, 34, 1145–1150.
30. Banapurmath, N. R., et al. (2009). Combust ion characteristics of a 4-stroke CI engine
operated on Honge oil, Neem and Rice Bran oils when directly injected and dual fuelled with
producer gas induction. Renewable Energy, 34, 1877–1884.
31. Ramadhas, A. S., et al. (2008). Dual fuel mode operation in diesel engines using renewable
fuels: Rubber seed oil and coir-pith producer gas. Renewable Energy, 33, 2077–2083.
32. Banapurmath, N. R., & Tewari, P. G. (2009). Comparative performance studies of a 4-stroke
CI engine operated on dual fuel mode with producer gas and Honge oil and its methyl ester
(HOME) with and without carburetor. Renewable Energy, 34, 1009–1015.
33. Young, S., Yoon, S. J., Kim, Y. K., & Lee, J. (2011, July 5). Gasification and power
generation characteristics of woody biomass utilizing a downdraft gasifier. Climate Change
Technology Research Division, Korea Institute of Energy Research, 71-2 Jang-dong,
Yuseong-gu, Daejeon 305-343, Republic of Korea.
34. Book of wood gas as engine fuel, food and agriculture organization of the United Nation,
M-38. ISBN 92-5-102436.
35. Banapurmath, N. R., et al. (2008). Experimental investigations of a four-stroke single cylinder
direct inject ion diesel engine operated on dual fuel mode with producer gas as inducted fuel
and Honge oil and its methyl ester (HOME) as injected fuels. Renewable Energy, 33,
2007–2018.
208 S. K. Shukla
36. Singh, R. N., Singh, S. P., & Pathak, B. S. (2007). Investigations on operation of CI engine
using producer gas and rice bran oil in mixed fuel mode. Renewable Energy, 32, 1565–1580.
37. Kothadia, H. B. (2011, May). Effect of size of lignite on gas generation rate, calorific value of
gas and gasifier efficiency of downdraft gasifier. M. Tech. dissertation, Department of
Mechanical Engineering, Institute of Technology, Nirma University, Ahmedabad-382481.
38. McKendry, P. (2002). Energy production from biomass (part 2): Conversion technologies.
Bioresource Technology, 83, 47–54.
39. Sharma, K. A. (2009). Experimental study on 75 kWth downdraft (biomass) gasifier system.
Renewable Energy, 34, 1726–1733.
40. Murugan, S. (2010). Design and development of downdraft gasifier for operating CI engine
on dual fuel mode, 53.
41. Hernandez, J. J., Aranda-Almsnsa, G., & Bula, A. (2010). Gasification of biomass wastes in
an entrained flow gasifier: Effect of the particle size and the residence time. Fuel Processing
Technology, 91, 681–692.
42. Pengmei, Lv, Zhenhong, Yuan, Ma Longlong, Wu, Chuangzhi, Chen Yong, & Jingxu, Zhu.
(2007). Hydrogen-rich gas production from biomass air and oxygen/steam gasification in a
downdraft gasifier. Renewable Energy, 32, 2173–2185.
43. Lokesh, A. C., Mahesh, N. S., Gowda, B., Kumar, R., & White, P. (2015). Neem biodiesel—
A sustainability study. Journal of Biomass to Biofuel, 1. ISSN 2368-596.
44. Mousavi-Avval, S. H., Rafiee, S., Jafari, A., & Mohammadi, A. (2011). Optimization of
energy consumption for soybean production using data envelopment analysis
(DEA) approach. Applied Energy, 88, 3765–3772.
45. Canakci, M., Topakci, M., Akinci, I., & Ozmerzi, A. (2005). Energy use pattern of some field
crops and vegetable production: Case study for Antalya Region, Turkey. Energy Conversion
and Management, 46, 655–666.
46. Mohammadi, A., & Omid, M. (2010). Economical analysis and relation between energy
inputs and yield of greenhouse cucumber production in Iran. Applied Energy, 87(1), 191–196.
47. Heidari, M. D., Omid, M., & Mohammadi, A. (2012). Measuring productive efficiency of
horticultural greenhouses in Iran: A data envelopment analysis approach. Expert Systems with
Applications, 39, 1040–1045.
48. Kitani, O. (1999). CIGR handbook of agricultural engineering. Energy and biomass
engineering (Vol. 5). St. Joseph, MI: ASAE Publications.
49. Rafiee, S., Mousavi Avval, S. H., & Mohammadi, A. (2010). Modeling and sensitivity
analysis of energy inputs for apple production in Iran. Energy, 35, 3301–3306.
50. Rajaeifar, M. A., Ghobadian, B., Safa, M., & Heidari, M. D. (2014). Energy life-cycle
assessment and CO2 emissions analysis of soybean based biodiesel: A case study. Journal of
Cleaner Production, 66, 233–241.
51. Huo, H., Wang, M., Bloyd, C., & Putsche, V. (2008). Life-cycle assessment of energy use and
greenhouse gas emissions of soybean-derived biodiesel and renewable fuels. Environmental
Science and Technology, 43, 750–756.
52. Beheshti Tabar, I., Keyhani, A., & Rafiee, S. (2010). Energy balance in Iran’s agronomy
(1990–2006). Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 14(2), 849–855.
53. Kumar, M., & Dwivedi, K. N. (2009). Jatroph: Ek parichay. Kanpur: Chandrashekhar Azad
University of Agriculture and Technology Press.
54. Achten, W. M. J., et al. (2010). Life cycle assessment of Jatropha biodiesel as transportation
fuel in rural India. Applied Energy, 87(12), 3652–3660.
55. Kumar, S., Singh, J., Nanoti, S. M., & Garg, M. O. (2012). A comprehensive life cycle
assessment (LCA) of Jatropha biodiesel production in India. Bioresource Technology, 110,
723–729.
56. Puhan, S., Vedaraman, N., Ram, B. V. B., Sankarnarayanan, G., & Jeychandran, K. (2005).
Mahua oil (Madhuca indica seed oil) methyl ester as biodiesel-preparation and emission
characterstics. Biomass and Bioenergy, 28, 87–93.
57. Raheman, H., & Ghadge, S. V. (2007). Performance of compression ignition engine with
mahua (Madhuca indica) biodiesel. Fuel, 86, 2568–2573.
6 Alternate Fuels for IC Engine 209
58. Ragit, S. S., Mohapatra, S. K., Kundu, K., & Gill, P. (2011). Optimization of neem methyl
ester from transesterification process and fuel characterization as a diesel substitute. Biomass
and Bioenergy, 35(3), 1138–1144.
59. Karmakar, A., Karmakar, S., & Mukherjee, S. (2012). Biodiesel production from neem
towards feedstock diversification: Indian perspective. Renewable and Sustainable Energy
Reviews, 16, 1050–1060.
60. Haas, M. J. (2005). Improving the economics of biodiesel production through the use of low
value lipids as feedstocks: Vegetable oil soapstock. Fuel Processing Technology, 86,
1087–1096.
61. Yusup, S., & Khan, M. (2010). Basic properties of crude rubber seed oil and crude palm oil
blend as a potential feedstock for biodiesel production with enhanced cold flow character-
istics. Biomass and Bioenergy, 34(10), 1523–1526.
62. Queiroz, A. G., Franc, L., & Ponte, M. X. (2012). The life cycle assessment of biodiesel from
palm oil (“dendê”) in the Amazon. Biomass and Bioenergy, 36, 50–59.
63. Siregara, K., Tambunanb, A. H., Irwantoc, A. K., Wirawand, S. S., & Arakie, T. (2015).
A comparison of life cycle assessment on Oil Palm (Elaeis guineensis Jacq.) and Physic nut
(Jatropha curcas Linn.) as feedstock for Biodiesel production in Indonesia. Conference and
Exhibition Indonesia—New, Renewable Energy and Energy Conservation (The 3rd
Indo-EBTKE ConEx 2014). Energy Procedia, 65, 170–179.
64. Cho, H. J., Kim, J. K., Ahmed, F., & Yeo, Y. K. (2013). Life-cycle greenhouse gas emissions
and energy balances of a biodiesel production from palm fatty acid distillate (PFAD). Applied
Energy, 111, 479–488.
65. Naik, M., Meher, L. C., Naik, S. N., & Das, L. M. (2008). Production of biodiesel from high
free fatty acid Karanja (Pongamia pinnata) oil. Biomass and Bioenergy, 32, 354–357.
66. Dhar, A., & Agarwal, A. K. (2014). Performance, emissions and combustion characteristics of
Karanja biodiesel in a transportation engine. Fuel, 119, 70–80.
67. Shehata, M. S., & Razek, S. M. A. (2011). Experimental investigation of diesel engine
performance and emission characteristics using jojoba/diesel blend and sunflower oil. Fuel,
90, 886–897.
68. Shang, Q., Jiang, W., Lu, H., & Liang, B. (2010). Properties of Tung oil biodiesel and its
blends with 0# diesel. Bioresource Technology, 101, 826–828.
69. Gadhave, S. L., & Ragit, S. S. (2016, July). Optimization of Tung oil methyl ester from
transesterification process and fuel characterization as diesel substitute. International Journal
of Latest Trends in Engineering and Technology (IJLTET), 7(2), 116–120. ISSN 2278-621X.
Part III
Robotics and Automation
Chapter 7
Robotics: History, Trends, and Future
Directions
Keywords Robot Robotics Hmanoid Sensors Mechatronics
Kinematics Dynamics Entertainment robotics Medical robotics
Actuators Artificail Intelligence History
1 Introduction
Talk of a robot and the image that immediately conjures in the mind is that of a
humanoid catering to the daily chores! Possibly the basis of this image is the
popular conceptualization of robots largely through science fiction. Over the ages,
many science fiction writers imagined human-like mechanical beings with
tremendous physical and intellectual capabilities. Starting with Czech playwright
Karel Capek, these machines were mostly referred by the science fiction writers and
moviemakers as robots. This is in spite of that fact that even the most sophisticated
robots of today are nowhere near to what their imaginations created!
Robots and robotics are driven by the urge to create or synthesize machines that
could replicate human function and capabilities. This involves use of mechanisms,
sensors, and actuators and advanced levels of computer programming. A multitude
of fundamental concepts ranging over a spectrum of different areas of engineering is
involved. This chapter presents a basic understanding of a robot in the current
perspective. Further, the current trends and future directions are presented.
2 History of Robotics
People have long imagined machines endowed with human abilities. Dreamt of
automatons that could move on its own and mechanical devices that could perform
rational reasoning. Human-like machines are described in many stories and are
pictured in sculptures, paintings, and drawings. Not only automatons have been a
fascination in the myths and legends across cultures, as early as fourth century BC
many mechanized implements have been conceived. The Greek mathematician
Archytas of Tarentum conceived a mechanical bird! Aristotle imagined abolition of
slavery through a surge in automatons and wrote in The Politics:
For suppose that every tool we had could perform its task, either at our bidding or itself
perceiving the need………shuttles in a loom could fly to and fro and a plucker play a lyre
of their own accord, then master craftsmen would have no need of servants nor masters of
slaves.
Aristotle
The Politics [1]
This led to a number of automatons and automatic mechanisms being built in and
around 1700. These automatons were capable of drawing, flying, and few could act
and play music. French inventor and engineer, Jacques de Vaucanson (1709–1782),
created some of the most sophisticated automatons that moved in startlingly lifelike
ways. His masterpiece The Digesting Duck was built in 1738. The mechanical duck
could quack, flap its wings, paddle, drink water, and eat and digest grain!
Some 17 years before, Joseph Capek wrote the short story Opilec describing
automats, Frank Baum in 1900 invented one of the literary world’s most beloved
robots in The Wonderful Wizard of Oz. It is Tin Woodsman, a mechanical man in
search of a heart! In 1921, Joseph’s brother Karel Capek introduced the word robot
in his play R.U.R. (Rossum’s Universal Robots). The play centers around a mad
scientist who tries to usurp the powers of God by proving that man has acquired the
technology and intelligence to create life. The artificial human is a magnificent
worker and a tireless laborer who does not complain! The term robot is derived
from the Czech word “robota” that means servitude. Prior to Rossum’s Universal
Robots, the term automaton was used.
Science fiction writer Issac Asimov made robots popular through a collection of
short stories published between 1938 and 1942. Asimov introduced the word
“robotics.” Asimov in his story Runaround describes robotics as the study of robots
and enumerated three “laws of robotics”—the fundamental principles based on
which he defines his robots and their interaction within the worlds he creates.
Thereafter, robots have been a part of literary and cinematic fiction.
More often than not, robots are shown to take over the world and be bad guys
rather than as man’s friend! Most significant of these are the images of The
Terminator (1984) and its numerous sequels. There are instances of robots being
used as more than a simple killer. These include The Day the Earth Stood Still
(1951 and 2008); Robbie in Forbidden Planet (1956); 2001: A Space Odyssey
(1968); or A.I. Artificial Intelligence (2001).
Robots in real life are far away from what have been created by the science fiction
writers in their imagined worlds. Nevertheless, robots rudimentarily similar to those
envisioned in R.U.R. have become a reality! Today robots are routinely used to
substitute for manual labor in an effort to minimize human error and injury. Robots
are also seen as a way to increase the production efficiency.
The transition from science fiction to reality has its genesis in a chance meeting
in 1956 between entrepreneur Joseph Engelberger and inventor George Devol.
216 S. M. Hazarika and U. S. Dixit
3 What Is a Robot?
Even though robots have penetrated into a number of domains and have taken various
forms and functions, basic understanding of robots remains the same. A robot can be
seen as a physical agent that manipulates the physical world; the physical agent is
artificial rather than natural. In order to manipulate the physical world, a robot needs to
work in a Sense–Plan–Act cycle. Each of the above, in turn, demands different
capabilities from the robot. “Sense” or sensing requires the robot to take in infor-
mation about its environment; a robot has to “Plan,” i.e., use that information to make
a decision, and finally, a robot needs moving parts to carry out commands or “Act.”
Japanese Industrial Robot Association (JIRA) has more detailed classification of the
varieties of robots. JIRA classifies robots into the following categories (a) manip-
ulators, (b) numerically controlled, (c) sensate, (d) adaptive, (e) smart, and
(f) Intelligent Mechatronic System.
1. Manipulators—A manipulator is physically anchored to their workplace, usually
with an entire chain of controllable joints, enabling placement of
end-effectors in any position within the workplace. Manipulators are by far the
most common type of industrial robots. Manipulators are categorized as
(a) manual—machines slaved to a human operator; (b) sequential—device that
performs a series of tasks in the same sequence every time they are activated;
and (c) programmable—define operation through computer commands based on
tasks or objectives. Note that Japan calls certain machines robots that would
only best be termed “factory machines” in other parts of the world. For the three
categories of manipulator highlighted here, only a programmable manipulator
would qualify to be a robot outside of Japan.
2. Numerically controlled—These are industrial automation usually referred to as
numerical control (NC) machines. These robots are a form of programmable
automation instructed to perform tasks through information on sequences and
positions in the form of alphanumeric data. The data represent relative positions
between a tool and other processing element often referred to as a work-head
and the work-part, i.e., object being processed. The operating principle of
numerically controlled automation is to control the sequence of motion of the
work-head relative to the work-part, leading to required machining. Three
important components merge to create a numerical control system: (a) part
program, (b) machine control unit, and (c) processing equipment. Part program
refers to the detailed set of commands (in the form of alphanumeric data) to be
followed by the processing equipment. The machine control unit is usually a
microcomputer that stores and executes the program. This is accomplished by
218 S. M. Hazarika and U. S. Dixit
4 Aspects of Robotics
Driven through science fiction and the proliferation of humanoids therein, robotics
has always been concerned with design and synthesis of certain human functions by
the use of mechanisms coupled with sensors, actuators, and information processing
unit usually a microcontroller or a computer. This is a huge challenge and demands
a multitude of concepts from a number of classical areas of study. There are
different aspects of robotics research, each carried out by experts in various fields.
Nonetheless, synergy between a number of areas including mechanics, control, and
cognition plays an important role.
The field of robotics can be partitioned at a high level of abstraction into four
major areas: (a) mechanical manipulation, (b) locomotion, (c) computer vision, and
(d) artificial intelligence. The discussion in this section is broadly set along these
lines.
7 Robotics: History, Trends, and Future Directions 219
Robotic manipulators comprise nearly rigid links, which are connected by joints
that allow relative motion of neighboring links. A serial manipulator is a set of
bodies connected in a chain by joints. These bodies are referred to as links. Joints
form a connection between a neighboring pair of links, each link maintaining a
fixed relationship between the joints at its ends. Even though the serial manipulator
is often compared with the human arm, unlike the joints in the human arm, the
joints in a robotic manipulator are restricted to one degree of freedom. This is to
simplify the mechanics, kinematics, and control of the manipulator.
Two types of joints are commonly found in robots: (a) revolute joints and
(b) prismatic joints. A revolute or a rotary joint is a one-degree-of-freedom kine-
matic pair used in mechanisms. Displacement is referred to as joint angle.
Manipulators also at times contain sliding or prismatic joints. The relative dis-
placement between links in a prismatic joint is a translation. The usual convention is
to number the immobile base of a serial manipulator as link 0. Links are thereafter
marked with the first moving link as link 1, and so on, till one reached the free end
of the arm, which is link n [6].
Degrees of freedom (DoF) are defined as the number of independent movements
an object can have in 3-D space. A rigid body free in space can have six independent
movements—three translations and three rotations—leading to six DoFs. These six
independent variables completely specify the position and orientation of the object in
3-D space. Consequently, in order to position an end-effector arbitrarily in 3-D space
a manipulator with six DoF is required—three joints for position and three joints for
orientation of the end-effector. These are referred to as spatial manipulators. Serial
manipulators are the simplest of the industrial robots. Every link in a serial
manipulator except the last has a joint at each end. The last link has only one joint.
This is located at the end closest to the base, referred to as the proximal end. The
end-effector is at the free end, i.e., the end farthest away from the base, referred to as
the distal end. The end-effector could be a gripper, a welding torch, an electro-
magnet, or another device depending on the intended application [6].
Not all robots are as simple; these robots have parallelogram linkages or other
closed kinematic structures. Parallel manipulators have one or more loops. None of
the link is designated as first or last! Consequently, there does not exist a natural
choice of end-effector or output link. The output link must be chosen. More often
than not, the number of joints is more than the degree of freedom, with several
joints not being actuated [7].
Actuators are akin to muscles of a robot and play a vital role in “Act” stage of a
Sense–Plan–Act cycle. Sensors measure different stimuli that the robot can
220 S. M. Hazarika and U. S. Dixit
effectively use. Actuators and sensors together with a feedback control system are
the most basic requirements for operation of a robot.
Actuators convert energy to mechanical form; any device that accomplishes this
conversion is an actuator. Different types of actuators are available; choice of one
over the other is driven by a number of factors including force, torque, and speed of
operation, accuracy, precision, and power consumption. Based on the three different
modes of energy transfer, actuators are classified as (a) electrical, (b) pneumatic
fluid power, and c. hydraulic fluid power.
Electrical Actuation: Electrical motors form the major chunk of electrical actu-
ators. Nevertheless, there are other types of electrical actuators such as solenoids.
Typical electrical motor types include (a) DC motors, (b) AC motors, and
(c) stepper motors.
Small DC motors have stator magnetic poles produced by a permanent magnet.
For large motors, the magnetic field is produced via a stator winding. Voltage
supplied to the armature in turn controls the speed of the DC motor. For motors
with stator windings, speed control is also possible through varying the current to
the stator. AC motors are driven by an alternating current supply to the stator
windings. The frequency of the input signal determines the speed of AC motors.
Consequently, speed control is done through variation of the signal frequency.
Stepper motors possess the ability to rotate a specific number of revolutions or
fractions of a revolution. This in turn ensures specific angular displacement.
Pneumatic Power Actuation: Pneumatic actuation is possibly the most widely
used in the manufacturing industry, for example in automated assembly, including
jig and robot end-effector operation. Pressurized air is used as the power transfer
medium. Pneumatic cylinder, a closed cylindrical barrel with a piston, is the pri-
mary type of energy transfer device for a linear motion. The piston is made to move
by applying the pressurized air at one of two ports found at the ends of the cylinder.
Limited rotation rotary actuators that provide back and forth rotation through a
fixed angle are the other type of pneumatic energy transfer device.
Hydraulic Power Actuation: Hydraulic actuators use oil instead of air and give a
very high power output. Hydraulic actuators are available as linear or rotary ac-
tuators. Linear actuators are akin to pneumatic actuators. Rotary actuators are either
of limited rotation or of continuous rotation. The continuous rotation hydraulic
actuators are referred to as hydraulic motors.
Motion Convertors: Mechanical power transmission systems required to convert
actuator outputs to type of motions required by the system are referred to as motion
convertors. For example, convertors are required for speed reduction or conversion
from rotary to linear motion.
7 Robotics: History, Trends, and Future Directions 221
4.2.2 Sensors
A sensor is a transducer that converts a physical stimulus from one form into a more
useful form to measure the stimulus. Sensors are a very critical part of any robot,
whether autonomous or tele-operated. There was a time when “sensors” for an
experimenter’s robot were too rudimentary. It would be just a few whiskers con-
nected to microswitches to sense walls and other obstacles. When the robot banged
into a wall or obstacle, the switches were tripped and its simple logic steered it in
another direction. But after the invention of microcontrollers, a new era of sensors
has begun. We have numerous sensors such as active and passive IR sensors; sound
and voice sensors; ultrasonic range sensors, positional encoders on arm joints, head
and wheels; compasses, navigational and GPS sensors; active and passive light and
laser sensors; a number of bumper switches; and sensors to detect acceleration,
turning, tilt, odor detection, magnetic fields, ionizing radiation, temperature, tactile,
force, torque, RF, UV, and visual sensors such as CCD cameras.
Sensors are the robot’s contact with the outside world or its own inner workings.
Any robotic system has two distinct categories of sensors for measuring internal
and environmental parameters referred to as proprioceptors and exteroceptors,
respectively [8].
Proprioceptors: Sensors that measure the kinematic and dynamic parameters of
the robot are referred to as proprioceptors. Proprioceptive sensors are responsible
for controlling internal status and monitoring self-maintenance.
Position transducers such as potentiometers, synchros and resolvers, encoders,
and rotary variable differential transformer (RVDT) are the common rotary joint
proprioception sensors. Tachometer transducers are used for the measurement of
angular velocity. Traditional DC motor tachometers are getting replaced by digital
tachometers using magnetic pickup sensors, for the latter are compact and suitable
for embedment within robotic manipulators. Acceleration sensors measure the force
that produces the acceleration of a known mass. Acceleration transducers based on
stress–strain gage, piezoelectric, capacitive, and inductive principles are available.
Micromechanical accelerometers where force is estimated by measuring the strain
in elastic cantilever beams formed from silicon dioxide are available. Flexibility of
a robot’s mechanical structure is also estimated by strain gages mounted on the
manipulator’s link. Further joint shaft torques can also be estimated using strain
gages mounted on shafts.
Exteroceptors: Sensors that sense the environment in order to estimate the
location/position as well as force interaction of the robot with the environment are
referred to as exteroceptors. Exteroceptors are broadly categorized into: (a) contact
sensors, (b) range sensors, and (c) vision sensors.
Contact Sensors: Contact sensors detect a physical contact using mechanical
switches that trigger when contact is made. Contact sensors are typically used to
detect contact between mating parts and/or to measure the interaction forces and
torques during part mating operations using the robot manipulator. In addition to
triggers on physical contact, sensors to continuously sense contact forces ranging
over an area are also available. This type of contact sensors is termed as tactile
222 S. M. Hazarika and U. S. Dixit
sensors. It is worthwhile to mention that tactile sensing is far more complex than
contact sensing. Tactile sensing is based on inductive elastomer, strain gage,
piezoelectric, capacitive, and optoelectronic technologies. In terms of their oper-
ating principles, tactile sensing can be seen as either force-sensitive or
displacement-sensitive. Conductive elastomer, strain gage, and piezoelectric are
examples of force-sensitive tactile sensors that measure the contact forces.
Displacement-sensitive tactile sensors include optoelectronic and capacitive sensors
that measure the mechanical deformation of an elastic overlay.
Range Sensors: Range sensors estimate the distance to objects in their operation
area. The most common uses of range sensors include robot navigation, obstacle
avoidance, or recovery of the third dimension for monocular vision. Range sensors
are based on either principle of time of flight or triangulation. Range can be esti-
mated from the time elapsed between the transmission and return of a pulse in
time-of-flight sensors such as laser range finders and sonar. Estimation of range can
also be accomplished by the principle of triangulation, i.e., detecting a given point
on the object surface from two different points of view at a known distance from
each other.
Vision Sensors: Robot vision is one of the most complex yet versatile sensing
processes. Robotic vision is an involved process and includes extracting, charac-
terizing, and interpreting information from images. This is to identify or describe
objects in environment. A camera converts the visual information to electrical sig-
nals; these are in turn sampled and quantized yielding a digital image. CCD image
sensors being lightweight, compact, and robust are preferred over conventional
tube-type. Vision is largely dependent on illumination; for avoiding many problems
associated with robotic vision, controlled illumination is preferred with structured
lighting being widely used. Special light stripes, grids, or other patterns are projected
on the scene with shape of the projected patterns on different objects offering
valuable cues. This allows 3-D object parameters to be recovered from a 2-D image.
Digital image produced by a vision sensor is an array of pixel intensities and
requires to be processed for an explicit and meaningful description. Digital image
processing involves preprocessing, segmentation, description, recognition, and
interpretation. Preprocessing techniques usually deal with noise reduction, and
detailed enhancement is addressed in preprocessing. Objects are extracted from the
scene using segmentation algorithms, like edge detection or region growing.
Recognition involves classifying the objects in the feature space. Finally, inter-
pretation assigns a meaning to the ensemble of recognized objects.
4.3.1 Kinematics
Kinematics is the study of position, velocity, acceleration, and other higher order
derivatives of the position variables without considering forces causing these
effects. Kinematics of manipulators involves study of the geometrical and
time-based properties of motion of the manipulator.
Denavit–Hartenberg Notation: The Denavit–Hartenberg (D-H) notation is used
for kinematic description of a robot. For such a description, the pose of each link in
the manipulator relative to the pose of the preceding link is to be described. This
should require six parameters in space. However, using a pair of constraints
between the coordinate frames, the D-H formalism describes the spatial relation
between coordinate frames attached to successive links using a set of four param-
eters. For a pair of consecutive links, the four parameters describe the links and the
joint between them. Each link can be represented by two parameters: (1) the link
length ai and (2) the link twist angle ai. The link twist angle ai indicates the axis
twist angle of two adjacent joints i and i − 1. Joints are also described by two
parameters: (a) the link offset di, which indicates the distance from a link to next
link along the axis of joint i and (b) the joint revolute angle hi, which is the rotation
of one link with respect to the next about the joint axis [9]. Even though the choices
of coordinate frames may not be unique, the D-H assignments always lead to the
same expression for the pose of the end-effector with respect to the base [10].
Forward Kinematics: Forward kinematics is the problem of computing the
position and orientation of the end-effector given the set of joint angles. Forward
kinematics can be thought of as a mapping of the manipulator position from a joint
space description into a Cartesian space description.
Inverse Kinematics: Inverse kinematics is the problem of computing all possible
sets of joint angles to attain the given position and orientation. For any practical use
of the manipulator such as a pick-and-place operation or line-following operation,
inverse kinematics is the fundamental problem to be solved. Inverse kinematics can
be thought of as a mapping of end-effector pose—position and orientation—in 3-D
Cartesian space of the manipulator’s internal joint space.
Although we, humans, solve the inverse kinematics problem routinely in our
interaction with the physical world, it is not that simple to compute the joint angles
from the Cartesian positions. Forward kinematics is simpler than inverse kine-
matics. This is compounded by the fact that the kinematic equations are nonlinear.
Solution may not be easy or at times even possible in a closed form. Existence of
multiple solutions or nonexistence of solutions is questions that need to be
encountered. This in turn has effect on the workspace, the volume of space in which
the end-effector of the manipulator can attain any desired position and orientation.
Velocities and Singularities: Apart from static positioning problems, kinematic
analysis may involve manipulators in motion. A matrix called the Jacobian of the
manipulator is defined to undertake velocity analysis. The Jacobian specifies a
mapping from velocities in joint space to velocities in Cartesian space. Points at
which this mapping is not invertible are called singularities. Knowledge of
224 S. M. Hazarika and U. S. Dixit
4.3.2 Dynamics
For a robot to be able to perform at par with a human, only having a humanoid
structure would not suffice. The robot needs to have the capability of “rational”
decision making. Artificial embodiment of such intelligence in a robot is very
involved and almost impossible. Nevertheless, intelligent robots form a vibrant and
extremely exciting area within robotics.
Human sensory system assists human intelligence. Intelligent robots are
equipped with a myriad of sensors, particularly for knowledge of the external
world. In line with the use of visual and qualitative information for everyday
commonsense reasoning, a robot in an unstructured environment (one that is not
known a priori) makes use of “qualitative spatial reasoning” and “robotic vision.”
Interpretation of a scene and learning from vision are possibly the most difficult
phase in the whole pipeline of visual image processing. This requires intelligence
that in turn demands huge volume of knowledge. With maturity of learning tech-
niques through evolving paradigms such as deep learning, artificial intelligence is
expected to enhance decision-making capabilities of the robots.
5 Applications of Robotics
Starting from General Motors’ use of Unimate, the first industrial robot in its
assembly line, robots have come a long way. They are increasingly being applied in
scenarios as diverse as space exploration, medical surgery, rescue, and rehabilita-
tion. The predominant use still remains in the field of automation in manufacturing.
Nevertheless, there has been an upsurge of robot activity in close interaction with
human in applications as challenging as health service!
226 S. M. Hazarika and U. S. Dixit
Even though the first use of robots in manufacturing was in situations dangerous to
a human user, motivation of using robots in manufacturing is driven more by
economics rather than societal concern. Robotic manufacturing is preferred for high
precision repetitive tasks. Such tasks are better performed by a robot rather than a
human who is susceptible to error. Industrial robots which are programmable can be
seen as advanced automation systems, control being executed using an onboard
computer. Further with advances in sensing and control as well as computer vision,
an industrial robot need not be restricted to environments completely known a
priori. Traditionally, a stand-alone industrial robot is used for automation in man-
ufacturing. More recently, another form of robotics in manufacturing is evolving
through collaborative robots. Collaborative robots have human-in-the-loop, i.e.,
work in close coordination with human user. This makes it possible for humans to
still have a role in automated manufacturing. Since its inception in 2014, collab-
orative robotics is poised to emerge as a key player in the automotive and elec-
tronics industries [12, 13].
Whether a traditional industrial robot or an adaptive collaborative robot, in an
automated production line in manufacturing, its major roles include: (a) material
handling, (b) welding, (c) assembly operations, (d) dispensing, and to a lesser extent
(e) processing.
Robotic Material Handling: Material handling is possibly the most common
application for industrial robots worldwide. Material-handling robots automate
some of the most tedious, dull, and unsafe tasks in a production line, thus enhancing
efficiency. Material handling encompasses part selection, transferring, packing,
7 Robotics: History, Trends, and Future Directions 227
Like the dream of a mechanical man, outer space has also been a great fascination.
Design and development of machines that could tolerate the extremes of
yet-un-seen space environments and take forward space exploration have been a
dream for science fiction writers and space explorers alike. Space robotics is an area
concerned with design of machines capable of surviving in such extreme envi-
ronment and performing maintenance and exploration tasks. Space robotics is a
conglomeration of multiple disciplines grounded on well-founded knowledge of
robotics, computer science, and space engineering. Starting in the 1950s, space
exploration today not only involves manned space explorations but also robotic
missions involving a range of mobility or locomotion systems.
Space robots can be either orbital robots or planetary robots. Robots that are
conceived and designed for repairing satellites or assembling large space telescopes,
etc., are usually deployed in orbits around the planetary bodies and are referred to as
orbital robots. Planetary robots are deployed on to the planetary bodies. These
robots such as the MARS Explorer undertake survey and observation, examination,
and extraction of the extraterrestrial surfaces. The planetary robots are also engaged
in preparing for subsequent human arrival on the planetary surface [16].
The four key issues in space robotics include a. mobility, b. manipulation, c.
time delay, and d. extreme environments. Mobility and autonomy are essential for a
space robot. Degree of mobility (i.e., locomotion capability) and manipulation
228 S. M. Hazarika and U. S. Dixit
Until recently, there was no strict technical definition of the term “service robot.”
The International Federation of Robotics (IFR) and the United Nations Economic
Commission for Europe (UNECE) worked out a service robot definition and
classification scheme resulting in ISO-Standard 8373 effective since 2012.
A service robot is a robot that performs useful tasks for humans or equipment excluding
industrial automation application. A personal service robot or a service robot for personal
use is a service robot used for a non-commercial task, usually by lay persons. Examples are
domestic servant robot, automated wheelchair, and personal mobility assist robot.
A professional service robot or a service robot for professional use is a service robot used
for a commercial task, usually operated by a properly trained operator. Examples are
cleaning robot for public places, delivery robot in offices or hospitals, fire-fighting robot,
rehabilitation robot and surgery robot in hospitals.
Professional and Personal Service Robots [18]
7 Robotics: History, Trends, and Future Directions 229
First used in 1985 for brain biopsy, robots are now regularly used in various
medical areas including laparoscopy, neurosurgery, and orthopedic surgery [19].
Medical robotics is one of the fastest growing sectors within the medical devices
industry. This unprecedented growth and acceptance of robotics within medical
disciplines is largely due to advances in the areas of medical imaging and tech-
nological improvements in the area of actuators and control.
Robotic surgery and rehabilitation robotics have emerged as the largest use of
medical robotics. Nevertheless, newer and novel uses for medical robots are reg-
ularly reported. Radiosurgery involves focused beams of ionizing radiation directed
at the particular area. CyberKnife a robotic radiosurgery system ensures directing
the beam through the tumor at various orientations for better outcome. There exist
medical robot systems for disaster response and battlefield medicine.
Surgical robots have made the greatest impact in medical robotics. Starting with
ROBODOC [20] for orthopedic surgery, robots have made inroads into operating
theaters in a big way. This is primarily because of the possibility to position, orient,
and perform accurate motions of the scalpel in more ways than possible by a human
230 S. M. Hazarika and U. S. Dixit
expert. Robots are increasingly being used for a variety of malignant and benign
conditions in urology, neurosurgery, and even cardiac operations demanding high
order of precision.
Two pathbreaking surgical robots exploiting research on tele-manipulation and
miniature tendon-driven wrists are the Zeus by Computer Motion [21] and the da
Vinci from Intuitive Surgical [22]. Both feature a master–slave architecture, with
the surgeon master console and a patient slave manipulator. The slave manipulator
was with three arms—two for tissue manipulation and the third for positioning of
the endoscopic camera. The Zeus system, however, is no longer in production.
Today Intuitive Surgical’s da Vinci system is undoubtedly the most widely
accepted surgical robot in the world.
Following the success and popularity of da Vinci Surgical Robot, a number of
research laboratories and companies intensified the quest of surgical robots.
Amadeus, a four-armed laparoscopic surgical robot system, is being developed.
This would be a direct competitor of Intuitive Surgical’s da Vinci system. The
Amadeus uses snakelike multi-articulating arms, expected to provide improved
maneuverability. Improved MR-compatible robots are being investigated.
Microrobotic and nano-robotic platforms are emerging. These would further
improve surgical outcomes [23].
active legs. Use of robotics is not only limited to motor rehabilitation but has been
effectively used for recovery of cognitive deficits [26].
Robots have not only been confined to utilitarian use. There is a huge segment of
robotic industry engaged in select areas of culture and entertainment. Robots are
designed and developed for the sole purpose of subjective pleasure of the human it
serves. These robots vary in form and function, ranging from simple toy robots such
as a pet dog to complex humanoids exploiting artificial intelligence. Entertainment
robotics has come a long way. Starting with Sony’s AIBO, a pet dog to its
humanoid companion QRIO, we have now Pepper, an emotional humanoid.
Designed and developed by Aldebaran Robotics, Pepper is a four-foot humanoid
(on wheels) with cute features who have natural communication skills. The best part
is that Pepper gives you all the attention you crave! Pepper not only offers advice
but also “prattle on and on” making small talk. Even though we have not yet been
able to have a slave robot in its truest sense, we are definitely one step closer to the
type of artificial intelligence fantasized in science fiction movies.
Entertainment robotics also includes robotic technology used to create sophis-
ticated narrative environments through preprogrammed movement patterns such as
one used in Disneyland or the Cadbury World. Entertainment robots are also
popular in trade shows and museums. Promotional robots to attract and lure show
attendees toward particular products or services or guide them to particular booths
are an established technology. For such guides, possibly Intel Museum’s A.I.-
driven interactive robot, ARTI, is one of the most well-known. ARTI can recognize
faces, understand speech, and update museum guests on the history of the museum
and its founders [27].
Perhaps one of the hugely successful endeavors of entertainment robotics is the
RoboCup challenge. RoboCup is an international completion of robotic soccer with
the ambitious official RoboCup motto: “By the year 2050, develop a team of fully
autonomous humanoid robots that can win against the human world soccer
champions.” Robot soccer is possibly one of the toughest tests of building auton-
omous robots. The robots need to have active perception and real-time sensor-based
planning. Apart from being a source of entertainment, the games have driven
unprecedented advances in robotics research [28].
6 Current Trends
Starting from a modest industrial robot in the early 60s, robotics has achieved
brilliant successes in manufacturing as well as personal and service robots. Robots
have proliferated everywhere in society: in entertainment, health care,
232 S. M. Hazarika and U. S. Dixit
rehabilitation, and other applications. In this section, we survey the current trend
toward social robotics, biomimetic robots, and the emergence of cloud robotics.
In the late 80s, Brooks proposed a robot control architecture that couples sensory
information to action selection without a symbolic representation of an external
world [31]. He termed it the subsumption architecture. Following the subsumption
architecture, there was a surge of embodiment-inspired robotics. An approach to a
nonrepresentational approach to artificial intelligence was the area of “Artificial
Life.” It involved arriving at a myriad of complex behaviors based on simple rules.
However, the major focus was on biomimetics—the mimicry of biological process
or a system. Biomimicry does not only involve mimicking the geometry but also the
functionality [32].
Living species have adapted over time to the environment leading to an optimal
design. It is but natural to copy that design! It is not now that people have tried to
copy nature. Based on anatomical studies of birds, Leanardo da Vinci had made
detailed illustrations of a flying machine. Researchers are focussing on biological
inspiration to design and develop flying, crawling, and swimming automatons.
These are biomimetic robots—robots that are built based on principles extracted
from biological systems.
The recent surge in biomimetic robotics lies in availability of (a) huge amount of
biological process data and (b) low-cost, power-efficient computational resources.
7 Robotics: History, Trends, and Future Directions 233
7 Future Directions
It is definitely hard to say what the future holds for robotics. With rapid pace of
technological growth within as well as in allied field such as machine learning and
artificial intelligence, robotics is poised for even greater influence on our life in
general. In this section, we review three areas of research that is going to make
considerable impact on how robotics evolves in the near future.
Until now, most of AI within robotics stayed true to this symbolic tradition. Stages
in the Sense–Plan–Act cycle were clearly separated. Sensing leads to a set of
symbols corresponding to features based on state of the external world. These
symbols with other symbolic knowledge are used by the Planner to choose
appropriate action. Flow of information is unidirectional with processing at each
stage clearly demarcated. It was Brooks, who with his subsumption architecture
proposed a radical departure from this view. Recent finding within the psychology
234 S. M. Hazarika and U. S. Dixit
8 Conclusion
A brief overview of the history, trends, and future direction is covered in this
chapter. The developments in robotics starting from its conceptualization in science
fiction to its current craze of IoT-based robotics are discussed. Many important
developments have been highlighted, whereas many more have been ignored in
view of space limitations. Robotics based on evolutionary computation, swarm
robotics, and other such ideas driven through progress in computing has been
ignored. Discussion on specialized robots such as for process industries and robots
primarily composed of easily deformable matter is not included. Further, trend
toward creation of human-like robots such as Nadine, the robot receptionist [50], is
not highlighted. Nevertheless, a clear and concise picture of the interdisciplinary
field of robotics has been presented. It is clear that the field of robotics requires
collaborative efforts of various disciplines of engineering.
236 S. M. Hazarika and U. S. Dixit
Glossary
Actuators Actuators are the devices that convert some form of energy to
mechanical energy.
Automaton It is a technique to automatically perform a number of functions fol-
lowing a predetermined sequence of operations.
Biomimetics Biomimetics is the creation of new materials, devices, and systems
based on the concepts and principles derived from the nature.
Degrees of freedom Degrees of freedom are the number of independent move-
ments of an object in a 3-D space.
End-effector Robot end-effector is a generic term to refer to the device attached at
the distal end of a robotic manipulator. It is with the end-effector that the robot
interacts with the environment.
Exteroceptor Exteroceptors are sensors that provide information on the conditions
of a body vis-à-vis the environment.
Forward Kinematics Forward kinematics is the problem of computing the posi-
tion and orientation of the end-effector given the set of joint angles.
Humanoid A Humanoid is a machine that resembles and possesses the charac-
teristics of a human.
Internet of Things It is a network of Internet-connected physical entities such as
objects and devices.
Inverse kinematics Inverse kinematics deals with computing all possible sets of
joint angles to attain a prescribed position and orientation of the end-effector.
7 Robotics: History, Trends, and Future Directions 237
References
1. Lord, C. (1984). The Politics (Aristotle, Trans.). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
2. Hobbes, T., & Gaskin, J. C. A. (1998). Leviathan. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
3. Nocks, L. (2007). The robot: The life story of a technology. Greenwood Technographies:
Greenwood Press, London.
4. Jazar, R. N. (2010). Theory of applied robotics: Kinematics, dynamics, and control (2nd ed).
Springer.
5. Dixit, U. S., Hazarika, M., Davim, J. P. (2016). A brief history of mechanical engineering.
Springer.
6. Craig, John J. (1989). Introduction to robotics: Mechanics and control (2nd ed.). Inc, Boston,
MA, USA: Addison-Wesley Longman Publishing Co.
238 S. M. Hazarika and U. S. Dixit
7. Tsai, L. W. (1999). Robot analysis: The mechanics of serial and parallel manipulators.
New York: Wiley.
8. Lewis, F. L., Dawson, D. M., & Abdallah, C. T. (2003). Robot manipulator control: Theory
and practice. New York: CRC Press.
9. Corke, P. (2007). A simple and systematic approach to assigning Denavit-Hartenberg
parameters. IEEE Transactions on Robotics, 23(3), 590–594.
10. Denavit, Jacques, & Hartenberg, R. S. (1955). A kinematic notation for lower-pair
mechanisms based on matries. Transactions on ASME Journal of Applied Mechanics, 23,
215–221.
11. Laurent P., (2013). Advanced manufacturing measurement technologies and robotics.
Business Innovation Observatory Contract No. 190/PP/ENT/CIP/12/C/N03C01.
12. Friis, D. (Ed.). (2016). World robotics report 2016. International Federation of Robotics.
13. Tobe, F. (2015). Why Co-Bots Will be a huge innovation and growth driver for robotics
industry. IEEE Spectrum.
14. Wilson, M. (2002). Robots at the heart of the welding system. Industrial Robot: An
International Journal, 29(2), 91–92.
15. Anandan, T. (2014). Robotic assembly: Shrinking footprint, expanding market. Robotics
Industry Insights: RIA Robotics Online.
16. Yoshida, K., Nenchev, D., Ishigami, G., & Tsumaki, Y. (2014). Space robotics. In
International Handbook of Space Technology (pp. 541–573).
17. Gao, Y., & Chien, S. (2017). Review on space robotics: Toward top-level science through
space exploration. Science Robotics, 2(7).
18. Zielinska, T. (2016). Professional and personal service robots. International Journal of
Robotics Applications and Technologies (IJRAT), 4(1), 63–82.
19. Lanfranco, A. R., Castellanos, A. E., Desai, J. P., & Meyers, W. C. (2004). Robotic surgery:
A current perspective. Annals of Surgery, 239(1), 14–21.
20. Kazanzides P., Zuhars, J., Mittelstadt, B., Williamson, B., Cain, P., Smith, F., et al. (1992).
Architecture of a surgical robot. In IEEE International Conference on Systems, Man and
Cybernetics (pp. 1624–1629).
21. Ghodoussi, M., S. E. Butner, Y. Wang (2002). Robotic surgery—the transatlantic case. In
IEEE International Conference on Robotics and Automation (pp. 1882–1888).
22. Guthart G. S., & Salisbury J. K., Jr. (2000). The IntuitiveTMtelesurgery system: Overview
and application. In IEEE International Conference on Robotics and Automation, 2000
(pp. 618–621).
23. Bergeles, C., & Yang, G. Z. (2014). From passive tool holders to microsurgeons: Safer,
smaller, smarter surgical robots. IEEE Transactions on Biomedical Engineering, 61(5),
1565–1576.
24. Hogan, N., Krebs, H. I., Charnnarong, J., Srikrishna, P., & Sharon, A. (1992). MIT-MANUS:
A workstation for manual therapy and training. I. In IEEE International Workshop on Robot
and Human Communication, 1992 (pp. 161–165.
25. Guzmán-Valdivia, C. H., Blanco-Ortega, A., Oliver-Salazar, M. A., Gómez-Becerra, F. A., &
Carrera-Escobedo, J. L. (2015). HipBot—The design, development and control of a
therapeutic robot for hip rehabilitation. Mechatronics, 30, 55–64.
26. Johnson, M., Micera, S., Shibata, T., & Guglielmelli, E. (2008). Rehabilitation and assistive
robotics. IEEE Robotics and Automation Magazine, 15(3), 16–110.
27. Teo, G., & Reinerman-Jones, L. (2014). Robot behavior for enhanced human performance
and workload. In International Conference on Virtual, Augmented and Mixed Reality
(pp. 117–128). Springer International Publishing.
28. Veloso, M. M. (2002). Entertainment robotics. Communications of the ACM, 45(3), 59–63.
29. Darling, K. (2016). Extending legal protections to social robots: The effects of anthropo-
morphism, empathy, and violent behavior towards robotic objects. In M. Froomkin, R. Calo,
& I. Kerr (Eds.), Robot law. Edward Elgar.
30. Kanda, T., & Ishiguro, H. (2016). Human-robot interaction in social robotics. New York:
CRC Press.
7 Robotics: History, Trends, and Future Directions 239
31. Brooks, R. A. (1991). Intelligence without representation. Artificial Intelligence, 47, 139–159.
32. Lepora, N. F., Verschure, P., & Prescott, T. J. (2013). The state of the art in biomimetics.
Bioinspiration & Biomimetics, 8(1).
33. Irwin, J. D. (1997). The industrial electronics handbook. Boca Raton, FL, USA: CRC Press.
34. Goldberg, K., & Siegwart, R. (Eds.). (2002). Beyond webcams: An introduction to online
robots Cambridge. MA, USA: MIT Press.
35. Mell, P., & Grance, T. (2009). The NIST definition of cloud computing. National Institute of
Standards and Technology.
36. Saxena, A., Jain, A., Sener, O., Jami, A., Misra, D. K., & Koppula, H. S. (2014). Robobrain:
Large-scale knowledge engine for robots. arXiv preprint arXiv:1412.0691.
37. Waibel, M., Beetz, M., Civera, J., D’Andrea, R., Elfring, J., Gálvez-López, D., et al. (2011).
RoboEarth. IEEE Robotics and Automation Magazine, 18(2), 69–82.
38. Wilson, M. (2002). Six views of embodied cognition. Psychonomic Bulletin & Review, 9(4),
625–636.
39. Hoffman, G. (2012). Embodied cognition for autonomous interactive robots. Topics in
Cognitive Science, 2012, 1–14.
40. Atzori, L., Iera, A., & Morabito, G. (2010). The internet of things: A survey. Computer
Network, 54(15), 2787–2805.
41. Grieco, L. A., Rizzo, A., Colucci, S., Sicari, S., Piro, G., Paola, D. Di, et al. (2014). IoT-aided
robotics applications: Technological implications, target domains and open issues. Computer
Communications, 54, 32–47.
42. Von Neumann, J. (1966). The theory of self-reproducing automata. In Burke, A. W. (Ed.),
Essays on cellular automata (pp. 4–65). Illinois: University of Illinois.
43. Chirikjian, G. S., Zhou, Y., & Suthakorn, J. (2002). Self-replicating robots for lunar
development. IEEE/ASME Transactions on Mechatronics, 7(4), 462–472.
44. Zykov, V., Efstathios, M., Bryant, A., & Lipson, H. (2005). Robotics: Self-reproducing
machines. Nature, 435(7039), 163–164.
45. Hu, X., & Rousseau, R. (2015). From a word to a world: The current situation in the
interdisciplinary field of synthetic biology. PeerJ, 3, e728.
46. Benner, S. A., & Sismour, A. M. (2005). Synthetic biology. Nature Reviews Genetics, 6(7),
533.
47. Steager, E. B., Wong, D., Mishra, D., Weiss, R., & Kumar, V. (2014). Sensors for micro bio
robots via synthetic biology. In IEEE International Conference on Robotics & Automation
(ICRA), Hong Kong (pp. 3783–3788).
48. Sakar, M. S., Steagar, E. B., Kim, D. H., Julius, A. A., Kim, M. J., & Kumar, V. (2010).
Biosensing and actuation for microbiorobots. In IEEE International Conference on Robotics
and Automation, Anchorage, AL (pp. 3141–3146).
49. Lu, J., Yang, J., Kim, Y. B., & Ayers, J. (2012). Low power, high PVT variation tolerant
central pattern generator design for a bio-hybrid micro robot. In Circuits and systems
(MWSCAS 2012), IEEE 55th International Midwest Symposium (pp. 782–785).
50. Thalmann, N. M., Tian, Li, & Yao, F. (2017). Nadine: A social robot that can localize objects
and grasp them in a human way. In Frontiers in electronic technologies: Trends and
challenges. Singapore: Springer.
Chapter 8
Computer Vision in Industrial
Automation and Mobile Robots
Abstract Computer vision is presently a very relevant and important tool in both
industrial manufacturing and mobile robots. As human vision is the most relevant
sense to feed the brain with environmental information for decision making,
computer vision is nowadays becoming the main artificial sensor in the domains of
industrial quality assurance and trajectory control of mobile robots.
quality control [3], medical diagnosis [4], geometry restoration [5]; (ii) remote
displacement sensing [6]; (iii) visual servoing [7]; (iv) object tracking [8]; etc.
Despite the broad application of artificial vision systems in different domains,
their usual topology is as a centralized autonomous system. Here also, the advan-
tages of distributed management systems can be applied with great advantages.
In this chapter, a quality control system implemented through artificial vision
technology is shown. The novelty of this system is its ability to be managed by a
completely decentralized environment and shared among several distributed users.
Experimental tests performed on a laboratory prototype are presented.
LINE 1
EOL1
Profibus DP
Fig. 2. In this topology, only one user can access the vision system, and this system
is completely managed by this system, usually configured as PLC-master in relation
to its vision system.
PLC master
Profibus DP
Intelligent Intelligent
Slave 1 Slave 2
Profibus DP
sensor is an integrated system with a similar PC architecture that loads a similar DOS
operative system, with the minimal requirement needs. This vision sensor has a solid
state disk where the several user-inspection programs are stored. The selection of the
running program is made by any of the intelligent slave-PLCs through a specific
command, using the Profibus industrial network.
Fig. 5 Bottom view of two different types of power relay: Type 1 = make (four terminals); Type
2 = change-over (five terminals)
246 F. Grilo and J. Figueiredo
The developed system for the measurement of the relay characteristics is composed
of:
(1) a Siemens PLC S7-315, configured as an intelligent slave system;
(2) a vision sensor Siemens VS-710, configured as a slave system;
(3) a human machine interface Siemens OP3, connected with the PLC with a
multi-point interface;
(4) a digital input operator panel to control the main system actuations (start/stop/
emergency).
Figure 6 shows the implemented application where the enclosed rectangle
identifies the distributed strategy described in Sect. 1.3.2. This distributed control
application runs over a Profibus industrial network [10].
Figure 7 shows the actual appearance of the complete system, where the several
sub-systems are referenced. Figure 8 illustrates the vision system (sensor and light
source).
8 Computer Vision in Industrial Automation and Mobile Robots 247
The PLC used to implement this vision system was the Siemens S7-300, composed
of the following slots:
Slot1 = power supply module
Slot2 = CPU module 315-2DP
Slot4 = communication module (Profibus net)
Slot5 = digital input/output module
Slot6 = digital input/output module
Slot7 = analog input/output module
We used the Siemens software Simatic Step 7 [11] to implement the PLC
application. The programming language used was the ladder diagram [12].
Figure 9 shows the control algorithm developed using the Grafcet methodology
—sequential function chart. This Grafcet shows two areas: gray background and
white background.
The operations done in the gray area refer to the control authorization and
synchronism mode to be accomplished by any intelligent PLC-slave in the Profibus
network, to access the vision system, in a distributed environment.
The operations done in the white area refer to the standard sequence of specific
tasks for the image processing application.
The VS710 vision sensor [13] has the capability to store different image processing
programs. According to the intelligent slave request, one of these programs is
loaded into the sensor CPU. The program loading is similar to the usual process of
uploading new device firmware.
Two image processing applications were developed. The first application verifies
the number of terminals existing in the tested relay.
The second application measures the distances among all the existing terminals.
Figure 10 shows the developed Grafcet for the image processing application con-
cerning the relay type 2 (five terminals)—see Sect. 1.4.1.
Both image applications were developed using the Siemens ProVision software
[13].
Figure 11 shows the work environment of the developed application.
The laboratory prototype confirmed the correct performance of the developed image
processing application identifying the actual relay type (correct evaluation of the
number of terminals) and measuring the distances among terminals, with a good
accuracy.
Referring the sharing of the vision system among different intelligent
slave-PLCs, the prototype demonstrated also the correct commutation between
different testing programs previously stored in the vision sensor.
The developed image processing application, which is a medium industrial
complexity algorithm, had shown a total processing time of about 1.5 s for both the
measurement tasks and for the upload of the corresponding processing program,
implemented on the Siemens VS710 vision sensor.
Extrapolating this result for N intelligent slave-PLCs, sharing the same vision
sensor, on the Profibus network, the correspondent time needed for the exchange of
one PLCi client, Tvcsi , is calculated in Eq. (1):
X
N
Tvcsi ¼ tps þ tcAi þ tsn tsi ð1Þ
n¼1
250 F. Grilo and J. Figueiredo
where:
tps time needed for the upload of a new program in the vision sensor;
tcAi time needed for the request of the vision sensor from a new intelligent PLCi-
slave;
tsi time for synchronizing with the new intelligent PLCi-slave.
Considering now that the complete system integrates N intelligent PLC-slaves,
the necessary time for changing the control of the vision sensor among the different
PLCs, Tvcstotal , is given by:
8 Computer Vision in Industrial Automation and Mobile Robots 251
X
N 1
Tvcstotal ¼ tps þ tcAi þ tsn ð2Þ
n¼1
The motor system is the AGV motorized platform that carries on a computer
with a video camera (slave-PC) that processes the image and controls the motors.
The task-processor system is composed of two computers (master PC and slave
PC) which are connected through a wireless network (XBee) [14].
The motor system is physically composed of five main components, as illustrated
in Fig. 12.
One of these components—the motor controller board [15]—is deeper charac-
terized in Figs. 13 and 14.
The task-processor system is physically composed of three main parts, as
illustrated in Fig. 15:
The AGV control strategy is developed on a set of industrial software hosted on
the task-processor system. The used software is:
(i) NI LabVIEW [16];
(ii) NI VISA [16];
(iii) NI Vision Acquisition Software [16];
(iv) NI Device Drivers [16];
(v) NI Vision Development Module [16];
(vi) Arduino Uno [17].
5 1
4 4
3 2 3
Fig. 12 Moto-system characterization: (1) metallic structure; (2) motor controller board; (3) DC
motor; (4) 24VDC battery; (5) Arduino controller
8 Computer Vision in Industrial Automation and Mobile Robots 253
The developed strategy for the AGV motion control is based on two main modes:
(i) Manual mode—which allows the user to control the AGV, through the
PC-master, using four main commands (move forward—move backward—
turn left—turn right);
(ii) Automatic mode—which shifts the complete movement control to the
PC-slave, and the AGV performs automatically the tracking of a black stripe
marked on the floor, by image processing technology.
Figure 16 illustrates the control strategy of the AGV.
Figure 17 characterizes the communication flow between PC-master and
PC-slave.
254 F. Grilo and J. Figueiredo
This program runs in the master-PC, that stays on a desk, and it is responsible for
the main control of the AGV. Basically, it has two command modes, as referred in
2.2.2: manual and automatic.
The GUI developed for the master-PC is shown in Fig. 18.
The base structure of the developed program is a “Flat Sequence Structure”
composed of two sub-structures. This program initiates the wireless XBee com-
munication, defines the main variables (default velocity, forward move, backward
move), and selects the manual mode (0/1) or the automatic mode (0/1).
Figure 19 illustrates a small part of the developed LabView code for the mode
selection: manual/automatic.
8 Computer Vision in Industrial Automation and Mobile Robots 255
Fig. 15 Task-processor system characterization: (1) PC-master; (2) PC-slave with video camera;
(3) XBee wireless network
This program runs in the slave-PC, that stays on the AGV platform, and it moves
together with the AGV.
256 F. Grilo and J. Figueiredo
Manual AutomaƟc
P (Photo)
Master
Manual Control AutomaƟc Control L (Vel. default)
Curve Vel.
Forward Vel. F (Forward)
Wheel-1 Vel.
O (incr. +2 Vel)
Max. Vel. 255
Wheel-2 Vel. D (leŌ) G (right)
Min. Vel. 129
Rear Vel.
Forward Vel.: 127 -255
Forward Max. Vel. 255 l (decr. -2 Vel)
R (Rear)
Rear Vel.: 1 - 127 Max. Vel. 1
Rear Max. Vel.: 1 Min. Vel. 127
This program is responsible for the motion control of the AGV. Basically, it
commands directly the AGV motors through communication with the Arduino
processor that attacks the H-bridge board, and it processes the image captured by
the PC video camera to track automatically the black stripe marked on the floor
(automatic mode).
The GUI developed for the slave-PC is shown in Fig. 20.
The base structure of the developed program is a “Flat Sequence Structure”
composed of three sub-structures. This program initiates the wireless XBee com-
munication, the Arduino communication, defines the main variables, and processes
the captured images.
8 Computer Vision in Industrial Automation and Mobile Robots 257
Figure 21 illustrates a small part of the developed LabView code for the ini-
tialization of the communications.
258 F. Grilo and J. Figueiredo
The Arduino processor is responsible for the serial communication between the
slave LabView program and the H-bridge board that controls the two DC motors.
8 Computer Vision in Industrial Automation and Mobile Robots 259
According to the specifications of the H-bridge board (see Fig. 14), a program
was developed to command the two DC motors in order to allow the AGV to
perform its four main movements: forward, backward, turn left, turn right.
The initial part of this program, where the variables are defined according to the
H-bridge specs (see Fig. 14), is shown in Fig. 22.
Figure 23 exemplifies a part of the program where the forward movement is
processed.
The image processing is responsible for the automatic path tracking. When the
AGV is running in the automatic mode, the movement control of the AGV is
switched to the slave LabView program. The aim of this image processing is to
generate the appropriate movements to command the two DC motors in order to
follow a black stripe marked on the floor (Fig. 24).
T T T T
AGV AGV AGV
Turns right Moves forward Turns leŌ
LEFT RIGHT
limit limit
For the image processing algorithm, it used a set of functions that are available at
the NI Vision Development Module [16].
Basically, the main sequential operations performed on each captured image are:
(i) image capture, (ii) conversion to 8-bit image, (iii) gray image processing,
(iv) image erosion, (v) image edge detection.
These main transformations are used to identify the black stripe marked on the
floor. The criterion to guide the vehicle along this black line is to maintain the
relative location of this line between two defined border lines—left and right lines.
The allowable distance between this two border lines is defined by the user (see
Fig. 25).
In Fig. 26, it is shown a part of the developed program, where the image gray
morphology is modified.
Several in-door tests were performed with different parameter variables: room
luminosity, floor roughness, different paths, average speed.
The good performance of the AGV tracking the black line under the above
mentioned different conditions proved the robustness of the developed program.
Figure 27 shows the AGV performing an in-door test.
2.4 Conclusions
Glossary
Computer vision Computer vision is an interdisciplinary field that deals with how
computers can be made for gaining high-level understanding from digital images
or videos. From the perspective of engineering, it seeks to automate tasks that
the human visual system can do.
Pattern recognition Pattern recognition is a branch of machine learning that
focuses on the recognition of patterns and regularities in data. This scientific and
technological domain has great applicability in computer vision.
Industrial automation Industrial automation deals primarily with the automation
of manufacturing, quality control, and material handling processes. Industrial
automation is to replace the decision making of humans and manual
command-response activities with the use of mechanized equipment and logical
programming commands. One trend is the increased use of machine vision to
provide automatic inspection and robot guidance functions.
AGV An automated guided vehicle or automatic guided vehicle (AGV) is a por-
table robot that follows markers or wires in the floor, or uses vision, magnets, or
lasers for navigation. They are most often used in industrial applications to move
materials around a manufacturing facility or warehouse.
Master–Slave control Master–slave is a model of communication where one
device or process has unidirectional control over one or more other devices. In
some systems, a master is selected from a group of eligible devices, with the
other devices acting in the role of slaves.
References
1. Figueiredo, J., Ayala Botto, M., & Rijo, M. (2013). SCADA system with predictive controller
applied to irrigation canals. Control Engineering Practice, 21(2013), 870–886. http://dx.doi.
org/10.1016/j.conengprac.2013.01.008. (Elsevier).
2. Figueiredo, J., & Sá da Costa J. (2012). A SCADA system for energy management in
intelligent buildings. Energy and Buildings, 49(2012), 85–98. http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.
enbuild.2012.01.041). (Elsevier).
3. Du, C., & Sun, D. (2008). Multi-classification of pizza using computer vision and support
vector machine. Journal of Food Engineering, 86(2008), 234–242.
4. Gouttière, C., & Coninck, J. (2007). Detection of synthetic singularities in digital
mammographies using spherical filters. In Proceedings of the ECCOMAS Thematic
Conference On Computational Vision and Medical Image Processing. Porto, Portugal.
5. Hlou, L., Lichioui, A., & Guennoun, Z. (2003). Degraded 3D-objects restoration and their
envelope extraction. International Journal of Robotics and Automation, 18(2).
6. Lee, J., & Shinozuka, M. (2006). A vision-based system for remote sensing of bridge
displacement. NDT&E International, 39(2006), 425–431. (Elsevier).
266 F. Grilo and J. Figueiredo
7. Nelson, B. (2003). A distributed framework for visually servoed manipulation using an active
camera. International Journal of Robotics and Automation, 18(2).
8. Cui, J., Zha, H., Zhao, H., & Shibasaki, R. (2008). Multi-modal tracking of people using laser
scanners and video camera. Image and Vision Computing, 26(2008), 240–252.
9. Figueiredo, J., & Martins, J. (2010). Energy production system management—renewable
energy power supply integration with building automation system. Energy Conversion and
Management, 51(2010), 1120–1126. http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.enconman.2009.12.020.
(Elsevier).
10. SIEMENS. (2001). Simatic Net—NCM S7 for Profibus/FMS. Siemens 12/2001.
11. SIEMENS. (2000). System software for S7-300 and S7-400—Reference manual, Siemens 08/
2000; A5E00069892-02.
12. SIEMENS. (2001). Simatic S7-300—Ladder logic (LAD) for S7-300, Simens, 2001.
13. SIEMENS. (2000). Provision and profibus-DP, vision sensor simatic VS710—Manual,
Siemens 03/2000; A5E00063481.
14. https://www.digi.com/.
15. http://www.robot-electronics.co.uk/htm/md49tech.htm.
16. http://www.ni.com.
17. https://www.arduino.cc.
Part IV
Advanced Machining
Chapter 9
Advanced Machining Processes
Keywords Advanced machining Unconventional processes Non-traditional
processes Ultrasonic machining Water jet machining Abrasive water jet
machining Abrasive jet machining Chemical machining Electrical discharge
machining Electrochemical machining Chemical–mechanical polishing
Laser beam machining Ion beam machining Electron beam machining
Photochemical machining
1 Introduction
The forces applied on the workpiece cause stresses. Stresses measure the intensity
of the force. From a typical point in the workpiece, one can pass a plane that
hypothetically divides the workpiece in two parts. The atoms of one part apply the
force on the other part. The force per unit area provides the traction vector on that
plane. If the traction vectors are known in three orthogonal planes, the traction
vector on any plane can be obtained. Hence, once the components of the traction
vectors are specified on three orthogonal planes, the state of stress at that point gets
specified. As there are three components of a traction vector, stress at a point has
nine components. There are a number of failure theories which predict the occur-
rence of failure or otherwise as a function of 9 components of the stress. In the
material removal processes, the stresses are produced in order to cause local failure
of the material leading to separation of some material from the workpiece. In
conventional machining, stresses are produced by a wedge-shaped tool, which
generates contact stresses in the workpiece. In advanced manufacturing processes,
the local stresses are produced in a variety of ways, providing different types of
material removal processes. Some popular processes are described in this section.
In ultrasonic machining (USM) process, abrasives (of size 15–150 lm) are driven at
high velocity against the workpiece by using a tool oscillating at a high frequency
(about 19–25 kHz) and low amplitude (15–50 lm) [2–4]. The tool oscillates per-
pendicular to the surface to be machined. In USM, a tool oscillating at ultrasonic
frequency throws the particles of different sizes on the workpiece. Sometimes, the
abrasive particles are also hammered by the tool. The abrasive particles are sus-
pended in a medium such as water, thus making a slurry. Typical abrasive particles
are cubic boron nitride, aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, and boron carbide.
The process requires electrical energy. First, the low-frequency electrical supply
signal is transformed to a high-frequency signal using an ultrasonic wave generator.
The high-frequency electrical signal is converted to high-frequency linear
mechanical motion by using a transducer that transfers its motion to the tool through
a toolholder often called horn and made of Monel, titanium, and stainless steel. Often
the horn is designed with a gradually reducing cross section toward the tool end in
272 M. Das and U. S. Dixit
In abrasive jet machining (AJM) process, material removal takes place due to hitting
of the workpiece with a jet of gas containing abrasive particles. A review on AJM is
presented in [7]. Typical parameters of AJM are as follows: pressure 0.2–5 MPa, jet
Fig. 1 A schematic of
ultrasonic machining (USM)
experimental setup
9 Advanced Machining Processes 273
velocity 150–300 m/s, and the diameter of the nozzle 0.075–1.0 mm. Apart from the
dry air, the process can use nitrogen, carbon dioxide, and helium. Erosive action of
the abrasive particles is responsible for the removal of material from the workpiece
surface. Aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, crushed glass, cubic boron nitride, glass
beads, and sodium bicarbonate are the popularly used abrasive particles [8].
Elements of AJM are abrasive feeder, gas propulsion system, AJM nozzle,
machining chamber, and abrasives. Gas propulsion system generally supplies gas to
propel abrasive particles. Required quantity of abrasive particles is supplied by
abrasive feeder, and quantity is controlled by inducing vibration to the feeder. The
machining chamber is closed from outside environment to avoid the pollution of
atmosphere. AJM nozzle is usually made of high-wear-resistant tungsten carbide or
sapphire. Standoff distance, i.e., the distance between the nozzle tip to workpiece
surface, is maintained at 0.75–1.0 mm for getting the maximum material removal
rate. A schematic of AJM system is shown in Fig. 2.
AJM is generally used for trimming, deburring, cleaning, and polishing. It is
suitable for machining very hard and brittle materials. It can produce fine and
complicated shape. The abrasive jet can access the internal portions. The process
can be used to manufacture electronic devices.
Water jet machining (WJM) process, also called hydrodynamic machining, works
on the principle of the effect of erosion of a high velocity and small diameter jet of
water on the workpiece surface. The process does not generate air-born dust and
thus is suitable for machining of composites and asbestos. It uses a high-pressure
and high-velocity water stream against the workpiece for cutting operation [9]. The
fine stream of water can be obtained from a small nozzle with a diameter of 0.1–
0.4 mm. The typical pressure in the nozzle is 400 MPa that can produce a jet of
velocity up to 900 m/s. Such a high pressure is generated through a combination of
oil pump and intensifier. Intensifier amplifies the oil pressure by about 40 times. To
minimize pulsation in water pressure, an accumulator is used. Autofrettaged and
shrink fitted tubes are used to handle high pressure of water. Generally, the nozzles
274 M. Das and U. S. Dixit
are made of stainless steel, sapphire, ruby or in rare cases diamond. A good fil-
tration system is essential to remove the small particles in water during operation.
A noise catcher is also needed. A schematic of WJM setup is depicted in Fig. 3.
Process parameters for WJM are standoff distance, nozzle diameter, pressure,
feed rate. Standoff distance should be 1–3 mm so that fluid should not disperse
before reaching to the work surface. Thick materials can be machined at low feed
rate with high pressure. This process can be used to cut floor tile, carpet, textiles,
leather, plastic, composites, and cardboard [10]. WJM is also used for cutting
composites, wire stripping, and deburring process. Water jet at lower pressure (60–
200 MPa) has been used to cut insulation of the cable without damaging the
metallic cable.
When there is need of cutting very hard and thick metallic parts, the abrasive water
jet machining (AWJM) process is more appropriate than WJM. In AWJM process,
the abrasive particles are homogeneously mixed with water stream that impinges on
the workpiece surface with a very high kinetic energy. Water and abrasive streams
come from two different rigid pipes, and these two streams mix in the mixing
chamber before passing through the nozzle. Generally, abrasives used in this pro-
cess are aluminum oxide, silicon dioxide, and garnet with grit sizes ranging
between 60 and 120 [9]. For shallow cutting, fine particles and for high depth of cut
9 Advanced Machining Processes 275
coarse particles are used. The abrasive particles are continuously added to the water
stream. The diameter of nozzle is 0.25–0.65 mm. Nozzle orifice diameter in this
process is larger than WJM process so that high flow rate and energy of the jet can
be achieved. Water pressures are almost same as in WJM [11]. AWJM process is
used for machining hard materials [12]. In AWJM process, removal of material at
upper position of kerf is due to erosion wear and at the lower portion of the kerf at
higher depth is due to deformation wear.
AWJM consists of four important subsystems, i.e., pumping unit, abrasive water
jet nozzle, abrasive feeding system, and catcher. The functions of abrasive water jet
nozzle are mixing of abrasive and water and to form a high-velocity water abrasive
jet. When workpiece is moving and nozzle is stationary, a catcher is generally used.
A long tube-shaped catcher can be placed just below the jet at the lower part of the
workpiece for capturing used jet. The important factors affecting the process are
water pressure, nozzle diameter, size and concentrations of the abrasives, feed rate,
standoff distance, workpiece material, mixing tube (diameter and length), angle of
cutting, traverse speed, and number of passes.
AWJM is used for cutting metals (e.g., copper and its alloy, tungsten carbide,
lead, and aluminum) and nonmetal (e.g., concrete, graphite, silica, glass, and
acrylic). It can also be used for cutting sandwiched honeycomb-structure material
used in aerospace industries. Other industries using this process are nuclear, oil,
automotive, construction, etc. Slotting is a major application of this process. It can
be done in any material like stainless steel, mild steel, and alloy steel in the form of
plate, tube, and corrugated structure. Slot width is generally 0.75–2.25 mm, and
there are no embedded abrasives in the machined surfaces [12].
AFM is used for polishing and deburring workpiece with the use of abrasive
particles mixed in a viscoelastic polymeric medium. The polymeric medium con-
sists of silly putty, and generally, silicon carbide particles are used as abrasives. It is
suitable for finishing of complicated shapes on internal and external surfaces.
Mixture of abrasive and polymer is called medium, which flows onto the work
surface under pressure ranging between 0.7 and 20 MPa [13].
The schematic of AFM experimental setup is shown in Fig. 4. AFM setup
consists of two opposing cylinders. The workpiece is fixed through a workpiece
fixture in between them, and the medium flows through the workpiece from one
cylinder to the another cylinder. This process is repeated as many times as nec-
essary to get the desired accuracy and finishing in workpiece. To maintain a con-
stant viscosity of medium, an external cooling device is used to maintain the upper
temperature. Both manual and automatically controlled AFM machines are avail-
able in the market. Tooling is used to confine and direct the flow of medium inside
the workpiece for selective polishing of workpiece.
276 M. Das and U. S. Dixit
Fig. 4 A schematic of
abrasive flow machining setup
Fig. 5 Schematic of
magnetic abrasive finishing
tool can be obtained by oscillating the magnetic poles relative to the workpiece
[15]. Surface finish can be improved by increased flux density, increased machining
time, higher workpiece traverse speed, and smaller working gap.
MAF is used for polishing of balls and roller, finishing of inner tube surface, the
removal of oxide layer, polishing of fine component like printed circuit board,
removing the burr in gear, and polishing of complicate shapes [12]. It is also used
for finishing the internal and external surfaces of cylindrical workpiece. Types of
operation that can be performed on the workpiece are finishing, rounding the edges,
deburring, and introducing residual compressive stress.
Recently, nanoscale finish was achieved with the use of ultrasonic-assisted MAF
[16]. An schematic of the setup is depicted in Fig. 6. The worktable was imparted
ultrasonic vibrations at a frequency of 20 kHz and amplitude of 20 lm. A surface
roughness of the order 50 nm could be achieved.
Fig. 7 Schematic of magnetorheological finishing process. With permission from [18]. Copyright
(2009) Talyor & Francis
9 Advanced Machining Processes 279
In MRF process, the finishing forces are controlled by external magnetic field. The
process is not suitable for machining the internal surfaces of the workpiece.
Although AFM process can polish both internal and external complex freeform
surfaces, in this process, the viscosity of the rheological polishing medium cannot
be controlled and the cost of polishing medium is very high. Magnetorheological
abrasive flow finishing (MRAFF) process was developed by taking advantages of
both the processes. The schematic of MRAFF setup is shown in Fig. 8 [20].
In MRAFF process, magnetorheological polishing fluid is transferred through
workpiece using two opposing cylinders in the presence of a magnetic field in the
polishing zone. MR fluid viscosity is a function of the magnetic field. Rheological
behavior of MR fluid changes during entering and exiting the finishing zone from
Newtonian to Bingham plastic and again changes to Newtonian fluid. Selective
abrasion takes place due to applied magnetic field. The workpiece fixture is used to
flow the MR fluid from one cylinder to another cylinder. Material of workpiece
fixture should be non-magnetic, e.g., stainless steel. Around 0.6 T magnetic flux
density is generated on the workpiece surface using two electromagnets. Hydraulic
system is required for reciprocating motion of the pistons to simultaneously flow
the polishing medium in two cylinders. A constant pressure throughout the finishing
operation is maintained.
Rotational magnetorheological abrasive flow finishing (R-MRAFF) has working
principle similar to MRAFF. The difference is that in this process the magnets that
are just fixed in case of MRAFF are made to rotate with the help of a motor having
Fig. 8 A schematic diagram of MRAFF experimental setup. With permission from [20].
Copyright (2004) Elsevier
280 M. Das and U. S. Dixit
Fig. 9 A schematic of
R-MRAFF finishing process.
With permission from [21].
Copyright (2011) Taylor &
Francis
positive belt drive. On controlling the rpm of the motor, the finishing efficiency is
also controlled as finishing forces get varied. A schematic of R-MRAFF is shown in
Fig. 9 [21]. In R-MRAFF process, the abrasive particles follow a helical path due to
reciprocating motion generated by the hydraulic unit and the rotational motion of
the magnets by the motor surrounding the workpiece fixture. R-MRAFF not only
reduces the surface roughness value but also improves textures of the internal
surface of hollow cylindrical workpiece by generating cross-hatched pattern. This
helps in enhancing oil retention capability of piston-cylinder assembly [22].
Elastic emission machining (EEM) removes materials with atomic level of accuracy
(0.2–1 nm) by giving the workpiece a mirror-type finish. The schematic of
EEM process is shown in Fig. 10 [23]. In EEM process, a polyurethane material
ball is used and is mounted on a shaft which is driven by a variable speed motor.
The rotational axis is oriented at an angle of 45° with the polishing surface. The
workpiece is immersed in a mixture of zirconium dioxide or aluminum dioxide
abrasive particles and water [24]. In some cases, the rate of material removal is
nonlinear with respect to the concentration of the additives in the abrasive slurry. In
this process, the material removal happens at atomic level due to the powerful
interaction of the abrasive particles with the atoms of the workpiece without the
introduction of the dislocations. The process has similarity with chemical etching
and removes the material mainly by elastic fracture at atomic level. In EEM, surface
roughness value as low as 0.5 nm is obtained in glass. Surface roughness value in
silicon is reported to be less than 1 nm.
9 Advanced Machining Processes 281
Fig. 10 A schematic of elastic emission machining process. With permission from [23].
Copyright (1987) Elsevier
that converts AC to DC. EDM machine is equipped with cutoff protection circuit,
and in case of over voltage or over current, power cuts off. Dielectric system
consists of dielectric fluid, reservoir, pump, and delivery device. Generally used
dielectric fluids are lubricating oil, kerosene, transformer oil, deionized water, and
hydrocarbon oils. The dielectric fluid functions as an insulating agent in the
inter-electrode gap except at the time when ionization occurs in the presence of a
spark. It flushes debris out from the gap between workpiece and tool. It also
removes heat from tool and workpiece. Dielectric fluid should have high dielectric
strength, minimum ignition delay time, effective coolant, and high degree of
fluidity.
A tool material should have good machinability, conductivity, and wear resis-
tance. At the same time, it should be inexpensive. Generally copper, graphite, brass,
and tungsten are used as tool materials, the graphite being the most preferred. The
important process parameters are current, voltage, frequency of current,
inter-electrode gap, and duty cycle. With the increase in current or spark voltage,
rate of material removal as well as surface roughness increases. With the increase in
spark frequency, surface finish improves.
EDM process can be used for tool fabrication as well as for part production. It
can be employed to machine any electrically conductive material. It is used for
making dies for molding, casting, extrusion, wire drawing, stamping, forming, etc.
It is also used in making tooling for plastic injection molding [12]. It can be used to
machine thin and fragile components because in EDM there is no mechanical force.
A variant of EDM is wire EDM process, in which a wire of small diameter is
used to cut narrow kerf in workpiece. Thermal energy is generated between the wire
and the workpiece. Cutting path is achieved by feeding the wire to workpiece like a
band saw. During cutting operation, wire is advanced between supply pool and
take-up pool to get fresh electrode for better accuracy and constant narrow kerf. In
wire EDM also there is a need of dielectric fluid. Wire diameters range from 0.15 to
0.30 mm [12]. Brass, copper, tungsten, and molybdenum can be used as wire
material, and generally, deionized water is used as dielectric fluid because of its
high cooling effect and fire hazard.
Wire EDM system consists of power supply, dielectric system, wire positioning
system, and drive system. Pulse frequency of 1 MHz is used in wire EDM process.
High frequency of power supply gives better surface finish and reduced crater size.
Current-carrying capacity of wire is less than 20 A. For positioning system, 2-axis
table CNC machine is used. In case of short circuit, servo system senses and moves
back the wire to re-establish the gap between the work and tool. The function of
wire drive system is to deliver fresh wire and keep wire always under tension. Wire
is guided by guides generally made of sapphire and diamond. Wire is discarded
after one-time use.
Wire EDM is used for making stamping dies. Kerf generated in this process is so
narrow that it can be used to machine punch and die. Also, tools and parts with
complex shapes, like extrusion dies, can be made. Tolerances as small as 0.07 lm
can be achieved. A schematic of wire EDM process is shown in Fig. 12.
284 M. Das and U. S. Dixit
Fig. 13 A schematic of
electron beam machining
9 Advanced Machining Processes 285
drilling of holes of high aspect ratio, down to 0.05 mm diameter, and cutting of
slots. One drawback of the process is that it needs vacuum.
Fig. 14 A schematic of laser beam machining setup. With permission from [26]. Copyright
(2008) Elsevier
286 M. Das and U. S. Dixit
few coherent photons back into active lasing medium. These photons further
stimulate the emission of some more photons of the same frequency and phase. This
mechanism also permits a small percentage of coherent photons to exit the system
in the form of laser light.
For LBM, workpiece material should have low heat of fusion, high absorption of
light energy, low specific heat, poor reflectivity, low heat of vaporization, and good
conductivity of heat. LBM is utilized for the materials having high strength and
hardness like ceramics, glass and glass epoxy, cloth, plastics, rubber, wood.
Applications of LBM are drilling, slotting, scribing, and marking operations and 3D
micromachining. It can be effectively used for drilling holes of diameter 0.025–
0.50 mm [25].
In this process, a stream of plasma is used for machining. In PAC, temperature (as
high as 10,000–14,000 °C) is generated to cut the workpiece. Plasma cutting
operation is carried out by directing high-velocity plasma stream toward workpiece
that melts and vaporizes the metal. Water is used to clean the kerf formed by plasma
arc. Feed rate depends upon material that is going to be cut and its thickness along
the cutting path [12].
PAC system uses DC power supply, and plasma arc can be transferred or
non-transferred type. Non-transferred type arc has lower efficiency (60–85%) than
transferred arc type (80–95%). In non-transferred arc mode, arc is generated
between electrode and nozzle. Hence, workpiece can be either electrically con-
ductive or non-conductive. In the case of transferred arc mode, arc is generated
between electrode and workpiece. A schematic of plasma arc cutting system is
shown in Fig. 15.
Elements of PAC system are power supply, gas supply, cooling water system,
control console, and plasma torch. There are several torch designs. Air plasma torch
uses compressive air that ionizes and does cutting. Torch may fail because of
double arcing (arcing between electrode and nozzle as well as arcing between
Fig. 15 A schematic of
plasma arc cutting system
9 Advanced Machining Processes 287
nozzle and workpiece. Generally used electrode materials are zirconium, hafnium
(high resistance to oxidation), and tungsten (low resistance to oxidation). Zirconium
has more life than tungsten electrode. Dual-gas torch uses primary and secondary
gases. For example, nitrogen is used as a plasma gas, while oxygen or carbon
dioxide is used as secondary gas. To avoid oxidation of electrode, oxygen-injected
torch is used. In this type of nozzle, nitrogen is used as plasma gas; oxygen is
inducted in the downstream of nozzle. It is generally used for cutting mild steel. In
water-injected torch, water is used to constrict the plasma. A small quantity of water
vaporizes, and this thin film of steam constricts the plasma and also insulates the
nozzle. To avoid double arcing, the lower part of the nozzle may be made of
ceramics. PAC can be used for cutting of flat metal sheets and plates. It can also be
used for piercing holes. PAC can be used to cut material like plain carbon steel,
stainless steel, copper, and aluminum. By using plasma arc system, different shapes
can be formed on the workpiece.
In focused ion beam (FIB) machining, high-velocity electrons are released from a
cathode (high-voltage tungsten material) and as it moves toward the anode, it gets
hit with the fluid in the plasma region of the FIB tube. The ions of the gas/liquid get
accelerated and bombard the workpiece material. When the ion’s energy is higher
than that of the bonding energy of the atom, the workpiece atoms are removed [8].
The phenomenon of dislodging the atoms of the workpiece is called sputtering and
is akin to a football transferring its momentum to another football. The precision of
machining in this process can be up to 5 nm. If gas ions are fed, then normally
hydrogen or inert gases are used, and for liquid metal ion, gallium is used.
Figure 16 shows the schematic of FIB process highlighting the situation before and
after machining.
Focused ion beam machining is used in electronic industries where precision
plays a vital role. Nano-finishing can be done using this process for hard and brittle
Fig. 16 Schematic diagram showing the process a before and b after FIB machining
288 M. Das and U. S. Dixit
used for cleaning electrolytes and is made of anti-corrosive material, whereas piping
system is made from stainless steel and anti-corrosive material. Fixtures should be
made from insulating material, and there should be no vibration under hydraulic
force. Tools are made from aluminum, brass, copper, Monel, and bronze. Tool
material should have high machinability, conductivity, and corrosion resistance.
Workpiece should be electrically conductive, but work holder should be insulator
with good thermal stability and low moisture absorption. Most common work
holder materials are plastic and Perspex.
ECM is used to machine work material of very complex geometry. It is very
useful in die sinking, multiple hole drilling, and deburring. Typical products made
from ECM are turbine blades, curvilinear slots and gears, etc. It provides very good
surface finish.
Electrostream drilling (ESD) is a special variant of ECM, which is used for
drilling high-aspect ratio (300:1) holes of less than 1 mm diameter. The use of
acidic electrolyte ensures that metal sludge is dissolved and carried away as metal
ion. In electrostream drilling, electrically negatively charged high-velocity acid
electrolyte stream is used for the drilling operation [28]. As the stream strikes the
positively charged workpiece, electrochemical dissolution occurs. Machining takes
place in the same manner as a conventional ECM process. The dissolved material is
flushed out from the machining zone in the form of metal ions in the solution. Two
different ESD techniques are generally used for drilling, i.e., penetration drilling
and dwell drilling. Penetration drilling is used for making deep and accurate hole,
and dwell drilling is used for making shallow holes. In penetration drilling, cycle
starts when nozzle starts to feed into workpiece and a gap monitoring device is used
to maintain the gap, slow the feed rate, and trigger full power when accurate gap
between nozzle and workpiece is achieved. During the drilling cycle, nozzle is fed
at constant rate to maintain constant gap [12]. In dwell drilling, drilling operation is
done without feeding the nozzle into workpiece and proper distance between
workpiece and nozzle is maintained. In this technique, stream of electrolyte is
responsible for the shape of workpiece as the nozzle does not penetrate into hole.
This process can be used for drilling very small holes, curved holes, and holes at
steep angle [28]. It also can be used for machining of fuel nozzles, machining of oil
passage, machining of small hole, drilling regular array of hole in
corrosion-resistant material of low machinability, and to make holes in the bearing
for oil passage where EDM can crack the workpiece.
Photochemical machining (PCM) is just like chemical machining process [29]. The
difference is that in this a photoresist mask is used instead of a normal masking
material in PCM process. A photoresist is a UV photosensitive polymer supplied as
a liquid or dry film, and it is used to produce an image on metal. Where the
photoresist has been exposed to UV radiation, it becomes insoluble in a developer
solution and adheres strongly to the metal surface to form an etchant-resistant
coating. Once the photoresist has been imaged to produce an etchant-resistant
patterned coating, chemical etching is used to transfer that pattern into the metal by
selective removal as follows.
First, the removal of the dust, oil, debris, contaminants, and grease is done
chemically. Next, the photoresist coating is deposited. The coating is deposited by
hot rolling of the photoresist material against the metal. The metal sheets are
processed in safe yellow light environment at this stage. Always a phototool is
made for a new part. The phototool should suit the profile of the part. The profile of
phototool is normally produced by Computer-Aided Design (CAD) modeling [30].
The drawing or the image that has been created is sent to laser photoplotter.
Initially, it is created in a Mylar film, which is later developed. The polymer in the
photoresist coating is activated in the printing section so that the phototool is
transferred to the metal. A sandwich of metal coated with the phototool on the both
sides is created. The process is done under vacuum condition in order to avoid air
bubbles in between the metal and phototool layer. Now, the combination is exposed
to ultraviolet rays [30]. An image gets formed in the photoresist material. Now,
etching is carried out by spraying the etchants. After machining, the photoresist is
removed using NaOH solution. After removing photoresist, the metal is rinsed and
cleaned initially with normal water and then with deionized water. Table 1 shows
the different workpiece metals with their suitable etchant. Integrated circuits’ lead
frame is manufactured using this method which is used in electronic industries.
9 Conclusions
Glossary
Abrasives These are particles used to polish or clean hard surface by rubbing or
grinding
Advanced machining processes These are the material removal processes dif-
ferent from the conventional machining in which a wedge-shaped tool removes
the material by physical contact with the workpiece
Bingham plastic fluid Bingham plastic is a non-Newtonian viscoplastic fluid that
behaves as a rigid body at low stresses but flows at higher stresses
Carbonyl iron particles (CIP) Carbonyl iron is 99.5% purity iron particles
Coherent beam A coherent beam is having wave sources with constant phase
difference and same frequency
294 M. Das and U. S. Dixit
Cutting Tool Cutting tool in machining operation is used for removing material
from the workpiece using shear deformation. Cutting tool may be single-point or
multipoint based on the number of cutting edges
Deburring The unwanted piece of material that remains stuck to workpiece after
grinding, drilling, milling, and turning processes, etc., is called burrs. The
removal of burrs by some process is called deburring
Dielectric medium Dielectric materials are insulating material or a very poor
conductor of electric current. While placed in an electric field, no current flows
through them. Dielectric material can be polarized by an applied electric field
Electrical spark Electric spark is an abrupt electrical discharge that occurs when a
sufficiently high electric field generates an ionized, electrically conductive
channel through a normally insulating medium like air or gas
Electrolysis It is a process of chemical decomposition by passing an electric
current through a liquid
Electrolyte An electrolyte is a solution that dissociates into ions and acquires
electricity conducting capacity
Honeycomb structure Honeycomb structures are available in nature or can be
fabricated having in the form of a honeycomb
Laser The full form of laser is light amplification by stimulated emission of
radiation. Laser devices emit a coherent and monochromatic beam of light
Machining Machining refers to removal of material from workpiece for making a
product
Magnetorheological fluid MR fluid is a smart material whose rheological behavior
changes rapidly but it can be controlled easily in the presence of an applied
magnetic field
Mesh size of abrasive Mesh is a measurement of particle size often used in
determining the particle-size distribution of a granular material. Mesh size or
sieve size is defined as the number of openings in one square inch of a screen.
The higher the mesh number, the smaller the screen opening, and the smaller the
particle that will pass through
Photoresist Photoresist is a light-sensitive material used in photolithography and
photoengraving while making patterned coating on a surface
Piezoelectric Transducer This type of transducer works on the basis of piezo-
electric effect, derived from Greek word piezen, i.e., to squeeze or press. When
mechanical stress or forces are applied to a piezoelectric material like quartz
crystal, it produces electrical charges on its surface
Plasma Plasma is an ionized gas consisting of positive ions and free electrons and
is often called the fourth state of matter after solid, liquids, and gases
9 Advanced Machining Processes 295
Rheology Rheology is the study of the deformation and flow of matter under
applied forces
Sputtering During sputtering, atoms or molecules are ejected from a workpiece
material due to the bombardment ion beam
Standoff distance (SOD) The distance between the nozzle tip and workpiece
surface is called standoff distance in abrasive jet machining
Surface roughness Surface roughness refers to small local deviations of a real
surface from an ideally perfect flat surface
Transducer A transducer is a device that converts one form of energy into another
form
Ultrasonic frequency The term ultrasonic refers to frequency above audible sound
frequency of human ear, generally over 20 kHz
Viscoelastic medium It is a material exhibiting both viscous and elastic property
while undergoing deformation. Viscous materials generally resist shear flow and
exhibit time-dependent strain. The elastic materials strain when stretched and
quickly return to their original state once the stress is removed.
References
1. McNeil, I. (1990). Introduction: Basic tools, devices and mechanisms. In I. McNiel (Eds.), An
encyclopedia of the history of technology (pp. 1–43). Routledge, London.
2. Jadoun, R. S., Kumar, P., Mishra, B. K., & Mehta, R. C. S. (2006). Manufacturing process
optimisation for tool wear rate in ultrasonic drilling of engineering ceramics using the Taguchi
method. International Journal of Machining and Machinability of Materials, 1, 94–114.
https://doi.org/10.1504/IJMMM.2006.010660.
3. Kennedy, D. C., & Grieve, R. J. (1975). Ultrasonic machining—A review. Production
Engineer, 54, 481–486. https://doi.org/10.1049/tpe:19750245.
4. Goetze, D. (1956). Effect of vibration amplitude, frequency, and composition of the abrasive
slurry on the rate of ultrasonic machining in ketos tool steel. The Journal of the Acoustical
Society of America, 28, 1033–1037. https://doi.org/10.1121/1.1908545.
5. Drozda, T. J. (1983). Tool and manufacturing engineers handbook: Machining (4th ed.).
Dearborn, Michigan: Society of Manufacturing Engineers.
6. Lalchhuanvela, H., Doloi, B., & Bhattacharyya, B. (2012). Enabling and understanding
ultrasonic machining of engineering ceramics using parametric analysis. Materials and
Manufacturing Processes, 27, 443–448. https://doi.org/10.1080/10426914.2011.585497.
7. Ramachandran, N., & Ramakrishnan, N. (1993). A review of abrasive jet machining. Journal
of Materials Processing Technology, 39, 21–31. https://doi.org/10.1016/0924-0136(93)
90005-Q.
8. McGeough, J. A. (1988). Advanced Methods of Machining. London: Springer.
9. Miller, R. K. (1991). Waterjet cutting: Technology and industrial applications. Lilburn, GA:
Fairmont Press.
10. Maid, M. (1988). Cutting with high-energy water-jet in industrial applications. Materials and
Design, 9, 294–296. https://doi.org/10.1016/0261-3069(88)90007-6.
296 M. Das and U. S. Dixit
11. Momber, A. W., Kovacevic, R. (2012). Principles of abrasive water jet machining. Berlin:
Springer Science & Business Media.
12. Benedict, G. (1987). Nontraditional machining processes. New York: Marcel Decker Inc.
13. Rhoades, L. (1991). Abrasive flow machining: A case study. Journal of Materials Processing
Technology, 28, 107–116. https://doi.org/10.1016/0924-0136(91)90210-6.
14. Jha, S., & Jain, V. K. (2006). Nanofinishing techniques. Micromanufacturing and
nanotechnology (pp. 171–195). Berlin, Heidelberg: Springer.
15. El-Hofy, H. A-G. (2013). Fundamentals of machining processes: Conventional and
nonconventional processes (2nd ed.). USA: CRC Press.
16. Shukla, V. C., Pandey, P. M., Dixit, U. S., et al. (2017). Modeling of normal force and
finishing torque considering shearing and ploughing effects in ultrasonic assisted magnetic
abrasive finishing process with sintered magnetic abrasive powder. Wear, 390, 11–22. https://
doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2017.06.017.
17. Kordonsky, W. I. (1993). Magnetorheological effect as a base of new devices and
technologies. Journal of Magnetism and Magnetic Materials, 122, 395–398. https://doi.org/
10.1016/0304-8853(93)91117-P.
18. Sidpara, A., Das, M., & Jain, V. K. (2009). Rheological characterization of magnetorheo-
logical finishing fluid. Materials and Manufacturing Processes, 24, 1467–1478. https://doi.
org/10.1080/10426910903367410.
19. Tichy, J. A. (1991). Hydrodynamic lubrication theory for the Bingham plastic flow model.
Journal of Rheology, 35, 477–496. https://doi.org/10.1122/1.550231.
20. Jha, S., & Jain, V. K. (2004). Design and development of the magnetorheological abrasive
flow finishing (MRAFF) process. International Journal of Machine Tools and Manufacture,
44, 1019–1029. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijmachtools.2004.03.007.
21. Das, M., Jain, V. K., & Ghoshdastidar, P. S. (2011). The out-of-roundness of the internal
surfaces of stainless steel tubes finished by the rotational-magnetorheological abrasive flow
finishing process. Materials and Manufacturing Processes, 26, 1073–1084. https://doi.org/10.
1080/10426914.2010.537141.
22. Das, M., Jain, V. K., & Ghoshdastidar, P. S. (2012). Nanofinishing of flat workpieces using
rotational–magnetorheological abrasive flow finishing (R-MRAFF) process. International
Journal of Advanced Manufacturing Technology, 62, 405–420. https://doi.org/10.1007/
s00170-011-3808-2.
23. Mori, Y., Yamauchi, K., & Endo, K. (1987). Elastic emission machining. Precision
Engineering, 9, 123–128. https://doi.org/10.1016/0141-6359(87)90029-8.
24. Mori, Y., Ikawa, N., Okuda, T., & Yamagata, K. (1976). Numerically controlled elastic
emission machining. Osaka University, Technology Reports, 26, 283–294.
25. Meijer, J. (2004). Laser beam machining (LBM), state of the art and new opportunities.
Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 149, 2–17. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jmatprotec.
2004.02.003.
26. Dubey, A. K., & Yadava, V. (2008). Laser beam machining—A review. International
Journal of Machine Tools and Manufacture, 48, 609–628. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.
ijmachtools.2007.10.017.
27. Hewidy, M. S. (2005). Controlling of metal removal thickness in ECM process. Journal of
Materials Processing Technology, 160, 348–353. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jmatprotec.2003.
08.007.
28. Ahmed, M., & Duffield, A. (1990). The drilling of small deep holes by acid ECM. In
Proceedings of Advanced Machining Technology III.
29. Weller, E. (1984). Nontraditional machining processes. Dearborn, Michigan: Society of
manufacturing engineers.
30. Allen, DM. (1986). The principles and practice of photochemical machining and
photoetching. Adam Hilger, Techno House, Redcliffe Way, Bristol BS 1 6 NX, UK.
31. Ein-Eli, Y., & Starosvetsky, D. (2007). Review on copper chemical–Mechanical polishing
(CMP) and post-CMP cleaning in ultra large system integrated (ULSI)—An electrochemical
perspective. Electrochimica Acta, 52, 1825–1838. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.electacta.2006.07.039.
Chapter 10
Comparative Assessment and Merit
Appraisal of Thermally Assisted
Machining Techniques for Improving
Machinability of Titanium Alloys
Abstract Titanium-based alloys are highly recognised for the outstanding strength,
lightweight, stable properties and exceptional resistance to corrosion which make
them greatly suitable material for industry applications involving harsh environ-
mental conditions such as elevated temperature. However, in product manufacture,
machining of these alloys tends to produce poor surface quality with accelerated
tool wear and low material removal rate, resulting from large cutting forces,
excessive workpiece temperatures and chemical reactivity owing to high yield
stress and low thermal conductivity. In overcoming these manufacturing challenges,
industry practice supported by current research identifies the significantly useful
potential for thermally assisted machining (TAM) techniques for improving
machinability of titanium-based alloys whereby localised workpiece heating is
applied to temporarily reduce metal hardness at the cutting point for lessening
cutting forces. Reviewing current literature, this paper appraises various manu-
facturing issues related to the machining of these alloys and the potential
improvement to machinability characteristics of these alloys from the application of
TAM techniques. A detailed evaluation is presented on the alloy machinability
influenced by workpiece heating prior to or during machining process using
external heat source. This investigation recognises that the laser-assisted machining
(LAM) reduces cutting forces by 30–60% and tool wear by 90%. It observes that
the plasma-assisted machining (PAM) reduces cutting force by 20–40%, increases
material removal rate by 200% and enhances the tool life by 150 times.
Additionally, the induction-assisted machining (IAM) is noted to reduce cutting
force by 36–54% while increasing the tool life and material removal rate by 206 and
214%, respectively.
1 Introduction
A tremendous growth has been witnessed in the use of advanced materials for
improving technical efficiency and cost-effectiveness in engineering applications
recently. In complying with industry needs, high-performance materials are con-
stantly developed to satisfy superior products quality with extended dimension
accuracy and surface finish. Among many advanced engineering materials used,
titanium alloys are at the forefront of technical choice due to their extraordinary
material properties that surpass traditional steel and aluminium alloys, particularly
for applications where lightweight, higher strength and stable properties at elevated
service temperatures and harsh environments are prime considerations [1–3]. Some
such application examples are the product design in automotive, aerospace, marine
and power generation industries, where the system efficiency, reliability and fuel
economy largely dependent upon the strength-to-weight ratio of alloys used and
their operating longevity.
Titanium alloys offer unique combinations of exceptional mechanical properties
and superior physical characteristics of high resistance to corrosion, fatigue and
oxidation, underpinning the alloys’ popularity as highly sought-after lightweight
alternative [4, 5]. In particular, Ti-6Al-4V alloy is widely utilised in important
components in the aerospace sector for higher ratio of strength-to-weight and in
heat exchangers [6–9] for high temperature and corrosion tolerance. Chemically
inert and stable physical properties make titanium alloys highly attractive and
biocompatible for producing biomedical implements for diseased bone replace-
ment, cartilage and spinal fixation [10–14], and in food processing industries. In
producing modern aircraft such as Boeing 787, titanium alloys have become even
more attractive due to their similar thermal expansion coefficients to common
aviation materials of aluminium and graphite [3, 8, 15] with the added benefits of
superior galvanic resistance and excellent creep resistance.
Table 1 shows inclusive research studies involving the machining of titanium alloys
under dry conditions for comparative assessment and merit appraisal of techniques for
improving machinability. These studies aptly recognise titanium-based alloys to be
extremely hard to machine, especially at higher surface speed, even by latest cutting
tools and methods [16, 17]. It is observed that poor surface finish quality is evidently
noticeable at rather low machining speeds between 60 and 120 m/min and beyond
[18]. Such machining issues are attributed to excessive cutting forces generation at tool
tip due to high material hardness that also leads to elevated workpiece temperatures
contributed by lower thermal conductivity of these materials. Tool chatter arising due
to large machining forces leads to rough surface finish which is further compounded by
chemical reactivity due to high cutting temperatures [19, 20]. These effects are exag-
gerated with increased cutting speeds, making it very complex for machining titanium
Table 1 Summary of research work on dry machining different alloys using several types of cutting tools
10
[54] polycrystalline diamond (PCD) and uncoated uniform wear in PCD compare to that of uncoated
tungsten carbide–cobalt (WC-Co) during end WC-Co
milling –To avoid tool wear, the allowed speed should be
below 120 m/min for PCD, while for WC-Co is up
to 40 m/min
–Because of the better tool performance and lesser
chatter in PCD, the surface roughness is lower.
(continued)
301
Table 1 (continued)
302
(continued)
Table 1 (continued)
10
to a precise size and shape at higher cutting speed [21, 22], hence imposing limits on
production economy and efficiency. Therefore, the present industry trend is to search
for effective approaches or methods for improving machinability of these alloys.
Some investigations are dedicated to the development and implementation of
technological innovations [23, 24] in overcoming operational challenges and
enhance performance capabilities [25]. At the forefront of such techniques is
thermally assisted machining (TAM) that reduce ductile deformation in the cutting
zone [26, 27]. In this, the workpiece surface is heated just before machining and the
material temperature is raised to reduce yield strength locally within the deforma-
tion zone at the cutting tool edge, thus minimising cutting forces [28]. TAM process
requires operating conditions to be managed inside an optimal domain for a certain
workpiece material for obtaining the desired outcome, such as expected surface
integrity and extended cutting tool life [27, 29].
For machining titanium alloys, TAM technique has been attempted with dif-
ferent heating sources and configurations, namely high-frequency induction coil
[30–33], plasma [34–38], and laser beam [39–43]. These studies have appraised
potential improvement in the machinability of titanium-based alloys. This paper
provides an exhaustive compilation and a detailed review of these investigations,
identifying specific issues related to titanium alloys machining and the merits of
various TAM approaches, including workpiece preheating before/during the
machining. Specific emphasis is placed on the reduction of machining forces,
surface roughness and tool wear.
The following section presents a detailed discussion on the difficulties and issues
associated with machining of titanium-based alloys.
than normal for the cutting tool. Increased cutting force arising from this effect is
detrimental to the machining process and leads to very high cutting tool wear rate.
Moreover, it has been reported that both compressive and tensile residual stresses
may present at the cutting zone in titanium alloys machining [75] depending on the
machining processes. The tensile stresses are not beneficial and should be min-
imised while compressive stresses are useful for fortifying fatigue strength [76].
TAM techniques enable to release these in varying degrees.
Upon applying cutting tool pressure, machining processes generate large cutting
forces and strong friction at the tool tip from plastic deformation at the workpiece–
tool contact interface [77]. Intense heat is also invariably produced at the cutting
zone, largely from plastic deformation and to a lesser extent by tool tip friction [63,
78]. Cutting forces and heat generation are acutely stronger with titanium alloys
having higher hardness and high-temperature strength [79]. It has been observed
that owing to elevated cutting zone temperature, a built-up edge is formed on
cutting tool as a protective layer of workpiece material [80]. Thickness of this layer
tends to decrease with increased cutting speed, causing higher rate of tool wear.
Additionally, acutely high temperature and resulting thermal stresses over work-
piece–tool contact length is a known major reason for micro/macro-crack devel-
opment along the cutting edge, which is designated as edge depression [81].
Figure 1 typically illustrates cracks developed at the tool’s cutting edge during
machining of Ti-555 alloy [67].
In machining, cutting zone temperature plays a crucial role in determining
product surface quality, manufactured tolerances and tool wear [82]. Typically in
machining, 90% of the work expended on plastic deformation is transformed to heat
creating intense temperature rise within the cutting zone [28]. About 75–80% of this
heat is captivated in cutting tool [19, 45], whereas the rest of heat is taken away by
the chips and workpiece. In easy-to-machine materials, chips may remove up to
25% of the generated cutting heat [83].
Titanium alloys tend to have poor thermal conductivity values [56, 84] because
of the constrained molecular slip in hexagonal crystal microstructure of these
alloys. This naturally hinders the heat diffusion process within the workpiece and
creates highly concentrated thermal stresses and steep temperature rise in the
cutting zone [56, 70, 85–87]. Affected by elevated temperatures and compressive
stresses, the plastic deformation occurring within the primary cutting region pro-
duces adiabatic shear bands [78, 88–90].
At high cutting speeds, rapidly forming chips would have lesser contact length
with the tool face and somewhat lower friction coefficient. However, resulting from
reduced heat removal by chips [19, 45, 70], the cutting temperature is significantly
elevated over the small interface between the tool face and chips [83, 91]. This
tends to severely damage the tool cutting edge, as shown in Fig. 2 [47]. With
titanium alloys machining, higher localised tool temperature is a serious and con-
cerning issue, especially at large cutting speeds.
Retention of high yield strength at higher temperature with lower elastic modulus
adversely affects the titanium alloys machinability [22, 73, 85]. With such condi-
tions, cutting tool pressure would deflect the workpiece significantly leading to tool
chatter/vibration and undercut [92, 93], hence creating detrimental effects of poor
surface quality and tolerance. It has also been noted that, under the compressive
force exerted by the tool, high cutting zone temperature would weld some workpiece
material to the tool edge. This welded material is built-up edge (BUE) [32]. Figure 3
[61] shows the BUE which was generated during machining titanium alloys with
cemented carbide (WC/Co) tools at machining speed of 60 m/min [80].
BUE
10 Comparative Assessment and Merit Appraisal of Thermally … 309
Chemical reaction initiates BUE formation at the tool-chip contact zone, which
induces chamfering and chipping of the cutting edge [46, 94]. This increases the
cutting forces eventually beginning to deflect the workpiece [94]. Therefore, BUE
is regarded as a root cause for producing unacceptable surface finish and poor
dimensional accuracy [61, 95, 96]. The development of BUE is influenced by
speed, machining temperature, workpiece material and the tool. A stable BUE plays
the significant role of acting as a protective layer for the cutting edge [97]. To the
contrary, an unstable BUE adversely impacts on both the cutting tool and surface
finish. Trent [98] has stated that the BUE reduces the contact length, implying high
cutting temperature and high stress concentration simultaneously occur restricted to
a minor region at the cutting edge (within 0.5 mm) [99]. This increases pressure
load on the tool edge while machining of titanium alloys [18]. Under limited
machining situations, machining of titanium-based alloys shows no tendency for
BUE to form, depending on the titanium alloy type (Table 2).
It was noted that cutting tools are very rapidly consumed owing to cohesion
between workpiece and the cutting tool while machining of titanium alloys [22, 84].
This is attributed to prevalent wear mechanisms, such as attrition, dissolution–
diffusion and adhesion at contact length between workpiece and cutting tool face.
Tool wearing triggers different types of tool failure [100, 101], as presented in
Figs. (4, 5, 6 and 7) [67]. These wear mechanisms do occur due to microhardening
and topography of material beneath the machined surface in machining of titanium
alloys [102, 103].
Coated tools may get delaminated at the cutting edge making it blunt [64, 104],
as illustrated in Fig. 5, because of incompatibility in thermal expansion coefficients
of coating and tool materials [59]. Ezugwu et al. [105] have identified that poor
thermal diffusion leading to higher machining zone temperature is the main reason
of tool consumption during machining of Ti-6Al-4V. Amalgamation of increased
machining load as well as elevated temperature at upper speeds causes rapid
chipping on tool edge [21, 106, 107], as shown in Fig. 6 [49]. High cutting tem-
perature also produces adhesion of small morsels of workpiece material on cutting
tool [59, 85], such as depicted in Figs. 6 [49].
The adhesion erodes the tool flank material, and such effects are accelerated
when the cutting depth and machining speed rise in high speed milling with PCD/
PCBN tools [64]. Repetitive adhesion of workpiece material promotes BUE for-
mation that gradually alters the cutting edge geometry [61]. For these reasons, it is
hard to machine titanium alloys with HSS steel cutting tools at speed 30 m/min and
by tungsten carbide tools at 60 m/min. Ceramic and cubic boron nitride tools are
not appropriate for machining titanium alloys since these react with titanium alloys
[64].
Titanium alloys react with many cutting tool materials, such as CBN and PCBN
at elevated (cutting) temperatures typically above 500 °C [3, 83]. In this thermally
triggered reactions, the cutting tool material is removed on an atomic scale [59,
111] producing a Tribo-chemical wear process. This mechanism can occur as
molecular–mechanical wear or corrosive wear or as a combination of both [81, 84].
Such fast reactivity between workpiece and tool causes smearing, galling and
310
Fig. 4 Crater wear at cutting edge in machining titanium alloy (Ti-555) [67]
Fig. 5 Delamination of coated cutting tool (WC-Co) in machining Ti-6242S alloy [59]
chipping of the machined surfaces [59, 108] as well as fast cutting tool wear [74], as
depicted in Fig. 7. Additionally at elevated cutting temperatures, titanium alloys
undergo oxidation forming compounds [109], while chips may get welded on to the
cutting tool face and machined surface [52, 57, 67, 110], causing machining issues.
Chip formation in machining is categorised to be (i) continuous chip, (ii) con-
tinuous chip with BUE and (iii) discontinuous chip [3, 112]. Chips produced during
titanium machining are observed to be discontinuous or segmented [80], particu-
larly at lesser speed around 40 m/min [112, 113], as illustrated by Fig. 8 [114]. This
is because, with titanium alloys, the plastic deformation within the primary cutting
zone is very difficult and said to undergo “Catastrophic thermos plastic shear” [61,
83], where the process is unstable and non-homogeneous [88] due to extreme
material hardness of these alloys. Consequently, the chip formation occurs with
cyclic frequent chip breakage [88] and increased flank wear.
Discontinuous chips are observed to have much shorter contact length with tool
face compared to a continuous chip—approximately one-third length [18, 44, 74].
312 O. A. Shams et al.
Chipping
Pramanik and Littlefair [96] have stated that the microstructure of titanium alloy
determines the cutting speed at which segmented chip formation would begin. For
titanium alloys, Fig. 9 [113] illustrates various chip formation shapes/types asso-
ciated with different cutting speeds [44, 61].
Discontinuous chips have tendency to induce fluctuations in cutting forces,
especially when alpha–beta alloys are machined [99]. Shivpuri et al. [109] have
10 Comparative Assessment and Merit Appraisal of Thermally … 313
Fig. 9 Types of chip microstructures in conventional machining of titanium [113] (Scale bar
represents 100 µm)
reported that the phenomenon of chip segmentation would limit the metal removal
rates during cutting operation and causes cyclic vibration of forces.
The self-excited vibration significantly affects the formation of chips as well as
machined surface, which often referred to as chatter [80, 115]. The changing
frictional force due to chip flow on tool face generates shear localisation and also
314 O. A. Shams et al.
contributes to forced vibration and self-excited chatter [19, 116]. These vibrations
can lead to catastrophic tool failure. It has been observed that the tool vibration and
chatter from segmented chip are associated with the thrust components of the
cutting forces and the periodic oscillation during machining [54, 91]. Also, the
serration chip intensity increases the fluctuations of cutting forces and induces
dynamic stresses at the cutting tool, triggering high tool wear [18, 117].
Chip formation instability induced by high cutting temperature and the micro-
fatigue loading thus applied on the tool tip is accountable for austere wear in flank
and decreased cutting tool life [118, 119] in titanium alloy machining. These
invariably affect the stability of the cutting edge leading to sub-surface defects and
inaccurate dimensions of the machined surface [92, 105, 120].
In machining hard titanium alloys, extraordinarily high cutting temperatures are
encountered owing to the combined effects of difficult plastic deformation, seg-
mented chip formation, poor workpiece thermal conductivity and self-induced tool
chatter, resulting in unacceptable machined surface quality and various forms of
cutting tool damage to shorten tool life. All these detrimental effects lead to
machining process inefficiencies and higher manufacturing product cost. The fol-
lowing section examines the status-quo in methods to increase the machinability of
titanium alloys, based on thermally assisted machining (TAM) approaches.
Over the last four decades, different techniques have been considered and applied in
overcoming problems associated with surface quality and tool wear during titanium
alloy machining [104]. Among these methods, thermally assisted machining (TAM)
has emerged as a forerunner, which involves workpiece preheating with precisely
coordinated external heat sources. This technique was first devised by Tigham in
1889 and since then has evolved to use heating methods incorporating plasma, laser
and induction coil systems with varying degrees of thermal generation intensities
[121, 122].
Conceptually, TAM approach applies localised heating in advance of the cutting
point to soften the workpiece surface layer that reaches cutting tool for machining
[123]. The external heating locally improves ductility of workpiece and reduces
forces required for plastic deformation, thus potentially alleviating the concerning
issues of high temperature rise and tool chatter [91, 124, 125]. Figure 10
schematically shows a TAM configuration, where the heat source position and
power are essentially dependent on machining variables and the distribution of
temperature to be achieved in workpiece. In some cases, instead of the workpiece,
the cutting tool is heated to manage the behaviour of work material [126, 127].
Due to low thermal conductivity and material hardness, in machining titanium
alloys, TAM requires careful and appropriate selection of preheating method based
on source heating power, source position, machining speed, depth of cut and feed.
Also, the material of tool should be capable to endure more than 300 °C surface
10 Comparative Assessment and Merit Appraisal of Thermally … 315
temperatures and have steady chemical and thermal behaviours, and adequate
resistance to wear.
It is noted that the heating strategy for turning process is slightly different to that
of milling, due to rotational differences in the cutting configurations of the two
methods. In turning, the cutting area is repeatedly heated [104] therefore would
require less heating intensity compared to milling, where the cutting area does not
move as fast as in turning. A typical TAM arrangement for milling is shown in
Fig. 11 [128] along with workpiece temperature distribution.
In TAM, the effectiveness of the approach is critically dependent on the pre-
heating temperature, which requires careful control to prevent overheating of the
workpiece and material deformation [121, 129]. In selecting external heating,
considerations should include not to over soften the surface layer in the primary
cutting zone, which can lead to unwanted deformation that can bring about other
machining complexities [3, 41].
316 O. A. Shams et al.
Fig. 12 Relationship
between temperature and
mechanical strength of
selected hard-to-machine
alloys [128]
10 Comparative Assessment and Merit Appraisal of Thermally … 317
vertical component of the cutting force which reduces dynamic impact on the tool
and advances tool’s mechanical and thermal fatigue characteristics, operational life
and machining cost-effectiveness [96, 138].
Sun et al. [139] explored the influence of laser preheat in milling of Ti-6Al-4V.
They noticed significant reduction of feed force within 200–450 °C temperature.
Ayed et al. [140] observed reduced machining forces with the laser power up to a
certain value. Heating beyond this adversely affected because of chip melting and
melted chips sticking to the tool rake face, especially when the laser-cutting tool
clearance was 3 mm.
Figure 14 [140] illustrates the cutting force reduction with the applied laser
power for preheating. It is noted that a more than 50% reduction in machining
forces was achieved when the laser beam and cutting tool gap was 5 mm. However,
increased feed and speed impart opposite effect on the reduction of machining
forces. It is concluded that a substantial decrease of forces is generally possible with
higher levels of external heating.
The machining force is linearly proportional to the variation of feed and/or depth
of cut [141] in the course of laser-assisted machining of titanium alloys
(Ti-6Cr-5Mo-5V-4Al) [142] and (Ti-10V-2Fe-3Al) [113]. During the turning of
(Ti-6Cr-5Mo-5V-4Al) alloy, the cutting forces decrease by about 15% at laser
power of 1200 W, feed 0.15–0.25 mm/rev and speeds within 25–100 m/min.
Fig. 14 Reduction rate of machining force while machining Ti-6Al-4V alloy at feed, a 0.1 mm/
rev, and b 0.2 mm/rev [140] with speed 40 and 80 m/min and cutting depth 1 mm
318 O. A. Shams et al.
Fig. 15 Tool damage, (a) rake face (b) flank face of cutting tool inserts at speed 160 m/min with
laser heating, and (c) rake face (d) flank face of cutting tool inserts under similar machining
circumstances under without laser heating [142]
10 Comparative Assessment and Merit Appraisal of Thermally … 319
Fig. 16 SEM views of chip sections at varying laser powers at speed 40 m/min and feed 0.2 mm/
rev, a no laser, b 500 W, c 1000 W, d schematic chip morphology [140]
320 O. A. Shams et al.
5 Comparative Analysis
6 Conclusions
Glossary
References
1. Ezugwu, E., & Wang, Z. (1997). Titanium alloys and their machinability—A review.
Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 68(3), 262–274.
2. Gorynin, I. (1999). Titanium alloys for marine application. Materials Science and
Engineering A, 263(2), 112–116.
3. Yang, X., & Richard Liu, C. (1999). Machining titanium and its alloys. Machining Science
and Technology, 3(1), 107–139.
4. Shokrani, A., Dhokia, V., & Newman, S. T. (2012). Environmentally conscious machining
of difficult-to-machine materials with regard to cutting fluids. International Journal of
Machine Tools and Manufacture, 57, 83–101.
5. Gurrappa, I. (2003). Characterization of titanium alloy Ti-6Al-4V for chemical, marine and
industrial applications. Materials Characterization, 51(2), 131–139.
6. Boyer, R. (1996). An overview on the use of titanium in the aerospace industry. Materials
Science and Engineering A, 213(1), 103–114.
7. Zhou, Y., Zeng, W., & Yu, H. (2005). An investigation of a new near-beta forging process
for titanium alloys and its application in aviation components. Materials Science and
Engineering A, 393(1), 204–212.
8. Pérez, J., Llorente, J., & Sanchez, J. (2000). Advanced cutting conditions for the milling of
aeronautical alloys. Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 100(1), 1–11.
9. Ezugwu, E. (2005). Key improvements in the machining of difficult-to-cut aerospace
superalloys. International Journal of Machine Tools and Manufacture, 45(12), 1353–1367.
10. Rack, H. J., & Qazi, J. (2006). Titanium alloys for biomedical applications. Materials
Science and Engineering C, 26(8), 1269–1277.
11. Niinomi, M. (1998). Mechanical properties of biomedical titanium alloys. Materials Science
and Engineering A, 243(1), 231–236.
12. Niinomi, M. (2008). Mechanical biocompatibilities of titanium alloys for biomedical
applications. Journal of the Mechanical Behavior of Biomedical Materials, 1(1), 30–42.
13. Liu, X., Chu, P. K., & Ding, C. (2004). Surface modification of titanium, titanium alloys,
and related materials for biomedical applications. Materials Science and Engineering: R:
Reports, 47(3), 49–121.
14. Murr, L., et al. (2009). Microstructure and mechanical behavior of Ti–6Al–4V produced by
rapid-layer manufacturing, for biomedical applications. Journal of the Mechanical Behavior
of Biomedical Materials, 2(1), 20–32.
15. Thomas, M., Turner, S., & Jackson, M. (2010). Microstructural damage during high-speed
milling of titanium alloys. Scripta Materialia, 62(5), 250–253.
16. Mantle A., & Aspinwall, D. K. (1998). Tool life and surface roughness when high speed
machining a gamma titanium aluminide, progress of cutting and grinding, in Fourth
International Conference on Progress of Cutting and Grinding, U. A. Turpan (Ed.) (pp. 89–
94). China: International Academic Publishers.
17. Abele, E., & Hölscher, R. (2014). New technology for high speed cutting of titanium alloys.
In New Production Technologies in Aerospace Industry (pp. 75–81). Berlin: Springer.
18. Venugopal, K., Paul, S., & Chattopadhyay, A. (2007). Growth of tool wear in turning of
Ti-6Al-4V alloy under cryogenic cooling. Wear, 262(9), 1071–1078.
19. Oosthuizen, G. A., et al. (2010). A review of the machinability of titanium alloys. R&D
Journal of the South African Institution of Mechanical Engineering, 26, 43–52.
20. Veiga, C., Davim, J., & Loureiro, A. (2013). Review on machinability of titanium alloys:
The process perspective. Reviews on Advanced Materials Science, 34(2), 148–164.
21. Bandapalli C., Sutaria B. M., & Bhatt, V. D. (2013). High speed machining of Ti-alloys—A
critical review. In Proceedings of the 1 International and 16 National Conference on
Machines and Mechanisms (iNaCoMM2013) (pp. 324–331). IIT Roorkee: India.
22. Che-Haron, C. (2001). Tool life and surface integrity in turning titanium alloy. Journal of
Materials Processing Technology, 118(1), 231–237.
326 O. A. Shams et al.
23. Lauwers, B., Klocke F., & Klink, A. (2010). Advanced manufacturing through the
implementation of hybrid and media assisted processes. International Chemnitz
Manufacturing Colloquium, 54, 205–220.
24. Gupta, K., & Laubscher, R. F. (2016). Sustainable machining of titanium alloys: A critical
review. Proceedings of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers, Part B: Journal of
Engineering Manufacture, 0954405416634278.
25. Warap, N., Mohid, Z., & Rahim, E. A. (2013). Laser assisted machining of titanium alloys.
In Materials Science Forum. Trans Tech Publ.
26. Madhavulu, G., & Ahmed, B. (1994). Hot machining process for improved metal removal
rates in turning operations. Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 44(3), 199–206.
27. Tosun, N., & Ozler, L. (2004). Optimisation for hot turning operations with multiple
performance characteristics. The International Journal of Advanced Manufacturing
Technology, 23(11–12), 777–782.
28. Radovanovic, M. R., & Dašić, P. V. (2006) LASER ASSISTED TURNING. In Research
and Development in Mechanical Industry (pp. 312–316), RaDMI 2006, Budva,
Montenegro..
29. Rebro P. A., et al. (2002). Comparative assessment of laser-assisted machining for various
ceramics (Vol. 30, pp. 153–160). Transactions of North American Manufacturing Research
Institution.
30. Amin, A., & Abdelgadir, M. (2003). The effect of preheating of work material on chatter
during end milling of medium carbon steel performed on a vertical machining center (VMC).
Journal of Manufacturing Science and Engineering, 125(4), 674–680.
31. Amin, A. N., et al. (2008). Effects of workpiece preheating on surface roughness, chatter and
tool performance during end milling of hardened steel D2. Journal of Materials Processing
Technology, 201(1), 466–470.
32. Ginta, T. L., et al. (2009). Improved tool life in end milling Ti-6Al-4V through workpiece
preheating. European Journal of Scientific Research, 27(3), 384–391.
33. Lajis, M. A., et al. (2009). Hot machining of hardened steels with coated carbide inserts.
American Journal of Engineering and Applied Sceices, 2(2), 421–427.
34. Kttagawa, T., & Maekawa, K. (1990). Plasma hot machining for new engineering materials.
Wear, 139(2), 251–267.
35. Leshock, C. E., Kim, J.-N., & Shin, Y. C. (2001). Plasma enhanced machining of Inconel
718: Modeling of workpiece temperature with plasma heating and experimental results.
International Journal of Machine Tools and Manufacture, 41(6), 877–897.
36. Novak, J., Shin, Y., & Incropera, F. (1997). Assessment of plasma enhanced machining for
improved machinability of Inconel 718. Journal of Manufacturing Science and Engineering,
119(1), 125–129.
37. De Lacalle, L. N. L., et al. (2004). Plasma assisted milling of heat-resistant superalloys.
Journal of Manufacturing Science and Engineering, 126(2), 274–285.
38. Popa, L. (2012). Complex study of plasma hot machining (PMP). Revista de Tehnologii
Neconventionale, 16(1), 26.
39. Jau B. M., Copley S. M., & Bass, M. (1981). Laser assisted machining. In Proceedings of
the Ninth North American Manufacturing Research Conference (pp. 12–15). Pennsylvania:
University Park.
40. Rajagopal, S., Plankenhorn, D., & Hill, V. (1982). Machining aerospace alloys with the aid
of a 15 kW laser. Journal of Applied Metalworking, 2(3), 170–184.
41. Chryssolouris, G., Anifantis, N., & Karagiannis, S. (1997). Laser assisted machining: an
overview. Journal of Manufacturing Science and Engineering, 119(4B), 766–769.
42. Dumitrescu, P., et al. (2006). High-power diode laser assisted hard turning of AISI D2 tool
steel. International Journal of Machine Tools and Manufacture, 46(15), 2009–2016.
43. Thomas, T., & Vigneau, J. O. (1999). Laser-assisted milling process, Google Patents.
44. Komanduri, R., & Von Turkovich, B. (1981). New observations on the mechanism of chip
formation when machining titanium alloys. Wear, 69(2), 179–188.
10 Comparative Assessment and Merit Appraisal of Thermally … 327
45. Hartung, P. D., Kramer, B., & Von Turkovich, B. (1982). Tool wear in titanium machining.
CIRP Annals-Manufacturing Technology, 31(1), 75–80.
46. Dornfeld, D., et al. (1999). Drilling burr formation in titanium alloy, Ti-6AI-4V. CIRP
Annals-Manufacturing Technology, 48(1), 73–76.
47. Jawaid, A., Che-Haron, C., & Abdullah, A. (1999). Tool wear characteristics in turning of
titanium alloy Ti-6246. Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 92, 329–334.
48. Nabhani, F. (2001). Machining of aerospace titanium alloys. Robotics and
Computer-Integrated Manufacturing, 17(1), 99–106.
49. Wang, Z., Wong, Y., & Rahman, M. (2005). High-speed milling of titanium alloys using
binderless CBN tools. International Journal of Machine Tools and Manufacture, 45(1),
105–114.
50. Wang, Z., Rahman, M., & Wong, Y. (2005). Tool wear characteristics of binderless CBN
tools used in high-speed milling of titanium alloys. Wear, 258(5), 752–758.
51. Che-Haron C. H., & Jawaid. A. (2005). The effect of machining on surface integrity of
titanium alloy Ti-6% Al-4%V. Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 166, 188–192.
52. Nouari, M., & Ginting, A. (2006). Wear characteristics and performance of multi-layer
CVD-coated alloyed carbide tool in dry end milling of titanium alloy. Surface & Coatings
Technology, 200(18), 5663–5676.
53. Haron, C. C., Ginting, A., & Arshad, H. (2007). Performance of alloyed uncoated and
CVD-coated carbide tools in dry milling of titanium alloy Ti-6242S. Journal of Materials
Processing Technology, 185(1), 77–82.
54. Amin, A. N., Ismail, A. F., & Khairusshima, M. N. (2007). Effectiveness of uncoated WC–
Co and PCD inserts in end milling of titanium alloy—Ti–6Al–4V. Journal of Materials
Processing Technology, 192, 147–158.
55. Jianxin, D., Yousheng, L., & Wenlong, S. (2008). Diffusion wear in dry cutting of Ti–6Al–
4V with WC/Co carbide tools. Wear, 265(11), 1776–1783.
56. Dargusch, M. S., et al. (2008). Subsurface deformation after dry machining of grade 2
titanium. Advanced Engineering Materials, 10(1–2), 85–88.
57. Ibrahim, G., Haron, C. C., & Ghani, J. (2009). Surface integrity of Ti-6Al-4V ELI when
machined using coated carbide tools under dry cutting condition. The International Journal
of Mechanical and Materials Engineering, 4(2), 191–196.
58. Sun, S., Brandt, M., & Dargusch, M. (2009). Characteristics of cutting forces and chip
formation in machining of titanium alloys. International Journal of Machine Tools and
Manufacture, 49(7), 561–568.
59. Abdel-Aal, H., Nouari, M., & El Mansori, M. (2009). Tribo-energetic correlation of tool
thermal properties to wear of WC-Co inserts in high speed dry machining of aeronautical
grade titanium alloys. Wear, 266(3), 432–443.
60. Fang, N., & Wu, Q. (2009). A comparative study of the cutting forces in high speed
machining of Ti–6Al–4V and Inconel 718 with a round cutting edge tool. Journal of
Materials Processing Technology, 209(9), 4385–4389.
61. Armendia, M., et al. (2010). Comparison of the machinabilities of Ti6Al4V and TIMETAL®
54M using uncoated WC–Co tools. Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 210(2),
197–203.
62. Özel, T., et al. (2010). Investigations on the effects of multi-layered coated inserts in
machining Ti–6Al–4V alloy with experiments and finite element simulations. CIRP
Annals-Manufacturing Technology, 59(1), 77–82.
63. Kali, D., & Chauhan, S. R. (2011). Machinability study of titanium (Grade-5) alloy using
design of experiment technique. Engineering.
64. Honghua, S., et al. (2012). Tool life and surface integrity in high-speed milling of titanium
alloy TA15 with PCD/PCBN tools. Chinese Journal of Aeronautics, 25(5), 784–790.
65. Mhamdi, M., et al. (2012). Surface integrity of titanium alloy Ti-6Al-4V in ball end milling.
Physics Procedia, 25, 355–362.
66. Ugarte, A., et al. (2012). Machining Behaviour of Ti-6Al-4V and Ti-5553 Alloys in
interrupted cutting with PVD coated cemented carbide. Procedia CIRP, 1, 202–207.
328 O. A. Shams et al.
67. Nouari, M., & Makich, H. (2013). Experimental investigation on the effect of the material
microstructure on tool wear when machining hard titanium alloys: Ti–6Al–4V and Ti-555.
International Journal of Refractory Metals & Hard Materials, 41, 259–269.
68. Balaji, J., Krishnaraj, V., & Yogeswaraj, S. (2013). Investigation on high speed turning of
titanium alloys. Procedia Engineering, 64, 926–935.
69. Cotterell, M., et al. (2013). Temperature and strain measurement during chip formation in
orthogonal cutting conditions applied to Ti-6Al-4V. Procedia Engineering, 63, 922–930.
70. Shetty, P. K., et al. (2014). Machinability study on dry drilling of titanium alloy Ti-6Al-4V
using L 9 orthogonal array. Procedia Materials Science, 5, 2605–2614.
71. Li, N., et al. (2017). Experimental investigation with respect to the performance of deep
submillimeter-scaled textured tools in dry turning titanium alloy Ti-6Al-4V. Applied Surface
Science, 403, 187–199.
72. Nakayama, K., Arai, M., & Kanda, T. (1988). Machining characteristics of hard materials.
CIRP Annals-Manufacturing Technology, 37(1), 89–92.
73. Darsin, M., & Basuki H. A. (2014). Development machining of titanium alloys: A review. In
Applied Mechanics and Materials. Trans Tech Publ.
74. Lütjering, G., & Williams, J. C. (2003). Titanium (Vol. 2). Berlin: Springer.
75. Pramanik, A., et al. (2017). Fatigue life of machined components. Advances in
Manufacturing, 5(1), 59–76.
76. Ulutan, D., & Ozel, T. (2011). Machining induced surface integrity in titanium and nickel
alloys: A review. International Journal of Machine Tools and Manufacture, 51(3), 250–280.
77. Jaffery, S., & Mativenga, P. (2009). Assessment of the machinability of Ti-6Al-4V alloy
using the wear map approach. The International Journal of Advanced Manufacturing
Technology, 40(7), 687–696.
78. Arrazola, P.-J., et al. (2009). Machinability of titanium alloys (Ti6Al4V and Ti555. 3).
Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 209(5), 2223–2230.
79. Isbilir, O., & Ghassemieh, E. (2013). Comparative study of tool life and hole quality in
drilling of CFRP/titanium stack using coated carbide drill. Machining Science and
Technology, 17(3), 380–409.
80. Odelros, S. (2012). Tool wear in titanium machining.
81. Balažic, M., & Kopač, J. (2010). Machining of Titanium Alloy Ti-6Al-4V for biomedical
applications. Strojniški vestnik-Journal of Mechanical Engineering, 56(3), 202–206.
82. Ying-lin K., et al. (2009). Use of nitrogen gas in high-speed milling of Ti-6Al-4V.
Transactions of Nonferrous Metals Society of China, 19, 530–534.
83. Machado, A., & Wallbank, J. (1990). Machining of titanium and its alloys—A review.
Proceedings of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers, Part B: Journal of Engineering
Manufacture, 204(1), 53–60.
84. Zhecheva, A., et al. (2005). Enhancing the microstructure and properties of titanium alloys
through nitriding and other surface engineering methods. Surface & Coatings Technology,
200(7), 2192–2207.
85. Kuttolamadom, M., et al. (2010). Investigation of the Machining of Titanium Components
for Lightweight Vehicles. 2010, SAE Technical Paper.
86. Kumar, J., & Kumar, V. (2011). Evaluating the tool wear rate in ultrasonic machining of
titanium using design of experiments approach. World Academy of Science, Engineering and
Technology, 81, 803–808.
87. Donachie, M. J. (2000). Titanium: A technical guide. ASM international.
88. Komanduri, R., & Hou, Z.-B. (2002). On thermoplastic shear instability in the machining of
a titanium alloy (Ti-6Al-4V). Metallurgical and Materials Transactions A, 33(9),
2995–3010.
89. El-Wardany, T., Mohammed, E., & Elbestawi, M. (1996). Cutting temperature of ceramic
tools in high speed machining of difficult-to-cut materials. International Journal of Machine
Tools and Manufacture, 36(5), 611–634.
90. Ezugwu, E., Bonney, J., & Yamane, Y. (2003). An overview of the machinability of
aeroengine alloys. Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 134(2), 233–253.
10 Comparative Assessment and Merit Appraisal of Thermally … 329
91. Pramanik, A. (2014). Problems and solutions in machining of titanium alloys. The
International Journal of Advanced Manufacturing Technology, 70(5–8), 919–928.
92. Dearnley, P., & Grearson, A. (1986). Evaluation of principal wear mechanisms of cemented
carbides and ceramics used for machining titanium alloy IMI 318. Materials Science and
Technology, 2(1), 47–58.
93. Bridges, P., & Magnus, B. (2001). Manufacture of Titanium Alloy Components for
Aerospace and Military Applications. France: Research and Technology Organization.
94. Shaw, M. C. (2005). Metal cutting principles (Vol. 2). New York: Oxford University Press.
95. Amin, A., Hossain M. I., & Patwari, A. U. (2011). Enhancement of machinability of Inconel
718 in end milling through online induction heating of workpiece. In Advanced Materials
Research. Trans Tech Publ.
96. Pramanik, A., & Littlefair, G. (2015). Machining of titanium alloy (Ti-6Al-4V)—Theory to
application. Machining Science and Technology, 19(1), 1–49.
97. Amin, A., & Ginta T. L. (2014). Heat-assisted machining. Netherlands: Elsevier.
98. Trent, E. M., & Wright P. K. (2000). Metal cutting. UK: Butterworth-Heinemann.
99. Kumar, J., & Khamba, J. (2008). An experimental study on ultrasonic machining of pure
titanium using designed experiments. Journal of the Brazilian Society of Mechanical
Sciences and Engineering, 30(3), 231–238.
100. Pramanik, A., et al. (2013). Machining and tool wear mechanisms during machining
titanium alloys. In Advanced Materials Research. Trans Tech Publ.
101. Corduan, N., et al. (2003). Wear mechanisms of new tool materials for Ti-6AI-4V high
performance machining. CIRP Annals-Manufacturing Technology, 52(1), 73–76.
102. Zanger, F., & Schulze, V. (2013). Investigations on mechanisms of tool wear in machining
of Ti-6Al-4V using FEM simulation. Procedia CIRP, 8, 158–163.
103. Ginta, T. L., et al. (2007). Tool life prediction by response surface methodology for end
milling titanium alloy Ti–6Al–4V using uncoated carbide inserts. In International
Conference on Mechanical Engineering.
104. Abd Rahim, E., Warap, N., & Mohid, Z. (2015). Thermal-assisted machining of
nickel-based alloy.
105. Ezugwu, E. O., et al. (2007). Surface integrity of finished turned Ti–6Al–4V alloy with PCD
tools using conventional and high pressure coolant supplies. International Journal of
Machine Tools and Manufacture, 47(6), 884–891.
106. Rahman, M., Wang, Z.-G., & Wong, Y.-S. (2006). A review on high-speed machining of
titanium alloys. JSME International Journal Series C: Mechanical Systems Machine
Elements and Manufacturing, 49(1), 11–20.
107. Chauhan, D. K., & Chauhan, K. K. (2013). Optimization of Machining Parameters of
Titanium Alloy for Tool Life. Journal of Engineering Computers & Applied Sciences, 2(6),
57–65.
108. Uddin, M., et al. (2017). Comparative study between wear of uncoated and TiAlN-coated
carbide tools in milling of Ti6Al4V. Advances in Manufacturing, 5(1), 83–91.
109. Shivpuri, R., et al. (2002). Microstructure-mechanics interactions in modeling chip
segmentation during titanium machining. CIRP Annals-Manufacturing Technology, 51(1),
71–74.
110. Sun, J., & Guo, Y. (2009). A comprehensive experimental study on surface integrity by end
milling Ti–6Al–4V. Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 209(8), 4036–4042.
111. Kato, K. (2000). Wear in relation to friction—A review. Wear, 241(2), 151–157.
112. Ke, Q., Xu, D., & Xiong, D. (2017). Cutting zone area and chip morphology in high-speed
cutting of titanium alloy Ti-6Al-4V. Journal of Mechanical Science and Technology, 31(1),
309–316.
113. Rashid, R. R., et al. (2013). The response of the high strength Ti–10V–2Fe–3Al beta
titanium alloy to laser assisted cutting. Precision Engineering, 37(2), 461–472.
114. Sun, S., Brandt, M., & Dargusch, M. (2010). The effect of a laser beam on chip formation
during machining of Ti6Al4V alloy. Metallurgical and Materials Transactions A, 41(6),
1573–1581.
330 O. A. Shams et al.
115. Palanisamy, S., et al. (2007). A rationale for the acoustic monitoring of surface deformation
in Ti6Al4V alloys during machining. Advanced Engineering Materials, 9(11), 1000–1004.
116. Altintas, Y., & Weck, M. (2004). Chatter stability of metal cutting and grinding. CIRP
Annals-Manufacturing Technology, 53(2), 619–642.
117. Dogra, M., et al. (2010). Tool wear, chip formation and workpiece surface issues in CBN
hard turning: A review. International Journal of Precision Engineering and Manufacturing,
11(2), 341–358.
118. Hong S. Y., Markus I., & Jeong, W.-C. (2001). New cooling approach and tool life
improvement in cryogenic machining of titanium alloy Ti-6Al-4V. International Journal of
Machine Tool & Manufacture, 41, 2245–2260.
119. Amin, A. (1986). Influence of the instability of chip formation and preheating of work on
tool life in machining high temperature resistant steel and titanium alloys. Mechanical
Engineering Research Bulletin, 9, 52–62.
120. Namb, M., & Paulo, D. (2011). Influence of coolant in machinability of titanium alloy
(Ti-6Al-4V). Journal of Surface Engineered Materials and Advanced Technology, 1(01), 9.
121. Lei, S., & Pfefferkorn, F. (2007). A review on thermally assisted machining. In ASME 2007
International Manufacturing Science and Engineering Conference. American Society of
Mechanical Engineers.
122. Shams, O., Pramanik, A., & Chandratilleke, T. (2017). Thermal-Assisted Machining of
Titanium Alloys. In Advanced Manufacturing Technologies (pp. 49–76). Berlin: Springer.
123. Maity, K., & Swain, P. (2008). An experimental investigation of hot-machining to predict
tool life. Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 198(1), 344–349.
124. Klocke, F., & König, W. (2007). Fertigungsverfahren 3: Abtragen, Generieren und
Lasermaterialbearbeitung (Vol. 3). Berlin: Springer.
125. Bermingham, M., Palanisamy, S., & Dargusch, M. (2012). Understanding the tool wear
mechanism during thermally assisted machining Ti-6Al-4V. International Journal of
Machine Tools and Manufacture, 62, 76–87.
126. Luo, J., Ding, H., & Shih, A. J. (2005). Induction-heated tool machining of elastomers—Part
1: Finite difference thermal modeling and experimental validation. Machining science and
technology, 9(4), 547–565.
127. Luo, J., Ding, H., & Shih, A. J. (2005). Induction-heated tool machining of elastomers—Part
2: Chip morphology, cutting forces, and machined surfaces. Machining science and
technology, 9(4), 567–588.
128. Brecher, C., Rosen, C.-J., & Emonts, M. (2010). Laser-assisted milling of advanced
materials. Physics Procedia, 5, 259–272.
129. Kitagawa, T., Maekawa, K., & Kubo, A. (1988). Plasma hot machining for high hardness
metals. Bulletin of the Japan Society of Precision Engineering, 22(2), 145–151.
130. Sun, S., Brandt, M., & Dargusch, M. (2010). Thermally enhanced machining of
hard-to-machine materials—A review. International Journal of Machine Tools and
Manufacture, 50(8), 663–680.
131. Dogra M., & Sharma, S. V. (2013). Techniques to improve the effectiveness in machining of
hard to machine materials: A review. International Journal of Research in Mechanical
Engineering & Technology, 3(2), 122–126.
132. Anderson, M., Patwa, R., & Shin, Y. C. (2006). Laser-assisted machining of Inconel 718
with an economic analysis. International Journal of Machine Tools and Manufacture,
46(14), 1879–1891.
133. Tian, Y., et al. (2008). Laser-assisted milling of silicon nitride ceramics and Inconel 718.
Journal of Manufacturing Science and Engineering, 130(3), 031013.
134. Weck, M., Zeppelin, W., & Hermanns, C. (1994). Laser—A tool for turning centres. In
Proceedings of the LANE, Laser Assisted Net Shape Engineering.
135. Tian, Y., & Shin, Y. C. (2007). Laser-assisted burnishing of metals. International Journal of
Machine Tools and Manufacture, 47(1), 14–22.
136. Shi, B., & Attia, H. (2013). Integrated process of laser-assisted machining and laser surface
heat treatment. Journal of Manufacturing Science and Engineering, 135(6), 061021.
10 Comparative Assessment and Merit Appraisal of Thermally … 331
137. Amin, A. (1983). Investigation of the mechanism of chatter formation during metal cutting
process. Mechanical Engineering Research Bulletin, 6(1), 11–18.
138. Dandekar, C. R., Shin, Y. C., & Barnes, J. (2010). Machinability improvement of titanium
alloy (Ti–6Al–4V) via LAM and hybrid machining. International Journal of Machine Tools
and Manufacture, 50(2), 174–182.
139. Sun, S., et al. (2011). Experimental investigation of cutting forces and tool wear during
laser-assisted milling of Ti-6Al-4V alloy. Proceedings of the Institution of Mechanical
Engineers, Part B: Journal of Engineering Manufacture, 225(9), 1512–1527.
140. Ayed, Y., et al. (2014). Experimental and numerical study of laser-assisted machining of
Ti6Al4V titanium alloy. Finite Elements in Analysis and Design, 92, 72–79.
141. Wu, Z., et al. (2009). Evaluation and optimization method of high speed cutting parameters
based on cutting process simulation. Intelligent Robotics and Applications, pp. 317–325.
142. Rashid, R. R., et al. (2012). An investigation of cutting forces and cutting temperatures
during laser-assisted machining of the Ti–6Cr–5Mo–5V–4Al beta titanium alloy.
International Journal of Machine Tools and Manufacture, 63, 58–69.
143. Ginta, T. L., & Amin, A. N. (2010). Machinability improvement in end milling titanium
alloy TI-6AL-4V. (vol. 3, pp. 25–33).
144. Rashid, R. R., et al. (2014). A study on laser assisted machining of Ti10V2Fe3Al alloy with
varying laser power. The International Journal of Advanced Manufacturing Technology,
74(1–4), 219–224.
145. Lauwers, B. (2011). Surface integrity in hybrid machining processes. Procedia Engineering,
19, 241–251.
146. Ginta, T. L., & Amin, A. N. (2013). Surface integrity in end milling titanium alloy
Ti-6Al-4V under heat assisted machining. Asian Journal of Scientific Research, 6(3), 609.
147. Germain, G., et al. (2006). Effect of laser assistance machining on residual stress and fatigue
strength for a bearing steel (100Cr6) and a titanium alloy (Ti 6Al 4V). In Materials Science
Forum. Trans Tech Publ.
148. Joshi, S., Tewari, A., & Joshi, S. (2013). Influence of preheating on chip segmentation and
microstructure in orthogonal machining of Ti6Al4V. Journal of Manufacturing Science and
Engineering, 135(6), 061017.
149. Braham-Bouchnak, T., et al. (2013). The influence of laser assistance on the machinability of
the titanium alloy Ti555-3. The International Journal of Advanced Manufacturing
Technology, 68(9–12), 2471–2481.
150. Ginta, T. L., Amin, A. N., & Lajis, M. (2012). Suppressed vibrations during thermal-assisted
machining of titanium alloy Ti-6Al-4V using PCD inserts. Journal of Applied Sciences,
12(23), 2418.
Chapter 11
Smart Machining System Using
Preprocessor, Postprocessor,
and Interpolation Techniques
1 Introduction
Post processor
Direct servo LS file
Machining robot Machining robot
RV1A FANUC R2000iC
(a) Proposed process 1 (b) Proposed process 2
Normal ni Vertex v3 i
Vertex v2i
Vertex v1i
Unstructured triangulated patch
Curved surface consisting of
numerous triangle patches
In the early developed system, CLS data were basically generated along the original
STL data consisting of many triangle patches [13]. This subsection introduces an
advanced process, in which the CLS data for robot control are generated along a
zigzag path or spiral one by intelligently analyzing STL data. The significant
advantage of this approach is to eliminate the need to use any commercially pro-
vided CAM software, and accordingly, 3D printer-like data interface can be smartly
realized. First of all, dimensions of the STL data are extracted by retrieving all
patches in the STL file and they are set to two constants vmin = [xminyminzmin]T and
vmax = [xmaxymaxzmax]T. From the next subsection, two types of base paths viewed
in xy-plane are designed considering the extracted dimensions. They are a zigzag
path and a spiral one.
11 Smart Machining System Using … 337
This subsection explains how a base zigzag path is designed. Two effective ma-
chining parameters, i.e., pick feed and step, are respectively set to pf and sp by
referring the dimensions. sp is a constant pitch viewed in xy-plane between two
adjacent points cj = [cxjcyj 0]T and cj+1 = [cx(j+1)cy(j+1) 0]T on a zigzag path. One
pass point cj is appended into a CLS file as a “GOTO” statement. jð1 j mÞ is the
number of the pass points generated from STL data. m is the total number of
triangle patches in the STL file. Figure 4 illustrates an example of a base zigzag
path drawn within STL data consisting of multiple triangulated patches. As can be
seen, cxj and cyj are located just on the zigzag path, so that remained height czj has
only to be determined by analyzing triangle patches in the STL data.
cj cm −2
...
...
c3
c2
Start c
1
(x min , y min , 0)
Fig. 4 Base zigzag pathcj = [cxjcyj 0]T designed along STL data consisting of multiple
triangulated patches
338 F. Nagata et al.
To realize the preprocessor based on STL data without using any commercially
provided CAM system, the z-component czj must be calculated just on a triangu-
lated patch. In order to calculate czj, first of all, a triangulated patch, in which the
point cj viewed in xy-plane is included, is searched in the target STL data. Figure 6
shows the scene where the pass point cj is located within a patch. Note that cj−1 and
cj+1 may be also within the triangle patch as shown in Fig. 5. Whether cj is located
in the patch or not can be known by checking the following outer products.
If cj is located within the patch, then the above three equations have the same sign.
After finding the first triangle satisfying this condition, the equation of the plane
including the triangle is determined by the perpendicular condition to the normal
vector ni, which leads to
By respectively substituting cxj and cyj into x and y in Eq. (4), if nzi 6¼ 0, then z-
directional component czj can be calculated by
(1) (3)
cj+1
cj-1 cj
(5)
(1) (2) (4)
Fig. 5 Generation of pass points. Upper and lower figures show the top and front views of five
adjacent triangulated patches, respectively
11 Smart Machining System Using … 339
cj
v2 i
v1i cj −1
1
czj ¼ z1i fnxi ðcxj x1i Þ þ nyi ðcyj y1i Þg ð5Þ
nzi
where cxj and cyj are extracted from the base path shown in Fig. 4. Consequently, by
repeating the above calculations, all pass points cj = [cxjcyjczj]Tð1 j mÞ can be
obtained. Figure 7a shows a STL file of Chinese characters (214 mm 36 mm
5 mm) meaning “Tokyo University of Science, Yamaguchi” made by using Adobe
Illustrator and Photoshop; lower figure shows the regular and precise zigzag path
(CLS data) generated from the STL file by the preprocessor, in which the values of
step and pick feed are set to 0.4 mm.
Fig. 7 Upper figure shows a STL file made by using Adobe Illustrator and Photoshop; lower
figure shows the regular and precise zigzag path (CLS data) generated by the preprocessor
340 F. Nagata et al.
The base spiral [cxjcyj 0]T viewed in xy-plane for generating CLS data [cxjcyjczj]T is
designed by
rhj
cxj ¼ coshj ð6Þ
2p
rhj
cyj ¼ sinhj ð7Þ
2p
dcxj r
¼ ðcoshj hj sinhj Þ ð8Þ
dhj 2p
dcyj r
¼ ðsinhj þ hj coshj Þ ð9Þ
dhj 2p
When pass points [cxjcyj 0]T viewed in xy-plane are generated while drawing a spiral
path, two effective parameters need to be considered as shown in Fig. 8. One is the
movement lj [mm] from a pass point cj−1 to next one cj along the spiral, i.e., arc
length. The other is the pitch r [mm] along the radius vector. Operators can design a
preferred base spiral path only by giving lj and r.
The rate between the length lj of an arc on the spiral and the varying angle hj is
calculated by
ffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffi
s 2ffi qffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffi
dlj dcxj 2 dcyj r
¼ þ ¼ 1 þ h2j ð10Þ
dhj dhj dhj 2p
To produce better surface quality with less cusp heights in actual removal
machining using a ball-end mill, lj shown in Fig. 8 must be a constant value l.
Hence, the angle hj needs to be varied as
l 2p
Dhj ¼ qffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffi ð12Þ
r 1 þ h2
j1
This means hj has only to be adjusted by Eqs. (11) and (12) in order that lj is fixed
to a constant value l. Figure 9 shows a result of circular spiral path (CLS data:
215 mm 215 mm 5 mm) generated by the preprocessor viewed in Cartesian
space, in which l and r are set to 0.7 mm. Note that czj can be calculated by Eq. (5).
In the earlier subsections, the preprocessor that can generate two kinds of regular
and precise tool paths has been proposed. In this subsection, two machining
experiments were conducted using a machining robot and a desktop NC machine
tool, in which two tool paths (CLS data) generated by the preprocessor from STL
data shown in Figs. 3 and 10 are given to the systems. Figure 11 shows the suc-
cessful machining scene of the machining robot using the CLS data made along a
zigzag path (left photo) and the resultant surface (right photo). The material is a
foamed polystyrene. Also, Figs. 10 and 12 show another example of conversion
from STL data to spiral-based CLS data and its machining scene using a desktop
NC machine tool, respectively. The material is a chemical wood. The feasibility and
effectiveness were confirmed from the actual experiments using the machining
robot and the desktop NC machine tool.
When the density of CLS data is not high but coarse, some interpolation method is
effective to smoothly reconstruct the trajectory with preferable scaling. Figure 13
illustrates a third-order spline curve consisting of three cubic curves xi−1(t), xi(t) and
xi+1(t) just passing on four points pi−1, pi, pi+1, pi+2 (2 <31 ). The third-order spline
curve xi(t) = [xi(t) yi(t) zi(t)]T in Cartesian space is written as
xi ðtÞ ¼ ai t3 þ bi t2 þ ci t þ di ð13Þ
Fig. 10 Another example of conversion from STL to spiral-based CLS data using the
preprocessor
11 Smart Machining System Using … 343
Fig. 11 Machining scene of machining robot RV1A using zigzag-based CLS data shown in
Fig. 7 (left); resultant surface (right)
xi-1(t) xi(t)
xi+1(t)
pi-1 Pi+1
-1 0 1 2
Original CLS data (100%) Scaled and Interpolated CLS data (200%)
Fig. 14 Original CLS data (left), scaled and interpolated CLS data (right) illustrated in
perspective view
Coefficients in other two directions are similarly calculated, so that the section
between pi and pi+1 can be simply interpolated with xi(t) ð0 t 1Þ.
An experiment of scaling interpolation of a spiral path was conducted with the
third-order spline curve. The left side of Fig. 14 shows the points in the original
CLS data. Also, the right side of Fig. 14 draws the points in the CLS data inter-
polated with the third-order spline curve, which is scaled up with 200%. The
number of interpolated points within a section is set to three. As can been, the
coarse original CLS data were desirably interpolated, smoothed, and scaled up.
5 Conclusions
Questions
1. What is the problem in teaching process of an industrial robot using a teach
pendant?
Answer: When the desired trajectory includes free-formed curve, a large number
of points have to be taught. Accordingly, the teaching task is getting complicated
and time-consuming.
2. Give application examples of industrial robot.
Answer: Industrial robots have been applied to the automation processes of
welding, painting, handling, assembling, sanding, polishing, etc. The processes
have been successfully rationalized.
3. What are the main parameters in CAM process?
Answer: Type of tool path such as zigzag, whirl, and contour line; tool shape
(e.g., flat or ball end), tool length, tool diameter and/or radius, rotational speed;
tolerance to a designed model, pick feed, feed rate, and so on.
4. Explain the main processor and postprocessor of CAM system.
Answer: The main processor generates cutter location source data called CLS
data. Then, the postprocessor converts the CLS data into numerical control data
called NC data according to various kinds of CNC machine tools.
5. Give an example of contents in CLS data.
Answer:
GOTO/0.0000,-100.0000,-50.0000,0.0000000,0.0000000,1.0000000
GOTO/4.0217,-100.0000,-50.0324,0.0160868,0.0000000,0.9998706
GOTO/8.0424,-100.0000,-50.1294,0.0321695,0.0000000,0.9994824
GOTO/12.0610,-100.0000,-50.2911,0.0482438,0.0000000,0.9988356
GOTO/16.0764,-100.0000,-50.5174,0.0643057,0.0000000,0.9979302
GOTO/20.0877,-100.0000,-50.8083,0.0803509,0.0000000,0.9967666
In this example, the former three elements in each GOTO statement describe a
position vector, also the latter three elements form a normal vector at the position.
6. Give an example of contents in NC data.
Answer:
G01X44.3743Y7.1264Z0.2466B-32.2166C40.7584F3000.0
X48.4211Y0.0000Z-0.7536B-32.2166C40.7584
X50.0000Y0.0000Z0.0000B-32.2166C40.7584
X50.0428Y0.0403Z-0.0809B111.3599C-79.2415
X50.0000Y0.0000Z0.0000B111.3599C-79.2415
X48.4211Y0.0000Z-0.7536B111.3599C-79.2415
346 F. Nagata et al.
In this example, G01 and F3000.0 specify a linear motion with a feed rate of
3000 mm/min. B and C are rotational angles (deg.) around y-axis and z-axis,
respectively, for a five-axis CNC machine tool.
7. Write the structure of STL data including numerous triangulated patches.
Answer:
UINT8[80]//header area
UINT32//number of triangulated patches
for each triangle//This block is repeated as many as the number of triangles
REAL32[3]//normal vector
REAL32[3]//vertex 1
REAL32[3]//vertex 2
REAL32[3]//vertex 3
UINT16//not used
End
8. Explain each advantage of removal machining using a CNC machine tool and
additive machining using a 3D printer.
Answer: Various kinds of materials can be machined using an end mill in
removal machining processes; however, there is a limitation about shapes to what
the removal machining can produce. On the other hand, almost all shapes can be
produced in additive machining using a 3D printer; however, there is a restriction
related to the type of materials that the nozzle of 3D printer can discharge.
9. Give the examples of resin materials used for 3D printers.
Answer: ABS means a copolymer consisting of Acrylonitrile, Butadiene, and
Styrene. PLA is the abbreviation of Polylactic Acid.
10. Explain the difference between the data interface for CNC machine tools and
that for industrial robots.
Answer: Almost all CNC machine tools can be uniformly controlled based on
standard NC data. However, the data interface of industrial robots has not been
sufficiently standardized yet, so that engineers at user side have to learn different
robot languages provided by each robots’ maker.
Acknowledgements This work was supported by JSPS KAKENHI Grant Number 25420232 and
16K06203.
Glossary
References
1. Lee, M. K. (1995). Design of a high stiffness machining robot arm using double parallel
mechanisms. In Proceedins of 1995 IEEE International Conference on Robotics and
Automation, Vol. 1, pp. 234–240.
2. Schreck, D. S., & Krueger, J. (2014). HEPHESTOS: Hard material small-batch industrial
machining robot. In Proceedings of 41st International Symposium on Robotics (ISR/Robotik
2014), pp. 1–6.
3. My, C. A. (2010) Integration of CAM systems into multi-axes computerized numerical
control machines. In Proceedings of 2010 Second International Conference on Knowledge
and Systems Engineering (KSE), pp. 119–124.
4. Nagata, F., Otsuka, A., Watanabe, K., & Habib, M.K. (2014). Fuzzy feed rate controller for a
machining robot. In Proceedings of the 2014 IEEE International Conference on Mechatronics
and Automation (IEEE ICMA 2014), pp. 198–203.
5. Nagata, F., Yoshitake, S., Otsuka, A., Watanabe, K., & Habib, M. K. (2013). Development of
CAM system based on industrial robotic servo controller without using robot language.
Robotics and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing,29(2), 454–462.
6. Al-Ahmari, A., & Moiduddin, K. (2014). CAD issues in additive manufacturing. In
Comprehensive Materials Processing, Vol. 10: Advances in Additive Manufacturing and
Tooling, pp. 375–399.
7. Matta, A. K., Raju, D. R., & Suman, K. N. S. (2015). The integration of CAD/CAM and rapid
prototyping in product development: A review. Materials Today: Proceedings,2(4/5),
3438–3445.
8. Nagata, F., Okada, Y., Sakamoto, T., Kusano, T. M., Habib, K., & Watanabe, K. (2017).
Preprocessor with spline interpolation for converting stereolithography into cutter location
348 F. Nagata et al.
source data. In IOP Conference Series: Earth and Environmental Science, Vol. 69, Conf. 1, 9
pages. DOI:https://doi.org/10.1088/1755-1315/69/1/012115.
9. Brown, A. C., & Beer, D.D. (2013). Development of a stereolithography (STL) slicing and
G-code generation algorithm for an entry level 3-D printer. In Proceedings of IEEE African
Conference 2013, pp. 1–5.
10. Szilvasi-Nagy, M., & Matyasi, G. (2003). Analysis of STL files. Mathematical and Computer
Modeling,38(7/9), 945–960.
11. Iancu, C., Iancu, D., & Stancioiu, A. (2010). From CAD model to 3D print via STL file
format. Fiability & Durability,1(5), 73–81.
12. Nagata, F., Yamane, Y., Okada, Y., Kusano, T., Watanabe, K., & Habib, M. K. (2017). Post
processor for an industrial robot FANUC R2000iC, In Proceedings of 22nd International
Symposium on Artificial Life and Robotics, pp. 634–637.
13. Nagata, F., Takeshita, K., Watanabe, K., & Habib, M. K. (2016). Generation of triangulated
patches smoothed from original point cloud data with noise and its application to robotic
machining. In Proceedings of the 2016 IEEE International Conference on Mechatronics and
Automation (ICMA 2016), pp. 535–540.
Chapter 12
Comparison of Non-conventional
Intelligent Algorithms for Optimizing
Sculptured Surface CNC Tool Paths
Keywords Virus-evolutionary genetic algorithm Tool path optimization
Sculptured surface machining Machining simulation
1 Introduction
Mechanical engineering is a broad field that stems from the need to design and
produce almost everything in terms of goods, small-to-large-scale products as well
as devices and structures. The major scope of mechanical engineering is to capture
an original idea and deliver it as a final product for the market. Several prerequisites
are required to accomplish this such as skills and specialized knowledge of engi-
neering fundamentals depending the area of interest, i.e., solar energy, materials,
thermodynamics, product design, manufacturing.
The process of converting raw materials to final products/finished goods is found
in the area of manufacturing which deals either with small-scale or large-scale
production under predetermined requirements in terms of accuracy, functionality,
quality, and aesthetics [1]. Manufacturing involves a wide range of processes dis-
tinguished to metal-forming and material-removal operations. In metal-forming
processes, the material (usually metal) being handled is plastically deformed to take
the shape of a desired geometry. To plastically deform a metal, a force must be
applied with a magnitude such that yield strength of the material is exceeded.
Representative manufacturing processes of this category include bending, forming,
deep drawing, rolling, etc. [2]. Material removal is the major characteristic in metal
cutting (machining) processes where a large amount of volume has to be removed
from the stock to leave the final shape of the product that should correspond to its
original engineering drawing [2, 3]. Material removal is achieved by employing
different types of cutting tools that ought to maintain their properties during
machining; hence, a large body of high-strength materials and coatings are used for
their production. Most representative operations that fall in this category are turning,
milling, and drilling [4–7]. The aforementioned manufacturing processes found to
these categories are deployed using conventional or non-conventional technology.
Regardless of the selection of a single or multiple manufacturing processes to
manufacture high-quality products, process parameter optimization is an essential
task so as to cope with the trade-off between productivity and quality. The contra-
dictory nature of quality objectives has led several researchers to investigate
parameters for the aforementioned manufacturing processes and try to optimize them
so that cost, production rate, quality, and accuracy are simultaneously met.
Sculptured surface machining is the material-removal process extensively utilized to
produce products with free-form surfaces. Hence, as it occurs to the rest of the
aforementioned manufacturing processes, it is imperative to determine optimal tool
path parameters for achieving qualitative and efficient sculptured surface machining
operations [8]. Machining modeling for tool path generation is a major industrial
practice for producing functional and aesthetical parts. This is usually conducted by
testing several numerical values for tool path parameters that belong to applicable
12 Comparison of Non-conventional Intelligent … 351
concerning the proper selection of these parameters, it has been suggested that
optimal settings strongly depend on the problem formulation. Therefore, the most
common parameter settings recommended by the relevant literature have been
determined for each of the selected intelligent algorithms. The algorithm-specific
parameters and their corresponding settings are presented in Table 1.
Since intelligent algorithms have stochastic nature, each execution will often
result to different outputs. A common practice is to apply the algorithms several
times and study their behavior whilst keeping the best result. Despite the issue of
being totally in agreement with this important guideline, it was decided to try a
different concept that may represent more accurately real-world applications where
no time for experiments and trial-and-error efforts may be available. According to
the concept adopted, each of the algorithms was run only once and the solution was
recorded. However to avoid jeopardizing the algorithms’ actual capabilities in
converging to optimal solution, several preliminary experiments were conducted
revealing that they all were able to converge to the global minimum result for every
objective function tested according to the benchmark surfaces’ properties.
Optimization problems that deal with machining suggest either the maximization or
minimization of an objective function, usually reflecting a performance metric
under constraints. The problem might be expressed as it is shown in the following
equation.
12 Comparison of Non-conventional Intelligent … 355
gi ð xÞ 0; i ¼ 1. . .n
Min/Maxðf ðxÞÞ subject to : ð1Þ
xlj xj xuj ; j ¼ 1. . .m
where x is a vector of tool path parameters; f ð xÞ is the objective function for either
minimization or maximization; gi ð xÞ is the ith constraint, and xlj , xuj are the lower
and upper values for parameters x referring to their applicable intervals. Note that in
multi-objective optimization, several non-dominated solutions exist in a Pareto
front from which the user is prompted to select from. To ease the efforts when it
comes to this case is to formulate a linear expression among objectives and their
weights of importance to obtain only a single optimal solution from the Pareto
front.
Such linear expressions have been developed according to the objectives of case
studies examined in current experiments. Macro commands were developed and
operated in CAM software automation environment to parse cutting data files;
isolate tool axis coordinates and evaluate machining data for the objectives such as
chord error computations between interpolated tool positions and effective radius
owing to tool inclination angles affecting the scallop height. Since the objectives
involved to tool path assessment for machining sculptures surfaces are of different
magnitudes, they were normalized to 0–1 interval so as to alter the shift tending
toward the largest magnitude.
A bi-cubic Bezier surface has been designed in CAD environment for establishing
the machining experiments. The control points for this sculptured surface may be
found in Gray et al. [24]. The aim was to minimize the number of 5-axis tool
positions by reducing the number of cutting data (CL data) and maintain as lowest
machining error as possible. As far as machining error is concerned, the average
chord error and scallop height given via effective radius of the tool have been
356 N. A. Fountas et al.
considered. The benchmark surface as well as the tool path applied is shown in
Fig. 1.
Response surface methodology (RSM) has been adopted to generate and conduct
the machining simulations in CAM software for this sculptured surface. The
experimental design suggested 20 runs with a default alpha equal to 1.682.
A toroidal cutting tool Ø37.4 with 6 mm corner radius (Rc) has been used.
According to this tool, the lower bound for stepover was 10% of its diameter (equal
to 3.74 mm) whilst the upper bound was 35% (equal to 13.09 mm). Lead angle was
set to take values between 10° and 25°; tilt angle between 0° and 7°; and maximum
discretization step was kept to the constant value of 1.397 mm. Cutting tolerance
was determined equal to 0.025 mm. A common criterion for assessing the response
of tool path parameters was formulated and computed by an automated macro per
each experimental run as follows:
1
C¼ AvgChordErr þ þ NoCLs 103 ð2Þ
Reff
where AvgChordErr, Reff, NoCLs, and C are the average chord error, the effective
radius, the number of cutting data, and the criterion, respectively. Table 2 sum-
marizes the values for parameters and the results obtained for benchmark sculptured
surface 1.
According to the analysis of variance (ANOVA) corresponded to the afore-
mentioned experimental design, the full quadratic regression equation with
R2 = 65.4% has been generated and is as follows:
Fig. 1 Tool path applied on the benchmark sculptured surface 1 and corresponding bounds for
testing optimal tool path parameter values
12 Comparison of Non-conventional Intelligent … 357
8.9 9.2
9.1
8.8
Best Cost
Best Cost
9
8.7
8.9
8.6 8.8
8.5 8.7
8.4 8.6
8.5
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Iteration Iteration
Best Cost
9.1 9.1
9.05
9 9
8.95
8.9 8.9
8.85
8.8 8.8
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Iteration Iteration
(e) (f) 9.74
9.5 9.73
9.4 9.72
Best Cost
Best Cost
9.71
9.3
9.7
9.2
9.69
9.1 9.68
9 9.67
8.9 9.66
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Iteration Iteration
For the second machining simulation experiment, a benchmark part containing two
mirrored bi-cubic patches connected by a C0 continuous edge has been adopted.
Challenge in this particular case is imposed by machining the surface having
determined feed direction to be perpendicular to C0 continuous edge even though
12 Comparison of Non-conventional Intelligent … 359
good practices suggest that such a surface would be machined with feed direction
parallel to C0 edge. The same surface has been investigated by Gray et al. [25]
where a Ø50.8 Rc6.35 mm toroidal end-mill was applied to machine it, whereas
two fixed values for determining the forward step were set. The first forward step
value was set equal to 2.0 mm to interpolate most of the regions of the benchmark
surface, and the second forward step value was set to 0.762 mm to interpolate those
to the vicinity of C0 continuous edge. Results referring to surface finish were
scallop height and maximum undercut with the values of 0.1 and 0.07 mm,
respectively, and under the critical cutting tolerance of 0.1 mm. The benchmark
surface as well as the tool path applied is shown in Fig. 3.
Response surface methodology (RSM) has been adopted to generate and conduct
the machining simulations in CAM software for this sculptured surface. The
experimental design suggested 20 runs with a default alpha equal to 1.682.
A toroidal cutting tool Ø50.8 with 6.35 mm corner radius (Rc) has been used.
According to this tool, the lower bound for stepover was 10% of its diameter (equal
to 5.08 mm) whilst the upper bound was 15% (equal to 7.62 mm). Lead angle was
Fig. 3 Tool path applied on the benchmark sculptured surface 2 and corresponding bounds for
testing optimal tool path parameter values
360 N. A. Fountas et al.
set to take values between 15° and 20°; tilt angle was kept constant to 0°; and
maximum discretization step was varied from 0.762 to 2.0 mm. Cutting tolerance
was determined equal to 0.05 mm. In this case, the common criterion for assessing
the response of tool path parameters was formulated by utilizing CAM software
utilities for examining remaining material in the form of scallop magnitude and the
macro deployed in first case study to extract mean chord error and number of
cutting data for superficial quality and tool path efficiency, respectively.
The results obtained for remaining material in the form of scallop, mean chord
error, and number of cutting data were normalized in a “0–1” interval. The values
for the final 3D Pareto criterion that statistically analyzed to generate its regression
equation were computed using the relation shown in Eq. 4.
qffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffi
C¼ AvgChordErr2 þ h2 þ NoCLs2 ð4Þ
Table 4 summarizes the values for parameters and the results obtained for bench-
mark sculptured surface 2.
According to the analysis of variance (ANOVA) corresponded to the afore-
mentioned experimental design, the full quadratic regression equation with
R2 = 63.81% has been generated and is as follows:
Best Cost
0.805
0.8 0.82
0.795
0.81
0.79
0.785 0.8
0.78
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Iteration Iteration
Best Cost
0.805
0.818
0.804
0.803 0.816
0.802 0.814
0.801 0.812
0.8 0.81
0.799 0.808
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Iteration Iteration
(e) 0.93
(f) 0.855
0.92 0.8548
0.91 0.8546
0.9 0.8544
Best Cost
Best Cost
0.89 0.8542
0.88 0.854
0.87 0.8538
0.86 0.8536
0.85 0.8534
0.84 0.8532
0.853
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Iteration Iteration
Table 5 Optimal tool path parameters for machining the benchmark sculptured surface 2
Algorithm Stepover (mm) Lead (°) MaxDstep (mm) ObjFun
VGA 7.941 20.050 0.878 0.777870
TLBO 8.240 19.048 1.639 0.792076
SFLA 7.608 22.312 1.474 0.798637
PSO 7.426 21.717 1.394 0.806789
SCE 7.537 17.993 1.478 0.831343
IWO 7.232 27.871 1.406 0.852972
Fig. 5 Tool path applied to machine the complex sculptured surface and optimization intervals
The cut tolerance for the final experiments was set to 0.1 mm using the Ø16 mm,
Rc4 mm.
RSM has been applied to build the experiments with two independent variables:
lead angle and maximum discretization step. The former parameter was subjected to
the bound [5, 45] whilst the latter to [0.01, 0.1]. Stepover was set to 45% of the
Ø16 mm, Rc4 mm cutting tool (7.2 mm). According to the number of independent
variables, a total of 13 machining simulation experiments were conducted with
default alpha equal to 1.414. The multi-objective criterion formulated for this case
study was consisted of mean chord error, maximum height of remaining material,
number of cutting data, and maximum undercut. The results obtained for these
objectives were normalized in a “0–1” interval. The values for the common Pareto
criterion that statistically analyzed to generate its regression equation were com-
puted using the relation shown in Eq. 6.
qffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffi
C ¼ AvgChordErr2 þ h2 þ NoCLs2 þ u2 ð6Þ
With h and u to represent the maximum height detected for remaining material in
mm and the maximum undercut value in mm, respectively. Table 6 summarizes the
values for parameters and the results obtained for benchmark sculptured surface 3.
Table 6 Parameters for tool a/a exp. Lead angle (°) MaxDstep (mm) Criterion
path simulations and results
obtained 1 5 10 0.9502
2 45 10 0.8552
3 5 100 0.8964
4 45 100 0.7474
5 −3.2843 55 1.0133
6 53.2843 55 0.9730
7 25 −8.64 0.9241
8 25 118.64 0.8620
9–13 25 55 0.9786
364 N. A. Fountas et al.
1.44
Best Cost
Best Cost
1.44
1.435
1.435
1.43
1.425 1.43
Best Cost
1.442
1.436
1.44
1.435
1.438
1.434
1.433 1.436
1.432 1.434
1.431 1.432
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Iteration Iteration
(e) 1.439
(f)
1.4385 1.55274
1.55272
1.438
1.5527
Best Cost
1.4375
Best Cost
1.55268
1.437 1.55266
1.4365 1.55264
1.436 1.55262
1.4355 1.5526
1.435 1.55258
1.4345 1.55256
1.434 1.55254
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Iteration Iteration
With reference to Fig. 6, Table 7 summarizes the optimal tool path parameter
values recommended by the intelligent algorithms. Note that the global minimum
for the objective function given in Eq. 5 has been found equal to 1.4189 for a lead
angle value equal to 31.165° and for a maximum discretization step value equal to
0.0549 mm. These results cannot represent a generalized approach for solving the
multi-objective optimization problem, and they correspond only to this specific
case. The problem’s solution cannot be more reliable than 83.34% which is the
value of the regression model’s coefficient of determination R2 for the experiments
conducted concerning benchmark sculptured surface 3.
According to Fig. 6, the following indications are observed in terms of the
algorithms’ convergence speed, rate, and efficiency. VGA starts to converge with a
high convergence slope that gradually reduces to arrive finally in its minimum point
which is the value of 1.422339 for the corresponding objective function. TLBO’s
behavior shows a steady-state convergence in early iterations (from 1 to 2) whilst a
high convergence rate is reached during the second iteration until the fourth iter-
ation. Its minimum point of 1.428145 is attained in the last iteration by producing a
small slope from fourth to fifth iteration. SFLA is beneficial from the third to the
fourth iteration since a high convergence rate is noticed. Form the first until the end
of the third iteration, a steady-state (idle) convergence is observed. The final point
for SFLA is equal to 1.430669. PSO’s convergence behavior is quite similar to
SFLA algorithm suggesting a beneficial convergence ratio from the second to the
fourth iteration. The final point attained by PSO is equal to 1.431968. SCE algo-
rithm appears to produce the highest slope in terms of its convergence speed from
the first to the second iteration whilst no further optimization is attained until the
fifth iteration which is the last one with minimum value for the objective function
equal to 1.433817. IWO represents just as efficient convergence slope in early
iterations (iterations 1 and 2) as SCE algorithm followed by no further improvement
until the third iteration. IWO starts again to reduce its minimum point from the third
until fourth iteration, and finally in fifth iteration, the minimum value for the
corresponding objective function comes equal to 1.552528.
366 N. A. Fountas et al.
much about the quality of these regression models in this work, both VGA and
TLBO shown fast convergence to the lowest possible point according to the
problem handled. Even though the rest of the algorithms have been shown quite
promising, they did not obtain such minima as the ones obtained by VGA and
TLBO. Not intending to degrade the algorithms, it is mentioned that all of them
were capable of arriving to global minima for all experiments if more iterations and
candidate solutions than five are to be determined. To emphasize on the basic
optimization concept previously mentioned, VGA and TLBO ought to be preferred
for system integration referring to special cases should solutions need to be quickly
at hand. Unless optimal tool path planning does not fall into such particular cases,
all of the algorithms investigated may be utilized to be operated as ad hoc with
manufacturing software for globally optimal tool path planning.
Questions with answers (The correct answer is dictated with bold)
1. In metal-forming operations, the shape of the desired geometry for the product
is obtained by applying processes such as milling drilling and turning (True/
False)
2. One of the key processes in metal cutting is forging (True/False)
3. The final shape of the product must comply with specifications and require-
ments given in the engineering drawing (True/False)
4. Machining should be considered as a highly nonlinear optimization problem
(True/False)
5. Material-removal rate is an optimization criterion reflecting surface finish
(True/False)
6. Roughness parameters can be optimization criteria referring to quality (True/
False)
7. Design of experiments can only be applied to analyze results for metal-forming
operations (True/False)
8. Empirical models can be generated only to serve problem-solving referring to
metal cutting (True/False)
9. Artificial intelligence techniques may be applied to all aspects of mechanical
engineering for optimizing related problems (True/False)
10. Computer-aided manufacturing software is responsible for designing the pro-
duct (True/False)
Glossary
Chordal deviation The type of machining error owing to cutting tool interpolation
when applying CNC machining as a key metal cutting operation
Computer-aided manufacturing (CAM) Environment for modeling manufac-
turing processes with the aid of computers
368 N. A. Fountas et al.
References
1. DeGarmo, E. P., Black, J. T., & Kohser, R. A. (2007). Materials and processes in
manufacturing (10th ed.). New York: Wiley.
2. Kalpakjian, S., & Schmid, S. R. (2001). Manufacturing engineering and technology (4th ed.).
New Jersey: Prentice-Hall.
3. Boothroyd, G., & Knight, W. A. (2006). Fundamentals of machining and machine tools (3rd
ed.). Boca Raton: CRC.
4. Astakhov, V. P. (2006). Tribology of metal cutting. London: Elsevier.
5. Davim, J. P. (2003). Design of optimization of cutting parameters for turning metal matrix
composites based on the orthogonal arrays. Journal of Materials Processing Technology,132
(1), 340–344.
6. Davim, J. P., & Reis, P. (2005). Damage and dimensional precision of milling carbon
fiber-reinforced plastics using design experiments. Journal of Materials Processing
Technology,160(2), 160–167.
12 Comparison of Non-conventional Intelligent … 369
7. Davim, J. P., Reis, P., & Antonio, C. C. (2004). Experimental study of drilling glass fiber
reinforced plastics (GFRP) manufactured by hand lay-up. Computer Science Technology,64
(2), 289–297.
8. Choi, B. K., & Jerard, R. B. (1998). Sculptured surface machining: theory and applications.
Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers.
9. Palanikumar, K., Latha, B., Senthilkumar, V. S., & Karthikeyan, R. (2009). Multiple
performance optimization in machining of GFRP composites by a PCD tool using
non-dominated sorting genetic algorithm (NSGA-II). Metals and Materials International,
15(2), 249–258.
10. Garg, M. P., Jain, A., & Bhushan, G. (2012). Modelling and multi-objective optimization of
process parameters of wire electrical-discharge machining using non-dominated sorting
genetic algorithm II. Proceedings of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers Part B: Journal
of Engineering Manufacture,226(12), 1986–2001.
11. Fountas, N. A., Ntziantzias, I., Kechagias, J., Koutsomichalis, A., Davim, J. P., &
Vaxevanidis, N. M. (2013). Prediction of cutting forces during turning PA66 GF-30 glass
fiber reinforced polyamide by soft computing techniques. Materials Science Forum,766, 37–
58.
12. Bhavsar, S. N., Aravindan, S., & Rao, P. V. (2015). Investigating material removal rate and
surface roughness using multi-objective optimization for focused ion beam
(FIB) micro-milling of cemented carbide. Precision Engineering,40, 131–138.
13. Rao, R. V., Rai Dhiraj, P., Balic, J. (2016). Multi-objective optimization of machining and
micro-machining processes using non-dominated sorting teaching–learning-based optimiza-
tion algorithm. Journal of Intelligent Manufacturing, 1–21. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10845-
016-1210-5.
14. Zain, A. M., Haron, H., & Sharif, S. (2010). Application of GA to optimize cutting conditions
for minimizing surface roughness in end milling machining process. Expert System with
Applications,37(6), 4650–4659.
15. Sepehri Rad, H., & Lucas, C. (2007). A recommender system based on invasive weed
optimization algorithm. IEEE Congress Evolutionary Computer CEC,2007, 4297–4304.
16. Duan, Q. Y., Gupta, V. K., & Sorooshian, S. (1993). Shuffled complex evolution approach for
effective and efficient global minimization. Journal of Optimization Theory and
Applications,76(3), 501–521.
17. Eusuff, M., Lansey, K., & Pasha, F. (2006). Shuffled frog-leaping algorithm: A memetic
meta-heuristic for discrete optimization. Eng Opt,38(2), 129–154. https://doi.org/10.1080/
03052150500384759.
18. Gomez-Gonzalez, M., & Jurado, F. (2015). Machining parameters selection for milling
operations using shuffled frog-leaping algorithm. International Journal of Emerging
Technology and Advanced Engineering,5(5), 50–59.
19. Fountas, N. A., Kechagias, J. D., Vaxevanidis, N. M. (2016). Artificial immune algorithm
implementation for optimized multi-axis sculptured surface CNC machining. IOP Conference
Series: Material Science Engineering, 161(1).
20. Kubota, N., Fukuda, T., & Shimojima, K. (1996). Virus-evolutionary algorithm for a
self-organising manufacturing system. Computer and Industrial Engineering,30(4), 1015–
1026.
21. Fountas, N. A., Benhadj-Djilali, R., Stergiou, C. I., & Vaxevanidis, N. M. (2017). An
integrated framework for optimizing sculptured surface CNC tool paths based on direct
software object evaluation and viral intelligence. J Intell Manuf (Article in Press). https://doi.
org/10.1007/s10845-017-1338-y.
22. Fountas, N. A., Živković, S., Benhadj-Djilali, R., Stergiou, CI., Majstorovic, V. D.,
Vaxevanidis, N. M. (2017a). Intelligent dual curve-driven tool path optimization and virtual
CMM inspection for sculptured surface CNC machining. In V. Majstorovic, & Z. Jakovljevic
(Eds.), Proceedings of 5th International Conference on Advanced Manufacturing
Engineering and Technologies, NEWTECH 2017, Lecture Notes in Mechanical
Engineering, Berlin: Springer.
370 N. A. Fountas et al.
23. Fountas, N. A., Vaxevanidis, N. M., Stergiou, C. I., & Benhadj-Djilali, R. (2014).
Development of a software-automated intelligent sculptured surface machining optimization
environment. International Journal of Advanced Manufacturing Technology,75(5–8), 909–
931.
24. Gray, P., Bedi, S., & Ismail, F. (2003). Rolling ball method for 5-axis surface machining.
Computer Aided Design,35, 347–356.
25. Gray, P. J., Ismail, F., & Bedi, S. (2004). Graphics-assisted rolling ball method for 5-axis
surface machining. Computer Aided Design,36, 653–663.
26. Roman, A., Barocio, E., huegel, J., & Bedi, S. (2015). Rolling Ball method applied to 3½½-
axis machining for tool orientation and positioning and path planning. Advances in
Mechanical Engineering,7(12), 1–12.
Index
A C
Abrasive Flow Machining (AFM), 270, 275, Carbon Monoxide (CO), 200
276, 279 Carnot cycle, 162–165
Abrasive Jet Machining (AJM), 269, 270, 272, Chemical Machining (CM), 289, 290
273 Chemo-Mechanical Polishing (CMP), 292
Abrasive Water Jet Machining (AWJM), 274, Circular spiral path, 340, 341
275 Clausius statement, 161
Actuators, 213, 218–220, 224, 229 Closed system, 147, 148, 153, 154, 167
Advanced machining processes, 269–271, 281, Cloud robotics, 232, 233
293 CLS data, 333–337, 339–344
Alternate fuels, 179, 194 Coin minting, 83–87, 89, 90, 92–96, 100, 101,
Arduino program, 258–260 105, 107, 108
Artificial intelligence, 214, 215, 218, 225, 226, Compressible flow, 141
231–233 Computer vision, 241, 251
Artificial vision, 241, 242 Conduction, 137, 144–146, 172
Automatic Guided Vehicle (AGV), 251–256, Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT),
259, 260, 262, 263 44, 48, 49
Automatic mechanisms, 214, 215 Control, 217–220, 224–226, 228, 229,
Automation, 217, 225, 226, 228, 229, 233 232–234
Convection, 137, 144–146, 172
B Crank, 45, 46, 51–53, 57–62, 66, 67, 69, 70,
Benchmark sculptured surfaces, 349, 352, 355, 72–76
366 Cutting processes, 3, 21, 29, 31, 35
Bicycle drivetrain, 45, 47, 64 Cycles, 147, 151, 152, 165
Biodiesel, 179–192, 194, 195, 203, 204
Biodiesel plants, 179, 180, 182, 185–191, 193, D
194, 203 Design, 3–5, 8, 16–20, 23, 25, 26, 28, 29,
Biomimetic robots, 232 35–38, 43–45, 52–54, 57, 59, 61, 64,
Brake Specific Energy Consumption (BSEC), 65, 67, 69–72, 71, 72, 76
200 Design of experiments, 349, 353
Brake Thermal Efficiency (BTE), 199 Die profile, 90, 100–103, 106, 107
S V
Safety factor, 5, 19 V-Belt theory, 54
Sculptured surface, 349–352, 354–366 Viscous flow, 140
Sensors, 213, 218–222, 225 Vision system, 242–244, 246–249, 262
Smart machining system, 334
Smart spline interpolation, 333–335, 342 W
Social robotics, 232 Water Jet Machining (WJM), 269, 270, 273,
Spindle, 43, 53, 57–60, 62, 64, 65, 69, 72, 73, 274
75 Wear mechanisms, 127
STL data, 333–338, 342, 344 Wear scar, 124–127
Strain, 3, 5–17, 19, 23–28, 31, 33, 36, 37 Work, 138, 139, 150, 151, 154–159, 161–163,
Stress–strain curves, 92, 94, 107 166–168, 172
Syngas, 179, 194
Synthetic biology, 235 Y
Yield strength, 8, 9, 17–20, 28, 38
T
Thermal energy, 156, 169 Z
Thermal engineering, 137, 139, 172 Zigzag path, 334, 336, 337, 339, 342